Docslide - Us - Trimble Series 4000 Reference Manual PDF

Series 4000 Reference
EI rrimbte
Series 4000
Receiver Reference
Prrt Nunhcr: 21lgHl0

Revldon: A
Drte! Februrry 1995
Tnnbb Nat U,[io{' Li/,ibd

9,rcynldArlbtr/tgDividon
45 Not t tiary Averue
P$totrpe 8ot( fl2
gtmwle, CAsqW36A
,W@7qXn@dEU.9.)
tb U.S.t
14,a.{814XXt (o'ifrt&
Fax:140e481{214
Series 4Un Receiver Rek,enc? revision A, February I995.
Describes receiver firmwarc version 7.0O.
@ Copydght 1995 by Trimble Navigalion Limited Surveying & Mapping Systems Division.
All rights rcserved. No pan of this guide may be copied, photocopied, reproduced,
tmnslaled, or reduced to any electronic medium or machhe-readable folm without prior
written consent fmm Trimble Navigation Limited-
Printed in rhe United Stares of America.
Notlcea
El€ctrlcd $fety. Power adapters such as the Office Suppon Module 2 (OSM2) contain
high AC voltages when opemting. Please read and obey the instructions for their use.
Cl.ss A ComputinE Devic€-IDfomation lo User. This equipmcrt has been tested and
found ro comply with the limits for a Class A digital dcvice, punuant to Pan I 5 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable pmtection against hamful
interfercnce when the equipment is opemted in a commercial cnvirooment. This equipmedt
geoemtes, uses. and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installcd and used in
accordadce with the iDstruction manual, may cause hamful inteference to Iadio
communications. Operation ofthis equipment in a rcsidential area is likely to cause hamful
interference, in which case the user will be rcquired to corect the interference at his own
GPS s€ric€ subject io change wlthout notice. The U.S. govemment has slated lhat
prcseni GPS usem do so at lheir own risk and thar the govcmment may change or end
operation of these satellites at any time and without waming.
Advisory Noticei Some of the rcceivers describ€d in this manual use the GPS P-code signal,
*hich by U.S. policy may be cncrypted or switched offwithout notice.
Dlsclaimer. Trimble Navigation Limired reserves the right to make changes to this manual
aIId product wilhour notice. Unless otherwise agreed lo in l|,riting, Trimble Navigation
Limited assumes no responsibility or liability for use of this manual and product or for
infringement of any copyright or other propri€tary right and nothing coniained in this
manual and product shall be deemed a warranty or guarantee by Trimble Navigation
Limited.
Series 4000 Receiver Beference

Tradrmarks
,1000 Do*nload,,l000A, 4000DS, 4omDSR,.m00RS, 4moRSR,40005,,|{)00SE 4000SSE,
,looOSSi,,l000ST, Asset SuIvey6, DeltaNsv QC, Dual-Frequenq,, Faststatic, tu€tic
Surveyor, G€od€tic Su$cyor SSi, Geodetic System Su eyor, Oeodetic System Suveyor
SSi, GIS Surveyor GPsurvey, HYDRO, Lsnd Surveyor II, Land Surveyor m, PFINDER,
PostNav tr, RTK, Seisrnic Controller, Siagle-FrEqueBcy, Site Suveyor SSi, Super-trak,
Survey ConEollcr, Syslcm Surveyor tr, TDCI, TRIMTALK 900, TRIMVEC Plus arc
tradema*s of Trirtrble Navigariotr Limited.
IBM is a registel€d traderndk of Int€mational Business Machines,Inc.
Intel is a tsadcrDark of htel Corporation.
Microcofr and MS-DOS aI€ r€gistered iradem&ks of Miqosoft Coryoration. V/indo*s is a
Eadcmark of Micaosoft Corporfiion.
All oth€r brand Dames ar€ tradcrnar&s ofihcir rcspective hold,ers.
Pat€nta
The s6ies (D0
rrc€iveN ar€ coveEd by the following U.S. patents: 4754465,4M7862,
5148179, 5m2694, 5296861. 5357 5n , $59332, other patents ponding.
^nd
S€des 4000 Receiver tleisrence

Table of Contents
I Introduction...... .................,. I
Thc S€ries 4000 Receivers ..,,..........................................................................1
"Maxwell" Technolog/ ........................,,,,......,..,,,,2
Super-trak Technology ..........................................2
Dual-FrEquercy Surveying Receivers........................................................3
Single-Frequency Surveying Receivers..............................................--.....5
single-Frcquency Positioniog Receivers .,,,..........................................,....6
Dual-Frcquency Positioning Recciveas,,,,,,...................................,........,...7
Single-FrEquency M.pping Receivers ,.....................-................................7
Receivers Not Discussed in This Malual ..................................................7
What You Should Know.................................,..........................................,....8
Notes on Terminology. ................................................8
How to Use the Seies 4000 Manuals .....,,................,......................................9
2 The Keypad and Dispby ..........,...13
Series rlom Receivor Referonce

Table of Contents
Numeric Fields.---...-----..-----..... ..................................
Alphanumeric Fields... ..............................27
SELECT LEG.........--._._.-.... .........._._.................._... 52
Serie6 4000 Recoiver Reforence

Tabl6 ot Contents
......75
Refcrence Station......... ....9

.___1m
Sed6s 4000 Recelvor Boferehce vil

Tablo oI Contenls
POWER CONTROL... .....119

DATA FORMAT........ ...................... 122
Seriog 21000 Receivor Reforence

Tablo oI Contents
Step 1: Select or Define a Station Description ... ......................................,...149

Step 2: Enter Station's Refeftnce Position ........................................,.......... 152
S€lect Automatic or Manual Entry ........................................................ 152
Step 3: Select or Define a Session ........................---.--............-..,......... 154
Step4:SetSpecialControls.....................,,............................................,,...157
Setting Special Conftols Values ........,..........................,,...,,,..........,,,,...158
Step 5: Schedule the Session..............................................,,....,,.................160
Step 6: Set Additional Parameters ............................................................... l6l
Slcp ?: Add Another Session........-.................,............... 163
Step 8: Add Anothe! Station. ......__--_-----------.-.---.-.---- 163
QIJICK.START NOW ........-.............-.. 169
S€rlss .l0oo Receivor Reference ix

Table of Conlents
Se66s 4000 Roceiver Belerance

Table of Cont€nls
Broadcast Data I
lonospheric & UTC Data......,..................,.,.......... ....-u3
schedule Plo! for All Salellites ..................--......... ..........247

Receiver S€tup lnfo..... .....u4
Cycle Pintouls............ xt
Navigation Calcu1ations........................................
Compact Measurments.........,.............................. ......2fi
Position Type 2............
RT Survev Data.......... 271
Series 40m Receiver R€ference x

Table of Contents
......325
Sei6s ,{OOO Beceiver Refer6nca

xI
Table of Contents
List of Figures
2-1. A Rack-Mounted Receiver's Front Panel....... ..............13
2-2.APortableReceivefsFrontPanel,.......... ....................14
2-3. A Part of the Re.eiver's Scleen Hierarchy ,,,,,,,.....,......11
3-1. Hierarchy ofStatu, Scre€ns..................... ...................34
4-1. Eierirchy of Sa, /r/o Sqeens ....................... ..............73
5-1. Hierarchy of Conrrd, Screens.................. -,-...............82
6-1. Illeturchy of Modift Screens........................ .........,...136
7-l.ProcedurcforUsing.SessionsScreens,...... ...........,,...148
8-1. Procedurc for Using Irg Data Scre€ns (Not lrgging Data)..........................165
8-2. Plocedure for Usingl/,g Data Screens Q-!gging Data)................................. 166
A-1. Portable Recciver Rear Panel.................. ,................219
A-2. Rack-Mouted Receive. Rear Pane1.......... ...............22O
A-3. Tirbe Tag Relation to 1 PPS Wave Form .................235
B-1. A Broadcast Data Printout ....,,...,,......,.... ,,....,..........242
B-2. An Ionospheric ard Urc Data Printout...... ..............U4
B-3. A Part of a Satellite Elevation P1ot.......... .................246
B-4. A Part of a Schedule Plot for All Satellites ....,..........248
B-5. A Receiver Setup Info Printout ...,,.......... .................250
8-6. A Position Calculations Cycle Printout...... ..............255
B-7. A Navigation Calculations Cycle Printout..........................,.,,.... ,.....,,,,...,,...254
B-8. RTCM-104 Input and Outpu1.................. ....,,,,,..,,,,,.274
Serles r(lo0 Beceiver Berorence xiii

Table ol Conlenls
List of Tables
)dv Serios /lmo R€ceiv€r Refetenc€

1 lntroduction
This manual describcs all cuEent model$ iD the Trimble Series 4000
group of GPS receive$. These receivers are designed for a variety of
applications in the area3 of surveying, positioning, and navigation,
but they share many hardware and firmware components, and they
behave alike in many rBspecls.
The Series 4000 Beceivers

All current memtrers of the Series 4000 share these features:
. Tmck GPS satellites on nine or more Ll or LllI2 channels.
. Can measutE carrier pharc o compute very high-precision
vectors between two stations.
. Makc lo*,-noise C/A code measurEuEnts with carder aided
filtering and smoothing.
. Automstically calculateoverdeterminedposition solutions
when enough satellites arc available,
. Can automatically compute 3D or 2D position fixes depending
on th€ nulnber of satellit€s being tracked.
. Can output all raw and computed dala through bi-directional
RS-232 ports for Eansmission by radio modem, logging on a
computer, or input !o navigation hstrumenrs.
. Can resurne last operation affer power-down / power-up cycles.
S6.ies,lO0O Rec€iver Roisrencs

lntroduction
. hesent data on a il-line, 4o-characrer front-panel disptay.

The following sections briefly desdibe the rcceivers discussed in
this rnarual. For moie detailed descriptions of an individual rcceiver,
see that rcceiver's Ur"r Gr,ide.
"Maxw€ll" Technology
The lat€st generation of Sedes 40m ,eceivefs featurE Trimble's
proprietary Maxwel technology, which povides more lxEcise
position rneasurcments by means of very low-noise C/A code
pocessing. In differential GPS (DCPS) applications, Maxwell
technology increases the precision of position fixes from
a2-5 mcters RMS horizontal to better than tlmeter. Also, the
prccirion of cairier phase measurchent has been incrcased nearly to
its theorctical limit.
The follotr int model descriptions tell which rEccivers use Maxwell
techrclogy.
Super-trak'll Technology
4000SSi series receivers fcaErE Trimble's Super-rak technology.
Super-rrak enables acquiring lolv power satellite signals, matulaining
better lock on signals once acquirEd and Eacking under conditions of
hiSh RF interference. Super-trak is a combination of hatdwarc and
firmwale Gchnology, including Eue multibit signal processing.
Peformance tests show significantly improved jamming immunity
over lesser equipped receivcrs. Another system benefit is
mealuement of the I2 range during P-code encryption. Receivers
wilh the SSi designariod usc Supcr-trak technology.
Series il00o Feceiver Refer6nce

lntroduciion
Dual-Frequency Survaying Receivero

Dual-ftequency receivcrs (those eqdpped with the Dual Frcquency
Option) observe satcllite measurcments on both the Ll and the L2
frequencies. They thus can perform Faststatic surveys and RTK
surveys (with rhe RTK Functions Option), as well as static and
kinematic surveys.
By m*suring transmission trme differEnces bctri'/een the two
frequencies, dual-fiequency receivers can compensate for
measurcmetrt crrors duc to atmospheric delay. They also Foduce
cleaner, lower-noise measuements than single-liequency rcccivers.
These features make them particularly useful for control surveying
&nd other applications that demand very accuratc results over long
distances. Dual-ftequency receivels also can opemte under morc
difficult conditions, such as interference caused by high ioDospheric
activity.
The 4A00SSE Site Suoelor is a Maxwell-based receiver. It provides
9 channels of Ll P-code and carrier phase, and 9 channels of L2 P-
code and carrier phasc. During periods whcn Anti-spoofing is acrive,
it uses L1lL2 cross-correlation to derive information from the
encrypted P-code. This rcceivcr is capable of pcrforming real-rime
surveys, The system provides centimeter accumcy positions in rEal
time. It is suitable for shon range contlol (up to l0 km), topographic
surveys and sakc out opemtions. Real-time kincrnatic firmware is a
standald featurc.
The 4000SSE land Sun etor /D is a Maxwell-bas€d receive!. It
provides carrier phase measurement on both Ll and L2, and P-code
measurement on L2 only. Dudng periods when the Deparfircnt of
Defense's Anti-Spoofing mode is active, it uses ha.lf-wave L2
processing to derive information from thc L2 signal. It providcs
economical dual-fi equency nrasurement for surveying applications
that do not rcquire more sophisdcated features.
Sedes 4ooo Rgc€iver Referenc€

lntroduction
'fhe 4000SSE Geodetic ,lurveyor is similar to the Land Surveyor IID,

but offers substantially more functions in an economical package. It
receives and makes measurcmcnts on P-code on borh L1 and L2,
During pedods wh€n Anti-Spoofing is active, it uses L1l1-2 cross-
corelation (6th Observablc technology) to derive infomation from
the encrypted P-code. This technique replaces the earlier half-wave
L2 measurcment techniquc.
'l'he 40aOSSE Geodetic Sysrem Surveyor is similar to the Geodetic
Surveyor, but provides sevcral fcaturcs that are useful for integrating
tie receiver toSether with other pieces of equipment into a system.
These features include NMEA-o I 83 output for communication with
other NMEA-0183 compatiblc devices: RTCM- 104 input for
computing corrected position fixes in real time: I puls€y'second
output to provide a precise timing signal for synchronization with
other devices; and event markcr input lor recording time-tagged data
about events that occur dudng data logging. It also provides an
extended navigation facility, including the ability to define up to
99 waypoints and use them to navigate complex courses.
The Sire Sarveyar SJi is a Maxwell-based receiver that includes
Super-trak technology. It prcvides 9 channels ofl-l P-code and
carrier phase, and 9 channels of L2 P-code ard canier phase. During
periods when Anti-Spoofing is active, it uses Super-trak technoloSy
to measure the L2 range. This receiver is capable ofperforming real-
lime surveys. The system provides centimeter accuacy posirions in
real time. It is suitable for short range control (up to 10 km),
topographic surveys and stakc out operatlons. Real-time kinematic
firmware is a standard featurc.
The Geodetic Surveyor SSi is a Maxwell-based receiver that includes
Super-trak technology. Like the Site Su8eyor SSi, the Geodetic
Surveyor S Si provides 9 channels of L I P-code and carrier phase,
ard 9 channels of L2 P-code and carrier phase. Dudng periods when
Anti Spoofing is active, it uses Super trak technology to measure the
L2 range. This recciver is capable of performing static, Faststatic,
Series 4o0o Receiver Reference

lntroduclion
and kircmatic su eys. It can record 26 hours of s-satellitc LllL2

data at a 15 second measurement time.
The Geodetic System Survelor SSi is a Maxwcll-based rcceiver that

includes Super-Eak technology. The Geodetic System Surveyor SSi
is sirrilar to the Geodetic Surveyor SSi, but provides several fealurcs
that aIe useful for integrating the receiver with other pieces of
equipment in the system. These features include NMEA-0183 output
for communication with other NMEA-o183 compatible devices;
RTCM input for computing correcrci position fixes in rcal time; I
pulse/second output to provide a precise dming signal for
synckonization with other devices; and evcnt marker input for
recording time-tagged data about events that occur during data
logging. It also provides an extended navigation facility including
the ability to define up to 99 waypoints and use them to navigate
complex couses. It can rccord 65 hours of 5-satellil@ LllL2 dnta al a
15 second measlrement time.
Slngle-F oqu€ncy Survcying Recelvers

Single-ftequency receivers measure C/A code on the Ll frequency
only; they do not rcceive the L2 frequency, and do not measure
P-code. They arc designed primarily for surveying applications over
dislances of up to 15 or 20 Km. They cannot perform thc Fastslatic
procedure (which rEquires the Dual Frcquency Option).
The 40005E land Surveyor is an economical receiver for surveyint

applications. It can log data in both compact format (used by all of
the rcceivers discussed in this manual) and standard format (used by
some earlier Series 4000 reccivers).
The 400OSE Lrnd Sunetor // is an cconomical Maxwell-based

rcceiver for sufleying applications lhat rcquirc centimeter accuracy.
In addition to the Maxwell processor, its basic configumtion
provides more memory than the Land Surveyor (l MB instead of
0.5 MB) and morc serial ports (two instcad of one).
S€ries 40OO Recaiver Belerencg

Introduclion
The 400058 System Sulvs)or // is similar to the Land Surveyor II,

but provides feaores for integrating the receiver together with other
equipment into a system. These features are essentially the same
ones that distinguish the Geodetic System Surveyor ftom the
Geodetic Surveyor (see "Super-trakd Technology
4000SSi series receivers leature Trimble's Super-trak technology.

Super-trat enables acqufuing low power satellite signals, maintaining
better lock on signals once acquired and facking undet conditions of
high RF interference. Super-uak is a combination of hardware and
finnware lechnology. includirg true multibit signal processing.
Performance tests show significantly imprcved jamming immunity
over lesser equipped receiveN. Another system benefrt is
measurement of the L2 range during P-code encryption. Receivers
with the SSi designation use Super-trak technology.
Dual-Frequency Surveying Receivers." above,.
The Site Surt)eyor SE is a Maxwell-based receiver with a 9 L1
channel (C/A code and carier tmckng) capable of pedoming rcal-
time kinernatic surveys. The system provides centimeter accuracy
positions in real time. It is suitable for topographic sufieys and stake
out operations. Standard features include real-time kinematic
fimware and oMb memory.
Single-Frequency Positioning Receivers

'fhe 4000R5 Reference Snrveyor is a Maxwell-based receiver that is
oriented toward precision positioning applications. It is intended for
use as a DGPS base station, generating RTCM- 104 corrections
which a DCPS rover (like the 4000DS, below) can use to compute
very accuate position fixes.
The 4000D5 Differential Suneyor is similar to the 4000RS, but is
intended for use as a DGPS rover. Thai is, it can apply RTCM- 1O4
corections to the satellite data it receives in order to genemte very
accuate position fixes in real time.
Series zlooo Receiver Reference

lntroduction
The 4NoRSR altd 4oUDSR are identical to the 4000RS and 4000DS
except for their enclosures: they are packaged ill a rack-mountEd
enclosure instead of a wate4roof ponable enclosure.
Dual-Frequency Po3itionlng B€ceivors

The 4000MSK DGPS Reference Receiver \s rack-
^Maxwell-based,
mounted unit that can provide a modulated carrier wave dL€ctly to a
radiobeacon transmitting system.
Slngl€-Frequency Mapping REceiverg

The G/S Szrveyor is orientcd towad GIS data-acquisition
applications, which rcquirc the ability to enter attribute data (str€Et
names, asset descriptions, ctc.) along with position data. It is similar
to drc 4(n0SE System Sureyor tr, but lack the Carricr Phas€
Option. Its standffd features include I MB of memory,
Recelvors Not Discussed in Thls Manual

All of the rcceivers descriM in this manual have similar hardwarc
and limware. They diffq in the presence or absence of Maxwcll
te.hnology, Super-Eak technoloSy, and of various fe8tules lhat adapt
a rcc€iver to one class of applications or another.
The Series 4000 includes sevcral ea ier models that have

substa ially diffeEnt hardwale and firmwarc. These Eceive$ ax6
discussed only in individual Operarioti Manuars that prcdate the
currcnt S€ies 4000 doclrmentation s€t. These earlier models ale:
. Series 4000AX
. Series 40005, SL, and SLD
. Series 4000ST and SST
. S€des 4{n0SX
Series /[{m Floceiver Roference

lntroduction
. Series 4000SE Static Land Surveyor, Kinernatic lnnd

Surveyor, and System Suveyor
. Series 4000RL-tr, RL-IIR, DL-II, and DL-IIR
What You Should Know

This manual provides detailed reference infonnation about members
of Series 4000 GPS receivers. It assumes that you already are
familiar with the basic procedures for operating your rec€iver. If you
are not yet familiar with the receiver, see the frst few chapters of its
User Guide.
This manual also assumes that you understand the application for
which you intend to use your receiver.
You should be familiar with the principles of the NAVSTAR Global
Positioning System (GPS), and with the teminology that is used to
discuss it. For example, you should unde$tand such tems as rpace
vehicl.e (SV), elevation mask, and dilution of prec,sia, (DOP). If you
are not familiar with the NAVSTAR GPS, we suggest that you read
Trimble's booklet GPE A Guide to the Next Utiliry- You can find a
complete citation to that publication in the Biblio$aphy at the end
of this manual.
To download and postprocess logged datq you should know how to
use personal computers running the IBM DOS or MS-DOS
operating system. You should be able to run prcgrams, create and
use directodes, and use common DOS commands for copying,
renaming, aDd deleting files.
Notes on Terminology
Series 4000 receivers are used in several different applications that
have developed independently of each other, and this has led to a
Series 21000 Recoiver Reference

lnlroduction
cenain amount of inconsistent terminology, For example, in static

suneyinS the point that a receivels GPS antenna occupies durinS a
satellite observation has tmditionally been called skttion; ,n
Faststatic surveying it has been called a malk, and^ in kinematic
surveying it has bcen called a point.
Trimble's documentation has adopted a consistent set of terms as far
as it is practical to do so. For lhe present, this will lead to some
inconsisteDcy between documentation and equipment. For example,
documentation consistcntly uscs the tcrm rnart for a point rr,/hose
coordinates are to be determincd, but the static surveying procedur€'s
receiver screens coDtinue to say rralion. Furure releases of software
will reduce or eliminate these inconsistencies.
The first chapter of the Seies 4000 Application Guide sutt,Jllar')zes
the major changcs in tcrminology. These terms and others are
defined in the Glossary near the end of this hanual.
How to Use the Series 4000 Manuals

Each Series 4000 GPS receiver is accompanied by seveml pieces of
A User Guide ifirodlces the receiver and describes those of its

features tiat are not shared by other members of the Series
4000.
The Seies 40@ Receiver Reference (this dn:ument) descdbes
all features found in Series 4000 receivcrs, in complete detail. It
is useful when you need to k[ow exactly how a particular kcy
or data display works, or you need technical informalion about
a receiver's power tequirements, inputs, or outputs.
me Series 40d) Applicatiorl Guide explains the applications

that Se es 4000 receivers may be used for, such as Faststatic
surveying, navigation, and rcaltime posirioning with
diffqentiat GPS. It discusses the pur?ose of each procedure,
Series 4000 Receiver Roference

Introduction
explains how to perform the procedure, and gives suggestions

for planning the procedurc and configudng the receiver.
Once you are familiar with the basics ofusing a receiver, the
Application Guide and the Quick Reference (belo, ) sholrld
ordinarily be the only pieces of documentation you need to take
into the fieid.
. A of Series 4000 Quick References s\tfilnaflze the
set
procedues most often pedolmed with each receiver. They are
much less detailed than the Application Cuidc, b]ut their
compacl format makes lhem very convenienl to carry in your
shirt pocket or backpack.
What is in the Senes 1000 Receiver Referunce. The majot
divisions of the text in the Seies 4000 Receiver Reference are:
. Chapter 1, "IntDduction" (this chapter), briefly desc bes Senes
4000 GPS rcceivers and documentation that supports them.
. Chapter 2, "The Keypad and Display," shows you how to use
the receiver's keypad and LCD display. (This information is
also presented in Chapter 2 of each User Guidc.)
. Chapter 3, '"lhe Stat rr Sdeens," desdibes receiver functions
you can use by pressing the (stet[Slkey. These functions
display information abour the status and configuation of the
receiver. They also provide many of the receiver's navigation
functions.
. Chaptet 4,"The Sat lnfo Screens," describes receiver functions
you can use by pressing the lGlil Fo-lkey. These functions
display and print information about satellites and the receiver.
. Chapter 5, "The Corrml Screens," describes receiver functions
you can use by pressing the l66Fiaor-lkey. These functions let
you control aspects of the receiver's 6PS data handling, such as
which satellites to track, what data to input and output, and
what inpuyoutput data formats to use.
10 Se es 4000 Receiver Reference

lntroduction
Chaprer 6, "The ModiL Screens," descritrs rcceiver functions

you can usc by prcssing the lfrdot-Flkey. These tunctions let
you control cenain aspects of the rcceiver's intemal operation,
such as LCD viewinS angle and backlight, battery use, beeper
volume, and displayed units.
Chapter ?, "The Ser.$bn.r Screens," describes rEceiver functions
you can use by pressing the lEesstors key. The functions are
used to define sessions, stalions, and pammeters for data
logging or static surveying.
Chapter 8, "The LoB Data Screens," describcs receiver
functions you can use by prcssing the ll6EAia-lkey. These
functions let you stan and stop data logging to record
measurement data for later processing.
Appendix A, "Featurcs and Accessories," summadzes the
features of Scrics 4m0 receivers and the supplies ard
accessories you can use with them. lt summarizes receiver
parameters and lists lheir default senings. It discusses issues
related to connccling a Series 40OO receiver to another devicei
pinouts arld elecftical characteristics of the receiver's
connectors, appropdate use of Trimble cables, and plocedurcs
for interfacing thc rereiver to computers, navigation displays,
POWer SOUnCeS, etc.
Appendix B, "Data Output Fonials," describcs the formats of
the messages and printouts the receiver can produce.
The Glossary defines technical tcms uscd in this trlanual ard

other Series 4m0 documentation.
The Bibliography lists manuals, papers, and books tha! contain
additional infomation about GPS, Trimblc products, and
applications.
The Index prcvides ar easy way to find particular topics in the
manual-
Series ,l{XlO Receiv€r Referance 't1

2 The Keypad and Display
Figurc 2- 1 shows the ones that appear on rack-mounted receivers.
Figure 2-2 shows the keypad and display that appear on portable
receivers.
The two keypads contain the same set of keys; only the a[angement
of the keys is different.
E 6; ta;t 6-.;;l i:t E;t t;6-l:

E GCG
E] GG
tE[] @ 6:
Flguro 2.1 A Rack-Mount€d Rgcelvofs Fronl Panel
Sedes 4000 Receiver Beferonce 13

.
I
POSITIOfiTNG
POSITIOII
AUTO SU
FIX' LAIILON, FIX
SELECT IELEU/NZT
HGT IPOSITION I
4vt2,13,20,24
PURI+t....rlCX 00:23!26
I DFiE
UTC I oPIlotls I
@@@ @@@@ I
@@@@ @ F@l*l
Fat'"-;At'.Of.l E;a(;;t E
Flgure 2-2 A Portable Reci6v6r's Flonl Panel
Screen Control Keys

The keys to the left and right of the LcD (Figurc 2-I ot 2-2, \ppet
halo are closely tied to tho operation of the LCD display itself.
The E and E keys move the underline cursor left or right on the
display. Press one of these keys briefly to move the cu$or one
position, or hold it down for fast Epeat movement.
The four rrJA&"}J to the right of the display perform differcnt
functions at different times. The function labels for the softkeys are
displayed on the right side of the LCD. For example, this screen
shows labels for the first, second, and fourth softkeys. (In this
example the third softkey has no function.)
P'OPI 1,.8INBUI6ATE
HDor: 6.',9 | UELofiTy-.
fl
uDoPr 1.6 !
TloPr l,tro I .: STBT5 ,
14 Series 4000 Beceiver Reference

The Keypad and Display 2
The Main Keypad

The main keypad, shown in the lowerhalves of Figures 2-1 and 2-2,
is used to confiol the rcceiver's display, serial ports, and general
oPeration.
The lF6WFa-lkey controls the receiver's power. To tum the unit on,
press this key briefly and rclease it. To tum the unit off, you must
press thc key and hold it down for a few seconds. This method of
operation protects you from tuming the receiver off accidentally.
T'l\e six primary inctio, lerr near the ght side ofthe keypad
invoke groups of screens that operate the receivcr's major firnctions:
. GfrTIS] displays cunent inforrnation about the status and
configuration of the rcceiver and thc satellites being tmcked.
When data logging is undcr way, it shows data logging status:
number of measurements, SVs being tracked, and so on. It also
invokes many of the rcceivels navigation functions, such as
displaying and editing waypoint data.
. lSdNFol displays information about the satcllites and the
reccivcr, and prints plots and printouts (repons).
. ladFiFdll displays scrcens that control various aspects of the
receiver's GPS data handling, such as which salellites to track,
what data to input and output through the serial ports, and what
input/output data formats to use.
. lSEss-dNSl displays screens that let you define, edit, and delete
data logging stations and sessions. (station and session
parameters detertine what data is to be loSged, and when') It is
active only on receivers that have the Memory Option.
. f6Dl-ldisplays screens that let you perform surveys aid
other procedures that involve data logginS. This key is function
only on rcceive$ that have the Memory Option.
Series zO00 Receiver Reforence

't5
. lfro-diFvl displays scrcens that le1 you conEol several aspects of

the receiver's intemal operation, such as LCD viewing angle
and backlight, power input selection, beeper volume, and units
of measure in displays.
Thc [ENiaFI and faaaARl keys control the acceptance of entered or
displayed data. lEFin] saves the contents of the current field or
screen into memory- [6fEAFlemses changes keyed into a screen and
retums the screen to its previous values. These keys are also used to
retum the display to previously displayed screcns. (See "Entering
Data and MovinS from Field to Field," on page 22, for more details.)
The numeric keypad is used to enter data. IIIFF-AI roggles tltc

ieceiver between numeric mode and alphanumeric modc. (See
'AlphaDumeric Fields," on page 27, for more information.)
TIMER is a red LED which shows the status of the Auto Survey
Timer (a feature that can be used to save powcr and memory
between preplanned surveying sessions). When the Auto Survey
Timer is enabled, thc TIMER Iigit flashes. This feature is available
only on rcceivcrs that have thc Mcmory Option.
How the Receiver Uses Screens

The receiver uses its LCD to display a variery of information abour
its location, its intemal status, the satellites it is tacking, and so on.
Each kind of display is called a screen. Typically the left side of a
screen prEsents data and messages. The right side presents menus of
choices that you can select with the softkeys to the right of the LCD.
Each of the six primary function keys, lSrAfuS[ lSar lNFotr
fSEsEl6 S, l66triF6[L lLoc p-AiA, and lfroo-IFY], displays a screen that
controls one of the receivcr's major funcfions. Tlese screens are
named after the keys that invoke thed: they arc called the,tlaL.s
scrcen, the Sal lrfo screen, and so on,
't6 Seies 4000 Recsiver Reforence

Each of these sqeens heads a grcup of scrcens with rElated

functions. For example, the Srar.t, screen heads a group of screens
that let you inspect the status of receiver and the satellite data it is
receiving.
Most of these grcups of screer$ arc hieErchic. Thir meaas that you
may imagine the screens as a goup of boxes on an orgaoization
chart. From a particular top-level scr€en you typic&lly can display
any of several secondJevel scleens, ftom each of *hich you can
display sevelal third-level screens, and so on. Figue 2-3 illustates
tbe hicrarchic rclationships among the fitst few scrEens in two
groups, sr4ras alrd crrrmr.
Flgule 2€ A Plrt of the Boceive/a Scr€an Hisrarchy
The screc[ luerarchy contols your movement ftom screen to scrccn

both going down the hierarchy and cominS back up. For example, if
Aom the Sr4rxr screeD you can display either the ELEV/AZ\{ screcn
or the POSmoN scr€en, then fiom rhe EI-EV/AZM or POSmON
scI€en you rEturn to thc Sralar screcn. Also, if you want to 8o from
thc ELEV/AZM scrEen to the POSmON scre€n, you Eust first rcturn
to the .Srati.al scr€en.
Serlqs 4o0O Recelvsr Roiorence 17

2 Th6 lcypad and Dlsday
This llrtual tcf.rs oft.n to ftc hiqeohic DEtus ofthe rcceivcls

r.r!cDs, For cx.ryla, it .Ilc"Lr of rctumiry AoE @c scrceu to'1te
Dcxt highcr scr€.n." Thir mEaDs thc n€st sorcc! up i! tle hicra&hy.
In thc aase ofthe thrcr screens v! have bc.D discursing, thc Srcr&t
scrEcn ic thc Dert high6 scrEcr! Irlitiyc to b.it fhE E EV/AZr.t
s(l,e.o rld thc POSmON scrc€tr.
fto on pioary fuactioa tcys ovcrri& thc scrccn hicrarchy. Ihat is,
each prirlaDr
fi$ction t€y tskcs you direcdy to itr rDain scrreD,
rcgrdLss of shlt scncr[ war displaycd tcf,oe.
An Ex.mpl€
Prcss thcG
ir,r}lLey, ta'r thc P()SITION soffLcy, to.li.plsy th!
rEccivcJs POSmON sclE o:
&!rs the NAVIGAIE sofrte!,. Tho !!cciv.t displays ! s.f,€.o siEilar

to this (if your rlccivcr tls thr Nsvigaiioo Pact 8. Optiotr):
. ..or thir (if it doca nd):
ta gcrioG 4{Xr0 Roc€lvor Ref€rEnco

The K€ypad and Display 2
You have moved dow! one level in the hierarchy ftom the
POSITION screen to lhe NAVICATE sct€en.
The NAVIGATE scrcen displays information that would be useful for

finding your way to a specified destination. By prcssing appropriate
softkeys, you could proceed down the hiemrchy to other scrEens that
let you perforn vadous navigation functions.
At this point, though, let us uavel back up the hierarchy to the
PosmON scrcen. To do so, press the LIEIB-lkey.
Series 4OOO Receiver Fofercnce

2 The K6ypad and Display
Now ptrcss the VELOCITy sofrtey. The rccciver displays a scrEen

similar to this one:
This s.r.co shows thc hoiz@tal and vdtical coEp@ctrB ofthe

rcccivcls velocity. (If the rEoeiver is not Erovirrg, any apparEtrt
vetrocity is a by-product of SeLctive Availability and mcasEemont
€fltrs.)
Press the fEoffioL] kcy to diBplay the Corrro, scrEed.
Nov p,Itcs @) The reccivcr displayr the Surns rcr,ccn agaia,

That scIlcn is lhc rccciyEds ,'ra,r maiD scraen," at thc top of thc
N S€d€c il(m R€cah/Br Reiar€lEe

Ihe Ksypad ard Dlsday 2
bieratrhy. hesB @@)coough tiDcs ad yqt will rrhE! to this

scrlrn ftoE aly oihrr lcrtcD fhp rcccivcr dilplry!.
About ilGnus
Mot of thc rcccivcds oain rcrr€os (Eaiu srdn lcrE E, olir
Carrro, scrc€r, .rd so otr) arc esreatially nzzur ltat ir, tlcy ale
lilts offuaotions fflt yoNt cal choce by prereing a softkcy.
t'Lius ttrat havc flolr thrD four choi.Es Ee displsyed iD .ogd.ot.
FG qlEpfc thc o4, scrcctr dirylrF lhi! Mn:
You may presr rflgsf ANGLE to adjult lhc IlCIrs optiEum vicwilg
@glc, BA(XuGIrr b odjust fu b.c,Llight inr.ority, G Eox,R to
rGlcct th€ pqt to bo ulcd ar c 1nr,cr rource. Or, you c& ptqr MORB
to dilplay thc acrt group of ucno itcir:
Agair. ycn co selcct 60 d rb fu€e UlEd iteEr, or lrcss MORB to

s.e tlE Lltgroup:
sotuc 4o0o BEdwr Rrlhrglc 2'l

From the last screen of a menu, the MoRE softkey retums you to the
frst.
For the sake of cla ty, this manual shows menus in a single box
with as many lines as necessary, like this:
RECEIUEE I'4OOIFYI i UIEI.I EHGLE

.. i BACKLIGTIT
! P00ER
! UNITS OF I{ECSURE
I BEEPER IOLUI'IE
JELTITUDE REFEREHCE
; INTEGRITV CLNRI,IS
NOTE - Some menu items ar€ presenl only if

co(esponding options are installed. Be awarc that your
receive/s menus may not show all of the items that
appear in this manual.
Entering Data and Movlng lrom Field to Field

You can use the receiver's keypad to enter dala into the screens,
make corrections, and shift from field to field.
Moving from Fleld to Field

On screens that have more than one user-enlerable field, the lElfiERl
key hoves the cursor from one field to fie next.
To see how the GmEB]key works, prcss the Srdtrr screen's
FosmoN softkey, then the NAVIGATE softkey, then the EDIT
WAYPNTS softkey. The receiver displays this screen, which lets you
dcfine and change waypoints (the points whcle onc leg of a course
meets the next) for navigation.
2 Serios 4000 Receiver Relerence

SELECT UAVPOINT -> g1 i NEXT

LAT Bg'gA.EOSg' N IPREUIOUS
LoN 0g'6g.0g6g' tr i
I
Notice that the cu6or, rcpr€sented above by an underscorc, is in the

first position of the first field. Press lE[iEa-]to move thc cursor to the
fint position of the second field, then tle third. Notice that the
softkeys change as the cuNor moves ftom field io field.
EDIT II,FVPOINT
LnT -} 9I HERE
86.08.0S00. N OELETE
LOH 06.66-a9,6r U SOUTH
ACCEPT
EDIT LIAVPoINT -> 61 }IERE

LAT 60.09.0698' ft DELETE
LoH 9A.OA.A0OA'W EAST
BCCEPT
Wlrcn the cursor is in a screen's last field, the GmBl kcy may either
. move it back to the first field, or
. make the r€ceiver acc€pl the data you have enterEd ard rctum to
the precedinS screen.
In the screcn wc are looking at,lEEB-lhas the first funcrion. Prcss

GffiF-lnow to rctum thc cursor to the first field.
Thc lcIEfBl key moves the cu6or the other way:
. From the interior ol a field to the beginning of lhe field.
. From dle beginninS of a field to the beginning of the prcceding
field-
S€ries 4000 Rgc€iver Reference

2 Itte K€ypad and Display
. k@ thc bcginairg of thc lcl€cnb fiIst field to I high.r

8d!cn----usually, but not al*,ays, thc sctlcn orc lcvel up the
hicrarthy.
The @ md @ kcys rrovc tlle utdeitine cucor l€ft ald right wilhh r
field" h sooc sclcetrs thcy a&o move it acaols the boundary bctwcaa
coDsecutive ficldr. Plcrs oEc oflhesc tays tEicfly to Dove ihc c1[rd
one positiotr, o[ hold it down fo[ fast I€peat movemcnt,
Mul{ple-Cholca Fleld3
Mo6t Euftiplc-cboicr ficlds d! coaEollcd by softteyE. To choose a
value. siEply prcss th€ con€spotrdirg softkcy uftil tbr valu€ you
sa ir disphye.t
To scc how a soffkey catr changa a frcld's valuc, retum the cursor to
thc mIT $TAYPNfS scrc.fi'r fi$t ficl4 if it i! rot atlady th.it,
The NE'(f and PREVIOUS sofll(.ys hcrlase and d!.rcase thc v6luc
ofSewaypoilt rmb6. P!e5i NE(f a fcw timcs .Dd warch ttc
*,aypoiat nunbcr incrtarc, If vrypoiffi are d.ffDrd 6 yorr
rcceivaf,, thc rrcciv€r shows cach vaypoitrt's coodilElcs along lqith
its nuuber.
21 S€d6€ /()m RGtusr RdsrsEg

Numerlc Fislds
Some fields requirc you lo enter numeric values. All of the fields in
the screen shown above ale examples.
To enier a numeric value, simply enter the numerals through the

keypad. To enter the value 12? 05.2487' in the LON field, for
example, you would press O B @O tsA@ @O.
The cursor skips over the degree and minute sig[s and the decimal
point, which the keyboard does not change. Thercfore, to enter a
value wirh ladinS zeros you must enter the zeros. To entEr
15" 25.4400', for cxample, press O O @ B 8... .
WItn you enter a numeral in the last didt of a numeric field, th€
cursor automatically moves to the next field. In the last field the
culsor stays in place, though, and the ieceiver waits for you to accept
or discard the information you have entered in the screen.
You can rrovc the cursor within a field by pressing the @ and Q
keys. For example, supposc you want to change l2t05.2487' to
122" 06.00fl)'. Move thc cusor to the begindrg of the LON field, if
necessary, and prcss E four timcs to advance the cursor to the '5' .
Then prcss @O@@)@ The rcceiver rcplaces the '5' with a '6', the
'2' with a '0' , and so on.
If youmal(e a mistate, press E to make the cursor mole backward.
For example, suppose you accidentally press O instead of @. To
corrcct the ero!, press E to move the cursor left one position; then
press @
In sorne cases you can makc the receiver discard all the changes you
have made to a field by lcaving that field with the l6tsaR-lkey. In thc
EDIT WAYPNTS screen, the rcaciver discards changes to both LAT
and LON whcn you use leiEIR-lto retum froEr LAT to the waypoint
numb!.
Series 4)00 Beceiver Rsforenc€ 25

Try entering values in the LAT and LoN ficlds now. Practice
correcting erors and moving the cursor forward and backward
within and between fields.
Note that some fields allow you to enler letters as well as numbers.
'Alphanumeric Fields," on page 27, explains how.
Combination Fields
Some fields allow either multiple-choice or numeric cntly. The
waypoint number in the EDIT WAYPNTS field is one example; you
can change it either by pressing the NEXT and PREV softkeys, or by
entering a new value with thc numeml keys.
Othcr fields allow only numeric enfiy or only multiple-choice entry.
The LAT and LoN fields, for example, allow only numeric enfiy.
The direction fields that follow LAT and LoN allow only mukiple-
choice entry; you can only change the direction of LAT by pressing
the NORTIVSOUTH softkey, and of LON by prcssing thc
EAST IIEST softkcy. (Try this now.)
Accepting and Discarding Changes to a Screen

There are two ways to makc thc receiver accept information that you
have entered on a screen and rerum to a hiSher screen.
. If an ACCEFI softkey is defined, press that key.
. Press [E[ifB] as many timcs as necessary to move the cu6or to
lhe last field, then once more. This will make the rcceiver
accept the information yor have enlercd v)hether it relums to a
higher screen or not.
Press ACCEFr now to make the receiver Ieave the EDIT WAYPNTS
scleen and accept the waypoints you have entered.
To make the receiver discard information you havc entered, press
l6fEIB-1. To retum to a higher screen, press lEIiiEl as rnany times as
28 Series 4000 Receivor Beference

necessary to back up the cursor to the slart of the current field, then
up to lhc first field on lhc screenl lhen press ir once more.
Try this now. Select EDIT WAYPNTS again and change the value of
the LAT field. Then press ltIi Fl once to rctum to the start of the
LAT field, ifnecessary, then again to retum to the waypoint number,
then again to leave the screen. Select EDIT WAYPNTS again. The
value of LAT has not changed; when you prcssed laLEiEl, the
receiver discarded it.
Note that ltfEFEl dxl, affects information you entercd throuSh the
numeric keypad. When you change a multiple-choice value with a
softkey such as CHANGE, the change takes effect immediately, and
pressing [dlEIFl will not ma]e the rcceiver discard it.
Alphanumeric Fields
some character fields require you to enter alphanumeric data- In
such fields you can enter numerals, letters, spaces, and somc
Punctuation ma*s.
The TIME ZONE IDENTIFIER fie1d in the ADruST LOCAL TIME
screen is an alphanumeric field. To see this field, press fd6ffidl]
rhen prcss MoR.E unril the ADJUST LoCAL TIME softkey appea$;
ihen prcss that key. The receiver displays this screen:
ADJUST LOCfiL TII'IEI

(9PPAOXII{ATE} FEI 19!58 FI'1 iBB'KIISRO
i FORTISRD
TIf'1E OFFSET (LOC-UTC } ! -7:Bg !

fIflE zgNE IDEHTIFIER- LoE i
In an alphanumeric field, each numeral key represcnts a numeral and

thrce other characters:
. The O key reprcsents '1', 'A', 'B', and 'C'. The @ key
represents '2', 'D', 'E', and 'F', and so on.
. The E)key represents '9', 'Y', 'z', and'-' (a hyphen).
Sedes 4000 Receiver Reference 27

. In most cases the @key represents '0' (zero), spacc, '+' (plus),
and '.' (period ordecimal point).
ln a few cases the O key represents '0' (zcro), '-' (hyphen), '#'
(pound sign), and'%' (percent sign).
Errtry Eethod 1. When you press a numeral key in an alphanumeric
field, the receiver not only puts that numeral in the character position
ar the cursor; it also displays a softkcy menu listing the four
characters that the numeral key represents. Pressing @ for example,
both puts a '2' in the field and displays a softkey menu with thc
chamcters '2,' 'D', 'E', and 'F'. Press one ofthe softkeys to enter a
chamcter and move the cursor to dre nexl posilion,
For example, suppose you are in fte ADruST LOCAL TIME screen,
and the cursor is in the first position. (The underscorc rcpresents the
cursor.) You want to replace the curent field value with 'GMT'.
ROJUST LOCAL TII,IE: I

{PPFROXI}!€TE} FRl 1S!50 FX
TIt'lE oFFSET t L0C-UTC ) : -?!AA
FORLIERD
IBFCI(IJARD
i
t-r
TIl,lE ZoNE IDENTIFIER= LoC i
You press O- The receiver displays a '3' in the field, and on thc
right, a menu of characters represented by the O key.
EDJUgT LOCELTI}IEI
(tPP(0xtrcTE) F&t 14.56
! ,"3'
(LOf,-UTC r ar,, rxxl
TIIlE oFFsET -7rgA )
TIME Z0NE IDEHTIFIER= IoC --
You press the second softkey, entering a 'G'
RDJUST LOCNL TII'IE!

(fiPPRoXiXATE) FRt 18r50 gl't
"3"
.6, t- ]
TII4E IIFFSET (LOC-UTC) i -7!86

TI l{E ?oNE IoENTIFIER= GOc
=
2A Series zlo0o Receiver Beferencg

Notice that the cusor has moved to the second position in the field,
but the softkey menu remains on the screen. If you want to enter
anolher character ftom the same menu, you can simply press the
appropriate softkey. This is very convenicnt for cntering the same
character repeatedly; fff example, to erase the last part of a field by
entering a string of spaces.
To enter characters from a different numeral key, simply press that

numeral key. The numeric chamctcr appears in the field, and the
appropriate menu appears by the softkeys. To finish entering 'Glvff',
for example, press B making the receiver display this screen:
EDJUST LOCFL III.IE.

(HPPEOXII'IETE} FEI lai58 qT
TII,IE OFFSET ( LOC-UTC } ! -7:Bg
TIIG ZOHE IDEHTIFIER= 65C
Then press the second softkey to cnter an 'M':
EOJUST LOCAL TII'IE:

(FPPR0X,.1FTE) FRI 19:58 At'r i "fl.
TII'IE OFFSET ( LoC-UTCI t -7:69 i 'l^1"
TII'IE ZollE IDENTIFIEE= 6tlc
Finally, press the O key, then the third softkey, to enter a 'T':
flDJUST LOCf,L TII'IE:

(PFPR0llIllATE) FRI lg:5Q n|l
TIHE AFFSET ( LOE-UTC) ! .7!AE
TIi{E Z0HE IDEI'ITIFIEE= 6tE
Edtry method 2. Some users fud this mcthod of entering

alphanumeric data more convenient,
Press a nurnclal key to inscrt that numeml in the field and display
the corresponding softkey menu. If the numeral is the character you
want, press E to move the cursor to the nexi position in the field. lf
Sedes 21000 Roceiver Beference 29

2 The Keypad and Dlsplay
the numeral is not the chaircter you want, J4sr p ress the vrme
nungral ke! agaih to select the second of that key's foul chamcters,
again to select the third, and again !o select the founh. Then prcss E
to movc the cursor on to the next position.
To enter a 'G', for example, you could press @:
ADJUST LOCRL TIIIEi

(APPROXII.ICTE) FR] IOISE EI'I
TIIIE oFFSET ( LoC-UTC ) I -7r96
TIIIE ZONE IDENTIFIER* iOC
Then press @ once morc:
ADJUST LOCfiL TIIIEI .3.

(APPRoXIrnTE) FRI 16!50 nil
TIHE oFFSET t LoC-UTC ) r -7!00 BI"
TlllE ZoNE ,rtn1151gg= 60C
Then press Oi
ADJUST LOCSL TII'IEI

(AFPRO}1II'IATE) FRI 1B! 50 Rll
TII,IE OFFSET{ LOC-UTC ): -7.Oo
TIl.lE ZoNE IDENTIFIER' GOC
Numeric/Alphanum6ric Field3
Some fields allow you to enter numeric or alphanumeric data. The
TYPE 16 MESSAGE field under the Contro, menu's RTCM-104
oIJTP[rT ircm is one examplc. (Note that your receivcr can display
this field only if it is has the RTCM- 104 Output Option.)
To display this field, prcss L6FiF6L1 thcn press the MoRE softkey
until $e RrcM- 104 OUTPUT softkey appears; then press that
softkcy. Th€ r€ceiver will display this scrccn:
30 Series 4000 Bec€iver Rsforenqe

The lGnad and Dhplay 2
PGss tlc TIPB 16 MBSSAGB... CHAN@ sofE !y. Thc l.ccivcr rill
dirpby this scrE€tr:
The cund i! in thc flrt pooitirn d.! €ryty fiqld tid rc.pts cith6
noEic 6 dphrruEic dda
Noticc thc fir* aofftey, hbebd ALPIIA This label lEplirr lLt th!
ficld is lov rccctritrg ,l.,,r.ra d4ro; you c![ prtrs &e ALPHA
BfrLpy b ,ialu it ion acefiq slfr,s,rElc dqrr. Convsroly,
vh.tr thc softlr€y i! labcled NITMERIC, thc ficld is .ccrptirg
dphowneric data; ya oatr lsecr tho 6ofik y to Ertc it rt[t
ec@dlg mrt[rfic du.
mEa th. frcld is srctptilg abnauuErric dst4 it {lol(! jurt li}c aD

ordhnry alphlo@ric ficld Pirsi thc @ try, f6 .rtdptc, rld you
vill ree thie:
Scrha,o0o Bedv.. F6tr E E 3l

2 Ih! l(€!,Dd ard Dlpby
NowFGr. lt .ccad lofrLcy ad yo xi[ rc.thir:
Ydt c.! @!t ttr irfurldio ),w hrvc rGrd ty !iE!!ing

lffi a dilcnd it ty F!'lhg GiER-t jud rr rqr cu rh.o !'qr
Goer tlrEtc de. SiDcc thr ficld ulcr ![ four lofiL.ys f6 thr
chrl6mu,lhqrSb ti. !on&yr' uod firn tiGr aE
iDr.cc$iblc. To lGlGct c of thc filuior mr r ut lcrvc
alphauncdc Eodc by fM.itrg th, niml }!y. Thcu you cla pE!8
th! CIIA}i(TB sofiLey to ogg& 1}?c 16 q!.ge gcocruior o aad
otr
Ia g.rrf.l. thc lliFim k y h!! tho.@ cffcct r! rhc
AL.PII /l{t MRIC rofl.lyr it tog8hs lhc fiold bcislco
.!fh'p.n ric rd truEic.h.oEy eh@vrf lhd is F.8iblc,
I s.lb..qX, Rclrr B. s.sro

3 The Sfafus Screens
The ,Statxj scteens, shown on thc preceding page, ptes€nt the
information you need to carry out positioning operations. navigation,
and surveying. They show:
. Position and velocity data.
. Navigation data.
. Dilution of precision values (PDOP, HDOP, vDoP, and
IDOP).
. Position statistics (only if QA/QC Option is installed).
. Posilion and status of salellites tracked.
. Date and time data.
. RTCM differcntial correction status.
. Status of NAV BEACON )<L (if connected).
. Installed options, Iirmwarc ve6ions, and rEceiver model and
serial nurnber.
. status of data logging (if Memory option is installed aod data
loggiry is eDabled).
. RTK status (if RTK Functions Option is installed).
S6des /rcOO B€ceivor Reference 3ll

The Sfatus Screens
3
corOcitu ou ldrr,m.uM.v vt idng ro b.gn

Cqroulhts Bfctl'l 01
ot t d, toecw in Prc*..
d podaon{tu
Lidl\t lhs Bro@t &ren6

$eidep€nd d r@@r opllG'
Figurs 3-1 Hlerarchy ot Sralus Screens
Se es 4oOO Re@lver Relerence

4
Tho Sr.rud Scrsorra 3
Tho Srrftrs ScrEons

Dirplry bssic infdE liod lbout the rEceivcds 6trar!.
Thc hdtr 5116(r $qEqr" is acuully a grurp of rcrccos; thc

Ecciv!t's $rnr6 &tcrEitrcr rhich rcrteo 4prcol Smc of thosc
scrr@s at! follort/€d by .dditionnl status scrE€Dr. This se.tiotr
drrcribas the first scrEc!, ald tbe folorvi4g rub-scctions dcrcribc tie
otir(s.
Todt phy the trilt rcttelr. PrE€s the lBffiiEl kry, orprcss thc
EiEn kry tQeatcdly ultil the displsy stops chmeilg, lho rrccivlr
disphys a $,rc€o siEild| to @r of th.sc:
. If c 8tatic survcyi! in gogtt!!, qrquict mt fitic surv.yis
mitiag to bcgil:
. If surv€yi! iaFoglers atrdthcEceivcris coEprt'mg

tro
RTCM-104 cdllc'tioDs:
. If ao survcy ir itrprogress aadthrrDceiveris corylrtirg

corEc{od or uconecad poditio! firrs:
Sed€84OO Recsh/€r Rddqrco 35

3 The Stafus Screens
To rcad. The four lines of the f[st screen show:

l. The receiver's curent status. Possible statuses and their
meanings atE shown in Tablc 3-1 oD page 37.
If a quickstart survey is waiting to begin or data logging is in

progress, this liJle also shows the name of the active data e f
and the time, in hours and minutes, that the receiver has been
logging data.
2. Additional information about the mode-
lfthe receiver is logging data, rhe approximate capacity of the
remaiaing free memory, expressed in hours of logging with the
curent paftrmetels.
Ifthe receiver is computing RTCM'104 corections, the fixed
text GENERA'IWC CORRECTIONS FOR. Note that this is
possible only with RTCM- 104 Output Oprion.
If the receiver i6 computing position fixes, the type of fixes.
3. SV numbers of the satellites from which data is currently bei[g

logged or used. Satellites that are bei.ng Eacked but not used are
not shown.
During a static surveying session, satellites whose
rneasureirents arc ao, being lo88ed are displayed in squarc
bEckets. Such satellites may strll be used for positioning,
depending or the value of the positioning elevation mask.
36 Se.ies rOO0 R€celver Ref6rence

The Sratus Screens 3
Table 3-l Rocelv€r Status on lllln Sralrrs Sc]s.n t

Type ot Opardion SLtu! lrraning
Logging Data WAITING FOFI SIART A pr6plannsd session'E start tims ha6
not anived yet.
WAiT: ,, SVs >= MASK Receivor is acquidng salellites. lt mu6l

find n healtlry 6atellites above the
s€ssion's 6levalion mask to b6gin
logging dala.
PBE.SUFVEY POSIIION Beceive. is laklng a position fix el tho

stad ot data logging e6 part o, ils
r€cod k€6ping.
STARTED SUFVEY Oata logging hes siarted.
LOGGING FOF h:mm Recoivor has besn logging data for

t hours and ,rrt minute6.
Dlllerential GPS RTCM-IO.r BEFEBENCE Rec€ivar is gonslaling RTCM-I04
ba6e Btation STATTON(or REFEAENCE correcllons lor !]3e ln difiercnlial GPS-
suBvEYoF)
Oifferontial GPS POSTT|ONTNO - AUTO SV Rec€iver i6 computing position llxos,

tover, or aulonomouS SELECT and is automatically seloctng and
opeft ion tEcking th€ mosl appopialo SV6.
4, The current power source, power gaugc, antcnna symbol, time,

and time zone identificr.
The power gauge show$ five blocks whcn an AC power supply

or a fully charged battery is in use. As a battery's charge
dccrcases, ponions of the blocks progrcssively disappear.
Series 40OO Recaiver Refer€nc€ 37

3 The Slalus Scr66ns
NOTE - The power gauge is nol linear; most ol its scale

represents the lasl slage of a battery's usefulness, when
the chargo i6 decreasing rapidly, When tho gauge starts
going down, plan to change baneries ln the hgar tuture.
A 'C' or 'P' appears after the power indicator if the battery

charger (C) or power output e) feature is enabled.
The a.DteDna symbol, '9', appea$ if an aDtenna is detectrd on
the ANTENNA po!t.
The time display does not show seconds if the rcceiver has not
tsacked satellites since power-up or has been running without
trackint satcllites for several hours.
To use. The softkeys are:
. El-EV/Az\4: Displays signal-tonois€ ratios (SNRS), elevatiors,
azimuths, and User Rangc Accuracies (uRAs) of satellites
cullently being tncked.
. PosmON: Displays cuEent position and DOP values or
posilion statistics. Additional softkeys lead to naviSation
featuIes and velocity display.
. DATE: Displays curcnt date and time, and lets you chaDgc the
time's display format.
. MoRE and PREV: Display the next and prcvious screen in a
sequence of main Srarzr screens. The following sections
describe these sqeens.
. oPTIoNs: Displays the receive/s model, se.ial number,
firmwale version numbe6, list of features installed, aDd
enabled/disabled status of certaln important features.
38 Sed6s i(r00 Beceiver Ref6.encs

The Slafu/s Screens 3
Main Slatus Screen 2

If a quickstart survey is waiting to begin, or data logging is in
progrcss, the firs! main Statrr screen displays a MORE sof&ey.
Pressing that key displays a second screeo in the main SldruJ
sequencc, showing when the survey startcd or will stan, and when it
will stop. The following paraeraphs show what main Srarxr scrcen 2
looks like.
. Quickstart suncy or manual preplanned survey waiting to
bcgin:
STPRT l,HEtl! SUs RISE BBoUE

ELEUATION IIASK
SToP tdHEN: sus FALL BELo$
ELEUETIOH I'IASK OR USER EHD I'l0RE
. Quickstart survey or ma.nual preplaDned survey in proSress:
STFRTED BTI IPREU

TUE 23-JCN-95 13128 PDf /24 |
SToP U,HEN3 SUs FALL BELoU !
ELEUATION I'IASK,OR USER EHD ! I'iORE
. "At specified time" prcplaDned survey in proSress:
START BT3 ELEU/QZII

17155 t TC POSITION
SToP nTr DFTE
19355 UTC }4ORE
Press thc MORE softkey again to display screens that describe

satellite tracking status and data logSing status (describcd bclow).
To reEd. The lines of the screen show:
1-2. The time or condition at which dara logging b€8an, or will
besin.
Serios zlo00 Rec€iver Befolonc€ 39

3 Tho Slafus Screens
3-4. The time or condition at which data logging will end.

To use. The softkeys are the same as for the frst main Sraras screen,
above.
Main Status Screen 3

The third main sta&s screen looks like this for a dual-ftequency
receiver that is fiacking satellites on both faequencies:
svB2 su19 su26 su?7 |PREU

CoNT-L1 .36
36 79 -BA
89 AS I
C0NT-L2 79 €B.i
ToTAL-L1 Ag 86 A9 86 |lroRE
It Iooks like this for a recciver that is tracking satellites on the Ll
ftequcncy only:
To read. The scrcen shows the number of measurements that have

been made ftom each satellite being tracked. If the receiver is
tracking too many satellites to describe on one screen, it displays
additiohal screens to show the rest.
CONT-LI or CONTINUOUS is the number of mcasurements made on
the L1 channel since the receiver stafted logging data to the current
Ille or since mcasurements werc interupted, whichever happened
later. I'he count will be reset if a cycleslip occurs.
Similarly, CoNT-L2 is the number of mcasurements made on the L2

channel.
TOTAL MEAS. is the total numbcr of Ll measurements made since
the receiver staned logging &ta to the current file.
4 Serigs 2!000 Receiver Rsference

TIB Srnrscrrdr 3
Io EG. Tf,c NEff rtrd RElr ldtlr]/r drplry tho trrd ud lllviot
oaia Slarr acrcqr.
aln St lua Scaran 4 .
Ttc fdriL D.is S!.n r &r!ao lodo lite thi!:
To!..d.11! !ct!.o lhfl! t}! parffi yrlo.. bcilg Elcd 6log

&r:lhc Ervly Glsvdo Er& loggiDg irEIll' EiDiElD @b.r
dSVs tquitld to log dd, rod th.ld s$ot ID tloordcd h thir
dlla filir.
To !!!. Thc PREV to{tkry disphy! thc D(lviou! mlh SerE acrlco,
Thc NE(r lofits,l rt|utl! b thc fitlt Erin Sr4r.rr sccco'
ELEY'AZII
Snowr sdolia tnrLilS dlra
Tor rdrt ElDth! Srarl' lcrECo. lolr('E EvlAaL 1tc rtcoirtr
rcrca rinib b lrfi (fu r sirgk-tlq!.acy Eciv!.c r
dirplr56 r
.hd-fioqu@y tlccilE ril[ L trdiis di!.bLd}
8dl6io(tr FEtu€.R€h.qr 11
3 The Slatus Screens
...or this (for a dual-frequency receiver with L2 tracking enabled):
cH1-4 SU26 EU28 5Ug3 SU21 lI,|oRE EHAN

ELEU 22' 31. 42" 77" i DRF
L2 SNR 8F 7F llF llF I fiZIHUTti
L1 SHR 8F 7P lrP llP ;
To read. Each display is grouped into columns, each colull[r

representing an SV on one receiver channel. For each channel, the
four lines show:
1. Wlich SV the channel is cunently tmcking or searching for.
A 'u' afler all SV number indicates that the SV is unhcalrhy.
2. The SV's elevation or its broadcast IJRA value. To toggle

between the two displays, press the URA./ELEV softkey.
URA (User Ralge Accuacy) is a measure of the enors that

may be inxoduced by Selective Availability and satellite
health problems. Each SV's IJRA is set by thc NAVSTAR
system's ground support (the Control Segment). The larger
the number, the larger the erors that are likely to occur when
that satellite is used to compute positions autonomously. A
URA of 32 indicates that Selective Availability i6 enabled.
3-4. In the fust display, line 3 sho*s the satellite's azimuth and
line 4 shows its signal-to-noise ratio (sNR),
ln the second display, line 3 shows the satellite's azimuth or
L2 SNR, and line 4 shows its Ll SNR. To toggle line 3
between the L2 sNR and the azimuth, press the
AZIMUTIVL2 SNR softkey (whose label changes each time it
is pressed).
To rerd: notes otr SI\lRs.
A signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) indicates a signal's strength. The larger
the value, the stronger the signal. A value in the 20's is very sEong.
Ifno value is displayed, the rcceiver is still searching for the sv.
42 Sedes zloo0 Receiver Reference

The Stalus Screons 3
SNRs appear only when satellites ale b€ing tracked, If a satellite is

visible but the receiver is not trackinS it, it may appear with an
azimuth and elevation, but its SNR(S) will be blank. This is usually
b€cause the satellite is below the user-sp€cified elevation tnask.
Ifan SNR value is followed by a 'p', the receiver is tracking P-code

on that ftequency (Ll or L2) from that satellite. If an SNR value is
followed by an 'x', the receiver is doing crcss-corelation prccessing
on that satellite's signals. In the 4000 SSi rEceivers, the SNR value is
followed by an 'c' indicating thc P-code signal is encrypted and
Super-Eak technology is beirg used to derivc the t2 ranges.
. MORE CHAN: Display the next set of chaDnels.
. URAELEV: Toggle line 2 of the display between satellite
elevation and URA values.
. AZIMUn L2 SNR: Toggle line 3 of the display between
L2 SNR and aziEuth (only on dual-ftequency rcceivers with
Carrier Phase Option prcsent and L2 tracking e.ablcd),
POSITTON
Displays currcnt position and dilution of pecision @OP) values.
Additional softkeys lead to navigation featues and displays of
velociiy, accuracy statistics, atrd the staos of RrcM, RTK and the
NAV BEACON XI-.
To dirplay. From the Sratl.J sctEen, select ITOSmON,
. The initial display shows dilution of prccision (DOP) values in
one of these scrcens:
Series 4o0o Receiver Referorlc€ 43

5 The Slat s Screens
LPT: 37"2f,.6410' N r.P00F: 2.2lNFUI6ETE

LgNt 122"82.2e18' tl 2.2IUELACITV
HGT! -8891,9 $ (HSL)'|,HDoP!
U00F! A.6!RTCfl-184
IDIFF/F'XED HEI6HT] TDOP: g,8i STATS
LRT! 37"23.5418' N PDoP! 2,2!NeUIGnTE

LoH! 122"A2.2318' t HDop! 2.2!VELoCITV
HGTI -0801.6 ir (l'lSL) UDoP. 8.Bl RTK
TFIXEF HEIGHT] TDOF. 9.8i STETS
. Thc STATS/DOPS softkey toggles the screen between DOP

calculations and position statistics. This softkey and screen are
available only ifthe Q,QC Option is installed:
LflT! 57"23.4596', N SIGhe H:25.9.l|

1?2"82,2737t tJ
Lt3Nt SI6HF E!1?.5fl,
HGT! -881€,.3 m fl{sL l SIGflF U:51.2lt1
TFIXED HEI6HT] UHIT: 9.86 |FOPS
To read: Position. On the left, the four lines display:

1-3. Latiode, longitude, and height.
The latitude and longitude normally are displayed in the
WGS-84 datum. Their format is confrolled by the Modi,
menu's INITS OF MEASURE item. It can be eithcr dcgrces,
minutcs, alrd decimals, or in degrees, minutes, seconds, and
decimals.
Height is in meters. 'MSL' means that height is measurcd
from mean sea level; if it is not shown, height is measured
from the WCS-84 referencc ellipsoid. This is conuolled by
the Modi, mcnu's ALTITUDE REFERENCE item.
When RTCM'104 output is enabled (that is, whcn the

rcceiver is functioning as a differential GPS base station), the
44 Series 4000 Receiver Referenco

The slalus Scrcens 3
receiver does not calculate position fixes. This screen will

always show the posilioning refercnce posilion.
4. Type of position fix. [f the value is:

- DIFFERENTIAL: Position is 3D, based on current
differential correctioN,
- DIFF/FIXED HEIGIIT: Position is 2D, based on curent

differential corrections.
- DIFF/FXED LAT/LoN: Position is lD (heiSht only), bascd

on current differenl ial corrcctions
- OLD I,OSITION: The rcceiver is not currently calculating

position fixes; the position is the last one calculated.
When thc receiver is calculating FIXED HEIGHT (2D)
positions, thc height value is the last computed height, or
the heighr fiom the refercnce position if LAT and LON are
non-zero. When the receiver is calculating FIXED LAT/
LON (lD) positions, LAT and LoN are the last computed
values, or the values from the rcference position if it is
non-zero.
- Blank: Position is 3D autonomous (uncorrected).
- FD(ED LAT/LON: Position is lD autonomous.

- FD(ED mIGHT: Position is 2D autonomous.
To read: DOP vslues. The DOP values represent position (PDOP),
horizontal (IIDOP), vertical (VD0P), and tirne (TDOP) dilution of
precision. Tte smaller a DOP value, the better the precision of the
position.
A 3D position fix's maximum probable error, in meters, is
approximated by the product of the PDOP and the URA. As a rule of
thumb, PDOP values under4.0 yield excellent position fixes; valucs
between 4.0 and 7.0 yield acceptable frxes; values over7.0 yield
poor fixes.
Sei€s 40OO Beceiver REferenco 45

3 The Staaus Scr€ens
HDOP and VDOP are components of the PDOP, and never exceed
it.
Asterisks ('*'s) before the PDOP and HDOP indicate that thc
receiver is computing unwcighted positions. This is controlled by
the WEIGHTED SOLUTION ENABLED parameler in the Control
menu's POSITIONING MODES screen.
To re8d: Sigma values (only with QA/QC Option). F-ach sigma

value is the squarc root of the error covadance matdx term
reprcscnting clror in one of the three coordinates. Sigma values are
computcd using the constellation geometry and the cror esrimatc for
each satelli!e. They are expressed in meters.
. SIGMA N: l,atitude enor.
. SIGMA E: Longitude error.
. SIGMA U: Height eror.
. UNm: An a porteriari estimate of the relationship of the sigma
valucs to the actual error. Computed only for overdetermined
solutions, ie., when more satellites are used than arc necessary
for the type ol solution being computed.
UNIT = I .0r The sigma values roughly conespond to the
actual erIors.
- UNIT < L0: The sigma values probably overestimate the

acoal errors.
IrNIT > I .0: The sigma values probably underEstimate thc
actual crrors.
To read: Local datum or mlre selected, In this configuration the
ftst POSnON sfieen rnay resemble one of these:
LAT! 37.23.6418' N FoQP! 2.2tHnU IGET E

LoNr 122'42,2318r Ur HDOP: :,2!UEL 0ctT
HGT. -6€91.6 6 tl4SL) U0OP3 g.6lRTC t'1- 10 4
TFIXED HEIGXT] . IIB' S3 i STPT
4 Series z[000 Beceiver Reference

The slalus Screens J
HSBTH! m PD0Pt .2..2iNAUlEf,TE

+0689454,224
EflST :+186,3867.380tr| HD0PI 2,2iUELoCITV
HBT' -6841.8 m (l'l5L) UDoP! 6.EiRTCfl-1e4
IFIXED HEIGHT] CBI i 9TATS
When LOCAI LLH (a local datum) is selected, lines I and 2 show
latitude and longitude in the appropriate local datum. Line 4 shows
the short name of the local datum being used.
When LOCAL NEH (a local zone) is selected, lines 1 and 2 show

northing and casting, in meters, relativo to the origin of the
projection. Line 4 shows the shon name of the zone. However, if lhe
receiver determines that the position is oufside the zone, lines I
and 2 say 'CheckZone'.
When a local datum o/ a local zone is selected, line 4 shows the

shon name of the datum or zone. Otherwise, it shows the type of
position fix and TDOP, as shown at thc stalt ofthis section.
To usc. The softkeys are:
. NAVIGATET Displays a screen that gives you access to the
rcceivels navigation fu nctions.
. VELOCITY: Displays a scleen showing the receiver's velocity.
. RTCM-104: I-eads to a group of screens that show the actual
correction data that is being received or generated.
This softkey is present only if RTCM message input or output
is installed and enabled.
. RTK: I-eads to a group of screens that show the status of RTK
(Real-Timc Kinematic) rover operations. This softkey is present
only if RTK rover contol is installed and enabled.
. STATS/DoPS| Toggles this scrcen b€tween DOP values and
sigma values. This softkey is present only if the QA/QC Option
is insralled.
Sedes 4000 Beceiver Referonce 47

3 The Sratus Screens
NAVIGATE: General lnformation

The navigation screens can b€ used to steer a vehicle ftom one
location to another by defining and following a course consisting of
somc number of straight lines (legs).
These sceens appear in two versions: a simple version on receivers

without the Navigation Package Option, and a rnorc exlensive
version on receive$ with lhat option.
The navigation functions use cornected positions if lhe RTCM- 104

Input Option is installed and operating, and usc RTK positions if the
RTK Functions Option is installed and operaring. Oherwise they
usc unconEcted (autonomous) positions,
NAVIGATE whhout Navigation Package Option

On receivers that do not have the Navigation Package Option, the
NAVIGATION scrcens let you definc a destination, called a
waypoiat, and display information about your position relative to the
waypoint as you travel toward it.
To display. From the Srarur scrcen, select POSnON, then
NAVIGATE.
BEAR I I{G' l8t. TRUE IdC9POINT

RqHGg! 228 n
HEAD SOUTH. 2n
& EFST! 228 rt UN ITS
To read. The four lines show:

l, Bearing ftom your currcnt position to the waypoint.
2. Ran8e from the current position to the waypoint.
3. No(h/south heading and mnge to the waypoint.

4. Easy'west headinS and range to the waypoi ,
4A Series 4O0o Recefuer Reterence

The Sllalus Screens 3
To use. The softkeys arc:

. IVAYPoINT: Displays a scrcen that lets you set the coordinates
of the waypoint.
. UNTTS: Changes the units of measurcment that the
NAvtcATIoN screen uses !o expEss distances. The basic units
you can select arc miles (mi), nautical miles (nm), melers (m),
and feet (ft). When the units are meters, large values are
displayed in kilometers (km) or megametem (Mm).
WAYPOINT
Available olrly if the Navigatiou Package Option is no, installed.
Display and change the coordinaies of the waypoir .
This scrcen appears only on receivers that do ,ot have the

Navigation Package Option. On rcceivers that have that option, it is
replaced by a $oup of sqeens that let you select, display, and
change any of 99 different waypoints.
To display. From the NAVICATE screen, select WAYPOINT.
To rcad. Thc lines on the screen show:

I. ENTER DESTINATION WAYPOINT: Fixed text.
2 3. The waypoint's position.
To use. Enter the latitude and longitude of the waypoint. Use the
NORTH and SOUTH or EAST ard WEST softkeys to toggle the
dircction of whichever coordinate you ale entering.
Series 4000 Beceiver Roference 49

3 The Sratug Screens
wllen you have finished defining the waypoint, Fess either Gr.lTE-Fl
or ACCEPT !o save it. The rcceiver redisplays the NAVICATE
scrreen.
The soffleys are:

. NoRTH/EAST: Toggle the latitude's direction fiom soUTH to
NORTH, or the longitude's direction from WEST to EAST.
. SOUTIVWEST: Toggle the latitude's direction ftom NORTL Io
SOUTH, or the longitude's diEction from EAST ro WEST.
. HERE: Set the waypoint to the rcceiver's currcnt position. This
is useful if you will need to rctum to the cudent position ftom
another, porsibly unknown place.
. ACCEIT : Accept the waypoint dehnition and retum to the
NAVIGATE scrEen.
NAVIGATE with Navigation Package Option

Otr rcceivers that have thc Navigation PackaSe Option, the
NAvIcATIoN screens let you define and use up [o 99 waypoinls,
numberEd from 01 to 99. A wa),?oint is a positson which rcpEsents
the begindng o( end of & course, or some intermediate polnt. The
paft of a course between two waypoints is called a kg or leg line.
You can follow a complex couse by defrning an appropdate set of
w4ypoints, then s€lectrng the leg lines that Eace out thc course, on€
at a time, as you proceed. When you sclect each leg line, the rcceiver
displays information about your position relative to thc waypoint at
its end.
To display. From rhe sratrrr screen, selc.t PoSmON, then
NAVIGATE
50 S€ri68 4000 Receiver Refererrce

Ths SratE ScNEns 3
Yqr cEn selact orrc of thre mvigltion dlta dispLy foroats eith thc
CIIAN(B FORMAT lofflEy.
. Thc soGs-tach c(tq GfS) display:
. Th! larye-ad-besrilg diQhy:
. The rtccrilg .lirlctiot ailphla
To r.ad, Thc four liDos rlto*

l. Thc nmhccc of thc waypoirc ,t thc b.giDiry ard crd d thc
leg dilpliyGd"
2-.1. hfttrE fi@.boot 6r pdh nl@ thc cunrot pGitio to th€
cod of the lcg:
- BBARNG or BRc: Berdrg AoD thc olrc[t positioa to

thc ad od the lca ia &grcqs tddirc to tuc DGth-
- RAMTE 6 RNC,: R!trgc fioD thc qtlrrot poeitio! to thB

.od ofrto b&
M€B io00 R€ccir/er RefuErr 51

3 The Stalus Screens
- XTE: Cross-track error, that is, the direction and shortest

distance ftom the curent position to the leg.
- STEER: An atlow lhat t€prcsents the direction to st@r to

intersect the leg from the cuEent positior, The number of
aEowheads on the arow increases with the distance lrom
the currcnt position to the neaEst point on the course. The
distance that each arowhead represents is adjustable with
the sET UMTS softkey,
- NORTMOUTH and EAST/WEST: Directions and

distances from the cu[ent position to the destination with
rcspect to tlue noth.
. SELECT LEG: Displays a screen that lets you select the
waypoints at the stan and end ol the leg.
. CHANGE FORMAT: Cycles this screen's display format among
the threc variations shown above-
. EDIT WAYPNTS: Displays a scre€n that lets you inspect and
change the coordinates of waypoints.
. SET UNITST Displays a s6een that lets you change the units
used to express distances, and the distance rcprcsented by one
arrow in the STEER display.
SELECT LEG
Availeble oDly witt the Navlgadon Peckage Op6o!r.

Iris you select a course leg that begins and ellds at a[y specified
pair of waypoints.
To display. From the NAVIGATE screen, choose SELEST LEG,
52 Series 4000 Recoiver Beforenc€

The Status Screens 3
FROt'l: SA TO. B1 NE}tT

PREU
HERE
RCCEPT
To read. FROM and TO are the waypoints at the slart and end of the
leg.
To use. You can enter numbers into the FROM and TO fields, or
select a pair of vaypoints with the NEXT and PREV softkeys.
Note that the waypoints at the start and end of the leg need not have
consecutive numbers. If you commonly travel among certain fixed
locations, you may enter thcir positions as war,points; then you may
select the corresponding waypoints to navigate directly from any one
location to any other.
For the purpose of data entry, FROM and TO act like a single field.
You can move fiom onc to the other by pressing the E and E keys.
D, aot tly to use IEN-EF-)and fdfEin-l for this pupose; they will
retum you dirccdy to the NAVIGATE scrcen.
. NEXT: Makes the new FROM waypoint the same as the TO
waypoint, then increments the m waypoint number by 1. For
example, ifFROM is 14 and TO is 05, pressing NEXT will set
FROM to 05 and TO to 06.
. PREV: Makes the new TO waypoint the same as the FROM
waypoin!, then decrements the FROM waypoint number by I .
For example, if FROM is 14 and TO is 05, prcssing PREV will
set FROM to 13 and TO to 14.
. HERE: Sets the FROM waypoint number to 00 and stores the
receiver's curent position in waypoint 00. This offers a
convenient way of definmg a one-leg couNe ftom your cunent
location to any point.
. ACCEPI: Makes the receiver retum to the NAVIGAIE screen
and display information about the leg you have selected.
Sei€s 21000 Bec9iv6r Reference 53

3 The srat 6 Scrsens
EO]T WAYPNTS
Av.llrble only ,lth ihe Navlgadon Pack gc Opdotr,

Defmq! or modifies the locatioN of waypoints.
To dlsphy. Frcm the NA\r'IGATE sctDeq select mIT WAY?NTS.
The scteen has two fotEs, dcpetrding on whetha you arc sclccting a
waypoirt to be drfinc4 or d€fining iL
. The iDitial display, us€d to Bclcct 6 waypoint:
. Th. dirplay us€d to define the s€le.trd waypoitrt:
To Ead. The lircs on thc sclEeo show:

1. Thc s,aypoint uuober.
2-3. Tbe uaypoiDtb positioD-

To [60. hter a waypoiDt ruDber, ot pr€6s NEXr and PREVIOUS
urtilthe nudbet you wart is displayed Thea prcss EEIThe
rcceiver displaye the second form of the screen, with the cursor at
the beginniry ofLAT.
Eotcr the lstihrdc attd l@gitrrde of rhc $aypoiut Use thc
NORTII/SOUII/BAST/WEST sofi*ey to toggle the direction of
wLicbever coondinate you at€ entering.
54 Sedo6 ,1000 Rsceivet Rsf€rstoe

The s,at/s Screons 3
When you have finished defininS a waypoint, press either lEffiE] or

ACCEPT to save it. The rcceiver displays the 6rst form of this screcn
and moves the cursor back to the *,aypoint number. You may then
repeat this procedule to enter another waypoirt.
When you are done defining waypoints, pr€ss IaIEIE']to retum to the
NAVIGATE scr€en.
The mftkcys are:
. NEXf: Dsplay th. definition of the rcxt waypoint number.
. PREVIOUS: Display the definition of the previous waypoint
nunrber.
. HERE: Set lhis waypoint to thc rcceive/s currcnt position.
. DELEIE: Set this waypoint to 00 00' latitude and 00f 00
lon8itude.
. NORTIT/SOUIH| Toggle the latitudc's dircction (whcn you are
cntcring the latiEde).
. EAST/WEST: Toggle the lonSitu&'s dirEction (whcn you are
cntering the longitude).
. ACCEPI: Accept thi! waypoint definition. Display the first
form of this screen, allowing you to s€lect and dclinc another
wayPoint.
SET UNITS
Aydhble oBly witt lhe N.vigatior PsckrSe Opdon.
Changes lhe units of mcssute that the NAr,{OATION scneen us€s to
exprcss distaDces, and the dislancc that one anowhead Eprcscnts in
the steering diEction displsy.
. The initial forE of the screen, used to changc rangc units:
Sodos 40@ Becsiver Beigronc€ 55

3 Ifr $rn8sslsrs
. Thc fumurcd to ohogr ttc rcdc dtb crol+rc.t uwr,

dilpLlrrd stco yqr F..li. XIEARROS&.. e N(B
aoey:
Io d.1lc liu o rtc qrca rtc:

l. esuta diaEcct o tic NAVrcATl(N !cr!co.
UDitt ulcd to
3, DrUre tp,cccmd by oor rlrNhrd i! tlr sb.sirg &!cti@
dirplay. Fr cxanpb, r vrIE of l0 E !l!oD! thlt clch
Eorfr..d ia thc ei!8 diEdo dilpLy Efc.Gd 10 ffis
of c@,a-trr.& .rtu,
ToE
. MI(BITMIS,-. CBAMB C)asL. ttoqgh rvdLbb @ib.
tlitGi Ddic.l Dibr, ft!6 @4 atili,@s.
. XIE ARROWS... CSAII(TB: lrovc! thc cu!6 irto lh! fidd thrt
dcfrmr 6o dixrm rtgerocd by oc rcqbg dfuain rtw.
Edft ttc vdw od gtr GED G AO@T to !.y! rqa
ch08!*
lftarlL tu rc.LoaXtBARR(NS ircrFr.d h Gr
rvtco thc nagc uib c Drdq cd i! fca eb.o tb ru8.
uir rc Erali.h
66 Sale /ID Fdrt mtrllmo

The Sratus Screens 3
. PREVIOUS: Retums to lhe NAVIGATION scrcen. Equivalent to

@or@.
VELOCITY
Displays the Eccivcls current velocily, computed ftom Doppler
shifts observed in the SV si8nals.
To dlsplay. From the hain PosmoN screcn, select vELocfY.
UELOCITY! i UIIITS
HoRIZoNTAL3 4.78 k$/h a 146'iPoSITIoH
UERTICnL! +6,69 ks/h I
To read. The lines in the scrcen show:

l YELOCITY (fixed texo.
2. Magnitude and direction of the horizontal component of
velocity. Direction is giveD rclative to true north.
3. Magnitude of the vertical component of velocity.
Notc that even a stationary rEc€iver will show sorie velocity (as in
the exanrple abovc) due to Selecdve Availability ard measurcment
ermrs. Selective Availability typically causes an apparent vclocity of
about I knoq measurcment errors cause a velocity of about 0.1 to
0.2 knots. Applying corrcctions fiom a base station will rcduce thesc
errors to rclatively srrall values.
To use. The softkeys arE:
. UNITS: Cycles through thc availablc units for velocity:
miles/hour horizontal end vertical; kilometeryhour horizontal
and venical; meters/second horizontal and vertrcal; knots
horizontal, fect/minute vertical; or knots horizontal and venical.
. POSnON: Retums to thc POSITION screen (one level up).
Sedes 4{lOO Rec€ivor Referonco 57

3 The Status Screens
. [afEiE: Retums directly to the Srarrr scrcen (two ievels up).
RTCMN 04
Available oDly with the RTCM-104 Input Option or RTCM-I(M
Output Option.
This screen shows the status of the receiver's RTCM- 104 message
processing. It is available only if the rcceiver has the RTCM-104
Input Option or Output Option, drd the option is enabled; thal is,
when the rcceiver either is computing corrected position fixes or is
generating RTCM- 1M corrections.
To display. From t}le Sraru.i scrcen's PosmON function, press the

RTCM-104 softkey.
. lf RTCM- I M input is enabled, the receiver displays this screen:
If you press the DISPLAY NAV BEACON STATUS softkey, the

receiver displays ihe frrst of a group of screens that display the
status of a Trimble NAVBEACON XL that is attached to lhe
receiver. These screens are described in the next section.
lf you prcss the DISPLAY RTCM STATUS softkey, the receivcr
displays the first of the following series of screens. Press the
MORE softkey to cycle through the screens.
58 Series ,O0O Receiver RefeGnce

'Th€ sra&e scr€€n8 3
. ff RTqU asut ir .,Drblc4 th€ rccciv€r di.playr tbc fir8t of

lhcrc scEros;
To r!.d. Thc liDro @ lha iaput *anrs ecrccor rhow:

. Scr!.n I.. Srrti@ID of thc b!!c it tio t hich gE6.red the Lst
rcsrgc !.cciv.di tl,Ile RTCxvI vc6ioD. .!d lc8gth ofrhc
cssogc; and agc oftbc oocragc.
Seri6 4OOO Rdlrrer BabltiEa 59

3 The Stalus Scroens
S.z€n 2. Contents ofthe last Type 16 (Special Mess.ge)

message rcceived.
,tcreen S. Contents and age ofthe last Type 3 (Reference

Station Para$eters) message rcceived.
.Scze, 4. Contents and age of the last Type 1 and Type 2

(corrcction) messaSes rcceived. (The rcceiver displays multiple
copies of this scl€en, one for each SV ftom which conections
are being received-)
.. IODE identifies the isJuc of data epheneris, that is, the
current veBion of the ephemeris. It is derived from the
satellite signal, and is set by lhe NAVSTAR system's control
segment atrout once pet hou!.
- L'DRE is the Ur.r Dirbrential Radge Error. For RTCM- 104

version 2.0, the range of values is 0 to 3. For version 1.0,
the range is 0 to ?. For the meadings of specific values, see
the document that defines the appropriate vcrsion of
RTCM-1(N; the documents arc listed irr the BiblioSraphy.
- PRC is the pseudomnge co ection:'fbc correction terE for

this satetlite.
- dPRC is the delta preudomnge correction:'nre difference in

the correction term ftom the prcvious IODE. It allows rovers
that have not acquircd the ncw ephemeris to continue using
the conEctions.
- RRc is the range /ard coftection: The- ,?,te of change in the

PRC over time.
- dPRC is the delta run*

rule conecrion, the diffe,]eIrce in
RRc ftom the previous IODE. This allows rovers that have
not acquircd the new ephemeris to continue usrng the
correclions.
@ Serios 4OO0 Hecciver Reiarerce

thc Sratt6 Sqsns 3
Tbe lires oE the output 8t4fu8 screem show:

. Sc..rr ,.' Numb€r of SVB for vhich thc rlociycr is gcoceadrlg
cdrEc'tioDs.
. Scredr 2.' CoDtrats oflalt Typc I ad TyF 2 (CdtE€tion)
@slrgcs g@eA Gb rcccivcr dilPlay8 EuttiPle copies of
this scrceu, onc for eaoh SV fot $hich conlstions alc bciag
8!D.red-)
DISPLAY I{AV BEACON SIATUS
AydLble ob rllh ttr lllcM-llr hPut OD6or.

Di$phys thc dachcd llAV BBACON xL
itdlr of.r
coDEunietions !!cciv6 ed L,tB yqr dtangc itB rcceiviDg
tcqncy.
To d&Elry, FroD the Erin POSITION s€!e.n prcss &e RTCIT{-Io4
loftsy. ft@ tho Esulting @u, D(ls6 tic DIPLAY NAV BEA@N
STATUS softLey,
s€i€.,m Racaivlr F6f€rqEo 61

3 Tho Satlg Scr€€'ls
Sctlcn 2's OIANGE softk y dirplayr onc ofrhcsc 8sE€os,

dep€odi[g @ whcfh ft! rcccircls urmatic fiequcncy sclcction is
costned.
To t,..d. Th. litrcs on scrcea 1 shov;

1. The NAV BEACON XL'r c.urr.ht stanD: TRACIIING,
SEARCHING,.tc.
2. IE c|,ttrIt irqulocy aod sigld shEngth,
3, fc th9 RTtld de bcilg rEccivcd to|r & ndio,
It8 dai. laE
ed itr sigDl-eroirc rrtio.
4. ltc trltdor of crut ir lhc hst 256 ,odr of dats tlccivcd
Th.lin!. d li! i. .d 2 shos:
l. SUrt (!ac ar h ftlt .cl!.o).
2. C{dcr oftct Tt! ofrr.t of the rcccivcd cani#s fu+ency
fton the selectcd cacricdr tr4ulocy.
3. SyEbol otrsct Obs.rvrd bit rat! ofth. Eccivcd d!ta.
4. Ftlqu!rcy Dodr: AUTOli flc (lhc NAv BEACPNXL sel.clB.
borc statiob ErDlmir6io a @ icaly) 6 MANUAL (it urcr r
q€cifi.d 6xcd frqucocy)-
el S.rt ..|{too Roc.lwr Fofurencs

Th6 Srarus Sc.e€os 3
The lhes on the screen 3 show:
l. The NAV BEACON )(L's se.ial number atrd date of

malufacturr.
2-4. Thc version numbers and rclcnse dates of iB boot, program,
and signal firmware.
The SELECT FFJQUENCY MODE s.rcens display the
NAV BEACON )C's filquency settinS.
. MORE| Cyclcs throuth the thfte status screens.
. INCREASE and DECREASE: IncrEase and deq€ss€ the
rrceivels ftequcncy setting. (You can also cnter a new
frlqucncy with th. nurteral Lcys.)
. AUTO| Enable automatic frequcncy selection and display thc
sc.ond form of thc SELECr FREQUENCY MODE scr€en.
. MANUAL: Disablc artomalic frEqu.ncy sclection and
display thc first form of the SEI-FCT FREQUENCY MODE scrEen.
. ACCEPT: Acaept s€ttings and rrtum to the RTCM status
scre4; equiva.lent to JENTER-I
For hfodnation about appropriate NAv BEACON xL fiEquency

s€ttings, rrftr to thc NAV BEACON XL manual.
RTK
AvdlabL oaly wltt th. nfK tr[ncdons Opdor.
This sctE n displays the status of RTK rovcr operatioDs. It is
avail.blc only if thc RTK Functions Option is installcd and RTK
lover collEol is enabled.
Series 4O0O Boceivsr RereroaEe 6S

3 Th. sretur ScrEns
iIOTE - Thb lrauon doedb€e mV ttE RTK srons

avallablg on a l€cglv€r, You must harrs a Trimbb Data
Colhcbr io ffi lho tull tunc{onalry d RII(
To.[sphy. RoD thc Srarr.r rcrr.n'8 FosIlIoN ftrcti@, pdrls lho

RI( ldLE ,. fhc tlcdy.f, dirpfayr the firat of thc foilowhg rcrceor.
Prcs8 tl€ MoRE 6offkey !o cyqla tblough th€ screrD!. (Itcsc Ecreoe
x,i[ lot rU .ppcrr i! o,rd.ci scc tnc folowiDg .t s{dFi@.)
u S€rL6 /llm Rshr€a nobrnoo

The Slatus Scr€ens 3
To r€ad. Tbe contents of the screens arc:

. Screez 1.. In the left column, the distance between the base
statio.r and lhe rover. dq dN, and dU 6re the easywest,
Donh/south, and venical components. R is the (mge.
In the riSht column, the rcvet's suivey hode alld status.

Possible modes are:
- STATIC: The iover is in,t arrc mode. Prccision is

approximately 2 cm + 2 ppm as long as the antenna remains
stationary. If the antenna moves, rcsults arc invalid and the
survey tnay have to be reinitialized.
- ROVE-FLOATILI: The rover is computing Floa, solutions in

Rovd mode. Solutiols are prEcise to better than tl mete! if
the rover add base station both use Maxwell technology, and
to i2-5 meters in other cases.
- RO\E-FDGD/L1: Thc rovet is computing Fir€d solutions in

noye hode. Solutions are prEcise to between 2 and 5 cm.
When the rec€iver is initialized it operaEs in Sraric hode, or in
Rov€ mode with Fixed solutions, at the usels option, Wien thc
r€ceiver is uninitialized it operates only in RoE mode with
F/o4, solutions.
Possible status messages arc:
- NEED REF POS: The rcver has not rcceived and accepted a
refeEnce position over the ladio link since it was activated.
- NEED SV DATA: Either the lover or the base station docs dot
have any SV data"
- RF LINK DOWN: No valid data is being rcceived fiorn the

bas€ station. The bas€ station Eay not be operating, or the
radio link may be out of order.
Sedos 4OOO Receiver R6fer6nc€ 65

The Stalus Screens
- NEED 2-D FIx: A 2D fix is needed for a good estimate of the

clock offset.
- NEED 4 SvS: RTK cannot function because the rover and the
base station do not have at least four satellites in common.
- INIT FAILED: The rcver's specified position relativc to the

base could not be determined to an accuracy of 15 cm,
causing lhe initialization procedure to fail. ReiDitialize with a
different reference mark or initializer.
- SUSPECT RMS: A problem has caused the fixes to become

lcss reliable. This typically is caused by moving the
rangepole during the observation, or by a cyclcslip on one or
more satellites
- HIGH PDoP: The PDOP of the cornmon SVs is greater than

lhe positioning PDOP rnask. This message may appcar while
the rover is in Roye mode-
- HICH RPDOP: The relative PDOP (or RDOP) of the common

SVs is Sreater than the PDOP mask. This message may
appear while the rover is in Sraric mode; the RTK firmware
takes advantaSe of the facl that lhe receiver is static to
compute RPDOP, which is essenrially PDOP aveEged over
time.
. Scrcen 2.' This screen appea$ after scrcen I if you prcss lhe
MoRE softkey when a base station position has not yet been
rcceived over the radio. Press any key to retum to the
POSmON scrcen.
. Sc/ee, J. This screen appears aftcr screen I if you press the
MoRE softkey whcn a base station position has been received
ovcr the radio. The ftrst line shows the base station's station
index number (by default, 3 I ) and ID (always 'cref , for
"coDtroyreference," if the index is 3l). The second through
fou(h lines show the base stations refcrence position.
65 Series 4000 Receiver Refercnce

The Slatus screens
RTK'S use ofindexes and station lDs is explained in "RTK

OUTPUT CONTROL," on pase l0l.
If the reference position is correct (if it gives the accepted
coordinates of the proper base station), press ACCE[,I. If not,
verify that all of the equipment-both base station and rover-
is set up correctly.
. Scrue, 4. This screen appears after screen 3. It shows
inforrnation received from the base station, wluch shows the
base station's status: the satellite tDs of the SVs being used,
with the continuous measurement count and the signaynoise
ratio for each. If more than four SVs are being used, the
receiver displays them on additional screens.
To ure. The softkeys are:
. RO\G or STATIC: Change this station's mode from S,aric to
Rove or vice versa, When the station is in nove mode, the
STATIC key appears; in Sraric modc, the ROVE key appears.
In Srdric modc thc receiver computes more precise position

fixes by avemging measuements over timc to dilute the effects
of noise. In Rove mode it docs not do averaging; this rcduces its
precision but lets it compute position fixes even while moving.
These keys are available only when the receiver is receiving

signals ftom an RTK base station, and has been initialized.
. ZBL: Perform zero baseline initialization. This function is
intended for software testing only, and is not useful for
conducting suweys,
. INIT oT UNINIT: INIT displays the SELE T ROVER STATION
screen, described below, to initializc the rover. Once initialize4
the rover computes FLr?d solutions. UNINTT retums the rover to
the uninitialized state, making it resume computing Floa,
solutions, which are less precise than Ffuad solutions.
Serios 4O0O Beceiv6r Reference 67

3 The Sratus Screens
INIT is avaitable when the rover has accepted the base station
coordinates but has not yet been initialized, or has been
uninitializcd. IrNINIT is available when the tovel has accepted
base station coordinates and has be€n ildtialized.
Note that the ZBL and IMT softkeys appear only when the
rcver and base station aIe tracking at least four common SVs
and the rover has received a base station position via radio link.
. ACCEPI or REJFXT: ACCEPT allows the receiver us€ the base
station coordinates displayed on screen 3. This lets the rover
begin computing solutions.
RE EcT rrakes the rovet discard previoudy acc€pted rEference
coordinates and stop computing solutions.
ACCEm is available when base station coordinates have bcen

rcceived but not yet accepted (or REIECT has been pressed).
REIECT is available when base station coordinates have been
accepted; that is, when the rover is computing solutions.
SELECT FOVER STATION
Enables you to initialize or re-initialize atr RTK receiver as a rcver at

a specified station.
NOTE - You cannol onter antenm heights or survey maIk

fealure codes from the roceive/s scr69ns. Also, staksoul
fuhctions are not easily accessible. For these reasons, th€
rovor should be conlrollBd from an Survey Controller or
Seismic Contrgller lor survoyirE operations.
To dlsplry. From the first POsmoN... RTK scleelr, pless the INTT
softkey.
68 Sedes 40m Receivd Roterence

The Shrur Scl€6n8 3
To road. fhe lircs on thc sci!€d 8[ow:

1. Fircd tlxL The ruebcr in paEathescr is the itdex of Orc
r€lcctcd stdioD, (RTIC8 ulc of st ri@ IDs ir €xplai!.d iD
"RII( OIJTPUT CoNTROU' o! p.ga l0l.)
2-4. ltr lrlitrdc, l@gitdq rld heighr of thc strti@.
To ura. Scleci aDd .ccc|f, thc strtirtr tphosc rcferlo.c Irocitio
c6Eolrond8 to ttre rcvet's iaitial location
Th. loftl@y8 atc:
. ND(f or PREV: Sclc€t tLa lext or prvious rt.tioD.
. ACIEPT: Acclpt the strtion indrx solcc{iou and tEtED to the
RTK !,ovrr st!tus !.!r.o" (Yql Esy 1160 Drtrr G@)to do
thi8.)
DATE
DiqdalE thc cuuwt drrc ad tiD, od hts ),qr chogc lhc liEr's
dirplEy fqnrr-
Thc date rDd tie st! d.riicd iom the SV sigEal& aDd coEot bc
chrlged
To dbpt y. IhoE the Srar&r sqc€q, relccl DATts.
S€rh3{(m Roc6irr€r Hof€rsrEe @

3 Iho SratuB SqBens
To rcod. Ilc four lincs dilplEla

l. Day of wr.tr, d!E, tiDe, iDd tiEr zoDc idrntitr c.
2. Julian &y (day of ycar, couotitrg ftoE lanulty 1),
3. GPS w€e& (a count of wcetr ftom Suadan ,aDuryy 6 1980).
Each GPS wcek starts or sulday.
4. Tfut]c offset from cMT to thc locEl tiDr zon€.
To ure. Thc sofftrJ.s arE:
. UNITS: Tottlcs thc riEr dirplay bctwcetr 2A-hour foE r od
l2.hoiE fqrrat wilh AM/PM indic6r.
OPTIONS
Display! thc lrccivrds dodcl" s€dd numbcr, ftDrde vcxsiotr
trutttb€rs, Iilt of qii@$ i!rta[c4 snd coablcd/dirablcd rtaos of
ceraia irnportaat featuros,
To dttDlalt. FIoE lho Srarrrr scElo, sded OP-IION,S. This dirplrys
tfie firgt of a reries of ecrtens thrt li* infdErdid ahout thr r!criv6:
7t) S€rlc6 /l{rco B€c€lv€r Rgf€rsncs

The Slalus Screens o
RECEIUER CoNFIGURFTIoNi {m of n}
SINGLE FEEO (L1) I}.ISTPLLED
tlAX EPoCHS B I SUs,15 SECi 14946
}IUI,IBER OF RS-?32 PI]RTS: 4
POSITION STRTISTICS IHSTALLED
CFRRIER PHNSE PROCESSIN6 IHSTfrLLED
RET.IOTE DOIJNLBAD II.ISTCLLED
ET SURUEV DATF lHSTALLED
EXTERNRL TII.IEBESE OFF & IHSTPLLED
ET'ENT I.IAC(ER -OH & IHSTELLED
1 PPS OUTPUT OFF & IHSTqLLED
LUCEL DSTUI.I/ZOHEg INSTALLED
RS-232FIRI'IUAREUPDFTE INSTELLED
RTCI.I- 164 U1.B/U?.6 INPUTS INSTf,LLED
RTCI'I-184 UT -g/U2.4 OUTPUT INSTflLLED
FPST I4ECSUREHENT EATE IHSTALLED
Nr'IEA-e183 oUTPUTS ]HSTALLEO
IIRUt6FTIOiI PFCKEGE ]NSTFLLED
KINEflNTIC I.IODE IHSTALLEO
RTKl OPEEPTIOI'I lHSTCLLED
CDCOfl ELT,,SPEED LII.IITS INSTSLLEO
To read. Screen I identifies the rcceivcr as a Trimble product.

Screen 2 idendfies the receiver's model number, serial number, and
number ofchannels.
Screen 3 shows the version numbers and creation dates of the

receiver's firmwaic components. NAV processcs data and manages
the keypad and LCD. sIG monitors satellite signals. BooT does
power-up testing.
The rernaining screens display information about receiver features
and installed options. The number and contents ofthe screens
depend on the options installed on your receiver. The long "scrcen"
above lists all of the lines that carl appear in thesc screens. The
individual lines arc:
. SINGLE FREQ: The receiver tracks satellite signals only
through C/A code on lhc Ll frcquency.

o The Status Scroens
SINGLE+CARRIER: The rcceiver has the Carrier Phase Option;

it can track satellite signals through Ll C/A code and carier
phase analysis.
DUAL FREQ GI/L2+P): The receiver has the Dual-Frequency

Option, Carier Phase Option, and L2 P-Code Option. It can
track satellite siSnals through Ll C/A code and L2 P-code when
P-code is not encrypted, and through Ll C/A code and carrier
phase analysis when Anti-Spoofing is active.
DUAI FREQ (LUL2)P: The rcceiver has the Dual-Frequency

Option, Carrier Phase Option, and LllL2 P-Code Option. It can
Eack satellite signals tbrough Ll and L2 P-code when P-code is
not encrypted, and thrcugh Ll C/A code and carrier phase
analysis when Anti-S!,oofing is active,
. MAx EPOCHS: The approximate number of epochs of data that
could be storcd in available frec memory.
. NUMBER OF RS-22 PORTS: number of serial ports available;
1, 2, or 4, depending on receiver model and inslalled options.
. The remaining items show whether various options are
installed, and in appropriate cases, whether they are enabled.
For details about options, see the option descdptions iD your
receiver's Ur?r Crr:d?.
To use. These screens are for inspection only. Use them to confirm
that option(s) arc installed and are enabled or disablcd, as
apgopriate. Press the MORE softkey to cycle through the screens.
72 Sed6s 4000 Rec€ivor FlBferenct

4 The Saf /nfo Screens
The Sa, Izro ssr€cDs (showtr on the prE€rdiDg poge) pr€ceot the
irfofiuation about thc hcalth ard g€dictcd ivailability of SVs.
hintouts of thc data alc ako available through a s(rid pqt,
Flgura +1 Hloruchy ol Satrrrb ScrEn!
Scrio6 4OOO R€c€iver BeErcnca 7g

4 The Sa, ,rfo Screens
The Sal ,rfo Screen

Displays information about the satellitcs that are visible (above the
horizon) according to the receivels current ephemeris. This screen is
useful for checking reception problerns, since it shows all of the
satellites that rftourd be visible, even if they are below the elevation
mask or some prcblem prcvents the receiver Iiom tracking them.
To display. Prcss the lffi]Ni6l key. The receiver displays one of

these screens:
5 SUs IN UIEUI I PRIHT/PLOT

$u 8? t1 16 18. 19 iRISE/SST TIr'lES
EL' 3s 26 24 52 A5 ! SU HEALTT{
I. UEn
su 62 e3 11 1.4 16 la i PRrNT/PL0i
EL. 63 -3 8A 13 €6 82 IRISE/S€T Tr'1ES
sl,, t9 2?
EL' 61 g9 I SU HEALTH
I URF
To r€ad. The fust screen appears if one to five satellites are visible.
The lines on the screcn show:
l. The number of satellites now visible.
2-3. The satellite numbers and elevations of the visible satellites.
The second screen appears if six or more satellites are visible. The
lines on the screen show:
l-2. The satellite numbers and elevations of the first six visible
satellites.
3-4. The satellite numbers and elevations ofup to six additional
satellites. A '+' appea$ at the end of the last line if more than
1 2 satellites are visible, but the receiver does not display
more than 12.
74 Sedes 4000 Roceiver Reference

The Sa, /rro Screens 4
Elevations are computed relative to the last position fix, or to the

reference position if the receiver is generating RTCM-104
corrections or is not tracking satellites.

. PRINflPL0T: Produces printouts about satellites and the
receiver setup, including satellite visibility plots.
. RISE/SET TIMES: Displays satellite rise/set times.
. SV HEALTH: Displays information about satellite health.
. URA: Displays information about user range accuracy (URA)
values.
PRINT/PLOT
Pri s inforination about satellites and the receiver setup.
To display, From the Sdr rrlo menu, select PRINT/PLOT.
To read, The screen shows:

1. The serial pon on which information will be printed.
2. The type of information that will be printed (see the softkey
descriptions below).
3. The nudber of the satellite the information will &scrib€ (if

applicable).
. oN PoRT... CHANGE: Cycles through the available serial pors
Sedes 21000 Beceiver Reference 75

4 The Sal ,rfo Screens
. BROADCAST DATA... CHANGE: Cycles thrcugh the available

types of information:
- BROADCAST DATA: Broadcast data ftom the selected SV.
- IONOSPHERIC & Urc DATA: Ionospheric & UTC (time)

dala.
- SATELLITE ELEVATION PLoT: Satellite elevation plots for

all SVs.
- SCIIEDULE PLOT FOR ALL SATSi Schedule plol for all

satellites.
- RECEIVER SETUP INFO: Receiver configuation.

. NEXT SV: Cycles thrcugh the available SVs.
. PRINT: Prints one batch of the sclected type of information on
the specified port.
To rcad the prirtouts. The pflntout fomats are described in

"Single-Shot Printouts," bcginning on page 240.
RISE/SET TIiIES
Shows the predicted rise and set times for a specified SV on the
currcnt fIfC day.
To display. From the Sar Irrfo screen or the sv HEALTH screEn,
select RISE/SET TIMES.
To read. fie lines on the scteen show:
1. The positioning elevation mask atrd the satellite number.
76 Sed6s 4000 Beceiver Reference

The Sat ,nfo Screens 4
2-3. On the left, the position from which rise and set times arc
calculated. If the receiver is operating as a base station and is
tracking SVs, this is the last position fix; otherwise it is the
positioning reference position,
On the riglt, the satellite's ise and set times for passes
starting on this day.
Note that the rise and set times Inay contain substantial errors
if the rcceiver has not tsacked satellites for a few months.
4. The curent date and time, time zone identifier, and timc
format.
. NEXT sv and PREV Sv: Cycle through satellite numbers. The
screen displays rise and set times for the selected satellite.
You can also enter a satellite number with the numeral keys.
. UNITS: Cycles the time format between UTC and 24-hour local
time.
SV HEALTH
Shows a list of the healthy or unhealthy satellites as decoded fiom
SV broadcast data.
To display. From the Sa, ?r/o screen, select Sv HEAL'[H.
. The initial display shows healthy satellites.
13 14 iI.RISE/BE'
IH VIEU
28 2I . |UHHE9LTHV
2A ?9 i tRR
. Press UNirEAL-IIIY to see lhe uniealtby satellites.
Sedes 4ooo Receiver Beterenco 77

4 The Srt /rfo Screens
To rcad. The first line shows the number ol healthy or unhealthy

satellites.
The rernaining lines list the satellites' numbers.
Ifthe receiver is not currently Eacking satellites, the information in

the sdeens is derived from data stored when it last drd so. The actual
healtl of the satellites rnay then be differenr from that displayed.
To use. The softkeys aI€:
. IN vIEw: Coes directly to the Sa, /r/o screen (above), showing
what satellites ar€ now visible.
. RISE/SET: Goes dircctly to the RISE/SET screen (above).
. IJNIIEALTIry/SV HEALTH: Toggles the display between
healthy and unheallhy satellites.
. URA: Goes dircctly to the URA screen Oelow).
URA
Displays User Range Accuacy (IJRA), a measure of the accuracy of
mnge measuremcnts to a specific satellite. URA is always measured
in mctels. A satellite's URA value is computcd by the GPS Conuol
Segme4 uploadcd to the sateltte, and nansmitted as part of the
satellite's ephemeris.
A givcn satellite s URA is updated only when that satellite is

[acked, so it will become obsolete if the SV is not tracked and the
Conbol Segment updates the satellite's IJRA.
78 Seri€s 4000 Beceiver Reference

The Sat rn o Scrr€ns 4
Tor spLy. hoE lhc Sd,I4fo sccetr o the w HBALTH scrcetr

(abow), s€lcct URA-
To tt{d. lirc lists thc s.Lllites dlrt shalc a spccifid URA

Each
v.tu..F@ cx.ryle, thc s..I!€o abovc shoa,r tlrt .at lit s03, II,
aDd 15 all hlvc s lrRA of2.t lE€teIs.
If iDf6DrtioD thr! wil fit o! ono sc!ec6, rhc

thcrE is Eror! URA
MoRE soffk y is displaye.L hrss it to cycb though .dditi@d
scrr.or of IJRA vslucs.
A IJRA of 32 Ectets itrdicstos thlt Scl€ctive Avrilabilig i6 lctivc
for ttre dcctcd sstollito. SA cal be r-tivced onty on Blo& tr
rstellite,r-
To [5e. Ihis scrren is for in3pcction olllf the MoRB sofrtc, b the
ooly onc deftEd.
S€des,l,(,0o R{€iiw BeGrorrce 79

5 The ControlScreens
The Corrro, scrras (shown or1 the pre$ding page) let you inspect
and change porarneter scttilgs that contol most aspec'ts of thc
rccciver's sarcllitc Eacking and information processing.
Par"dneter valuEs arE slorrd in RAM with batt€ry potr,ered bqckup,
so any cha[gas you rnale will normaUy be prcs€rved evcn whcn the
rcrciver is tumed off. ("Powcr-Up CoDnol," on paSr 105, describes
an exception.)
The Contro, Screen

Displays 8 multi-ssEen mcnu whos€ Eenu itemr rEPtescot groups of
pararnatars you can inspect ard change.
To displey. Press the lffidlkey.

Thc number of sctl.ns in thc Co[rro, dlenu atd thc tEnu iteEs that
appear or| each will vsry, dependirg on whst options arr installed itr
your rEcriver. The folloviry "sciEcD' lists all of thc options that
rnay appcar.
Ssriss 4000 B@ivor B6ier6nc6 8't

The Contro, Screens
5
Flgurr 5-1 Hierarchy ol Corrro, Scro€ns
Series 4ooo Receiver Reference

a2
The Co'ldsqE6.rs 5
To u'C, To ndvolcc Aom @ Cortol .crcco b th. !rxa, prc.r the

MOXIE Eofuy (drc brt 6c o.ach r.(!Go). E@ tL hst 8cr,!.o,
MORE eJ.clcs ba.& b lhc tri* !cr€.o,
LOGGED DATA FILES

Avdt bh clt rllh tnc Mcmory Oflm"
Tte ldc@dy Optiotr !fiovidrs rlndoE lcrlss E rDdy (RAM) i!
vhioh the rtccivcr car log .btafrLl af po.iliol fi\@, s.lcllilc dlta
aod oaadq pbasc!,!arut!mats.
The r{rGGD DATA FII.BS ..rcc! dirplryr thr.Doult of rEory
ry.il,iblc, ald ld8 yoo rwicw, &htq !d rccwcr sturd ff1o8.
To illslrry. Eoo the Carrro, Dco[, sclcct LGCED DATA FtLElt.
S6rl6c4{m BGhr€r ReLrqrs 83

5 Th6 Con&o, Scr€ans
To read. Th! litrcs of the screlll show:

1. SURVEr DATA FILES: Fixed text.
2. Thc truElbc! of files in Ecmoty and ttrc pcrcertag€ of Eehory
uscd.
3. Th€ nuEber of frles thar haye b€€n deletcd fiotn nEmotry, ht
.Ie stil t€cove.8ble. (Sec "Rrcover," on page 87, fq more
informatiotr about Ecovcring files.)
4. Thc estiDaf€d data logging ti e Ieft at the displayed paramcter
settings.
To uee. Ilrc aoftkeys arc:
. DIRECIORY: U8t frlcs storcd ir meEsy.
. DELETB Delete files storcd itr E Dotry,
. RBcovER: Recover (uodclcte) 6les that have beeD delded
frjoE Ecmfiy.
DIRECTORY
Displays a lirt of sctive (undelet€d) Iiles stored in armory.
To dlq ry. FroE the Colral mlEt} seleot LOGGED DATA FILES,
dren select DIRECmRY.
8il Sorie6 .000 Racelver Ror€ronco

Th6 Corfo, Scr€ons 5
To rcad. The screer summarizes one file at a time. To iaspect other

Iiles, press the NEXT FII-E ard PREV FILE softkeys.
The lines on the scree[ show:
1. the fiIe's name and index. The name consists of a four-digit
station ID, a three-digit session ID, and a onedigit sequence
nurnber. The index is an integer assigned by the receivea when
the file is cleated.
Each alata file you crate normally has a unique name, but if a
session is interrupted the rEceiver will start a new data file when
i resunes loggihg data, and cach such file will have the same
Dame. In this case you must combine thc identically named files
afrer dowr oading them to th€ computer for postprocessing.
A filc's index is rneaningful only as long as thc file is storcd in
the receiver. The index uniquely idendfies each file that is
storEd in the rcceiver a, a givez ,imz, but Iiles stored iD the
rrceiver at differcnt trmes may have the same in&x.
2. The file's creation tiEe-
3. The fite's creation date.

4. The size of the Iile in thousaDds of kilobytes (units of I O24
bytes), and the number of rcconds in the frle. Both values aI€
updated on the scrEen as dala logging progrcsses if lhe active
fite s diectory entry is being displayed.
To use. The softkeys a!e:
. NEXT FILE| Disploy the next file in mcmory.
. PREV FILE: Display the previous file in meBrory.
DELETE
Deletes one or more filcs ftom memory, A delet€d file does not
appear in the dirEctory display, but actually rchains in lltcmory until
sedes 4om Recelver Relerence 85

5 The ContoJ Scraeng
the Bpac€ it occupics is rc.ded to log ne$, data. Up to that tirF it cao
be rEcoveiEd-
To dtuplay. From the Corrra, trletru, sel€c't LOGGED DATA FILES,

rhcn s€l€ct DE-EIE.
To trad- Thc fiIst sctlcD suorMrizes oDc filc. It shows the roEc
fuforE ti@ a! tbc DIRECIORY scrcen, abovc. To itrspe4t olher files,
prEss the ND(T FILE and PREV Ftr E sofrLeys.
To urc. Thc fiIst sc'!E€o's 6oi&eys art:

. NE(T FILE: Display the Dext file in @Eory.
. PREV FILE: Display the prwiorc filc in oeoory.
. DELSIE IT: Delcte the file nov displayed-
Wh€D you delcte a filc, thc Eceivc. displays the next tndelet d file
in the directory. You can delae morc files by prcssing the
appropriatc soffkoys.
Whetr you alr d@c deletirg frles, p&ss the GEF]tey to l€eve the
scrEeir.
CondrioE thrt dls.ble DELEIB Ifthe file directory is empty, thig

sqeen appe:flr
86 S6ri€6 4O0O R@t€r Relgreltca

Tho Coid ScrE€.rs 5
SiE dfy, if dlta logging is in luogllrc, this sclcea appe.rsr
Both scfocDs irdicalr that thc D.rrr fil[c1iotr i! dirabLd. Ptlrss llly
tey to l€ave tle sctEctr
REOOVER
Dilptlys and rcsctivltcs dclctrd draa fitrn. (Sec thc tr@s bclow
lbout the liEit tions of RECovB-)
To dnrphy. Frqtn thc Corrrrt E!Du, solcct I-oG@ DATA FlLEs,
lhen sclect RECOVBR,
To rerd. Thc s.r.€o di6plays idoroation rbout ooe delctcd filc rt a

tiEc. It rhows thc sdrrs iDforoatior as lho DIRE(nORY sqlerr'
abovc, To ilspcct odEr filcs, plrss thc NEff FILB aad lRBv FILE
sofl(oys.
To !sc. Itrr rofrksyB rrE;
. NEm Fu.B: Disphy tllc ncxt delrt dfil€inE Eory.
. lRE1, PILE DiBpliy thc F,cviotts &Lrcd file i! E toory.
. RBCOVER IT: Rocovcf th. delsted 6lc Eot, dilplayrd,
S€rb.4(m Reslvrr R€ ersEs o

5 The Confol Screens
Wlen you recover a file, the receiver displays the next deleted file in
the directory. You can recover more files by pressing the appropriate
softkeys.
When you are done recovering files, press the l6fE[B-lkey to leave
the scleen.
Limitatiods of RECOVER. The RECO\ER tunction works because

DELETE does not actually remove files from memory-it only
rnarks them as 'teleted." When new data is logged to memory,
though, it may overwrite deleted files. The deleted files fien become
uniecoverable.
Thus, if no data has been logged to memory since you deleted a file,
you can be certain of recovering the file. If the rcceiver runs out of
fiee memory while logging new data, it reuses the space occupied by
the oldest deleted file, and then the space occupied by more and
more recent ones. Thus, the more data has been logged to memory,
the greater the chance that a dcleted file is umecoverable.
lf memory contains no recoverablc delcted files. RDCo\ER displays

this screen:
Press any key to exit the Secoy€l function.
RTCM-I04 OUTPUT
Avrilable oDly with the RTCM-104 Output Option.
Contmls the receiver's generation of RTCM- 104 messages for use in
differential GPS (DGPS) operations.
88 Series 4oo0 Receiver B6fer6nce

Th6 Aonto, Scrs6n8 5
Whrn RTCM-104 odput i! ersblc4 thc tlceivcr furctions as 8 ratc

s,4lic,\ ot rd.tat turior'- It gaE.rafet cofiEctions which can be
hroadc.rt to rEclivo$ that hrvc th! RTCM- 1O4 IDput Opiol. Itrore
rrceiv€d crn thao opodc a8 Dr€$, using tb€ cotloctiotr! to
cepuE celct d poBition fixcs in r€al tim.. A Eo.! coEplct€
descripti@ of this proc.As ,,f,.,(t frt}c, Adication Gatulc,
To dbphy. Ri@ thc Con ro, nrou, s€bct RTCM-104 OUIPUT.
1Lc rtccivcr displrys thc fit$t of a t6i€s of lhce lcrEcN. P!e88 tho
MoRE sofff,cy to cycle tkulgh thc !.G€ris.
to rccr!. IIIe s<rcens shw thE .tfis of thc RTCM-104 otFut

Polaetl[8,
h the first scireea:
. EI{ABLE: Showr s.hich Dqt is bcing ulcd to writ€ RTtX\'l'104
ou9ut OFF r!!rth.t RTCM-104 ouEut is dislbleA
S€ds 4000 R€celvor Hebr€rro 80

5 Ihe Corarol Screens
. STATION ID: Shows the station ID of this station. The station

ID is Eansmitted wilh the corrections, allowing a rover to
identify tle source of the data.
. FORMAT: Shows the lormat of the RTCM- 104 messages
generated. Currently supported values are \aERSION l,
VERSION 2, VERSION 2.1, USCG (9-1), aJd USCG (9-3). The
last two values produce Version 2.0 output using Type 9
messages. Type 9-l provides for I satellite per message. Type
9-3 provides for 3 satelliaes per message.
The z[000 Series firmware version ?.00 and later supports rcal
timc RTCM Reference Station formats: RTCM+RTK and RTK
ONLY. RTCM+RTK fonnat results in message Types 18 and
19 bcing Eansmitted every epoch. Also tmnsmitted are the
usual RTCM messagcs using either the default or a user defined
schedule. Scc the section titled ]?ffi USING RTCM,later 1n
this chapter.
ln the second sdeen:
. PRINTOUT: Shows whether the receiver is sending copies of
genemted RTCM messages to an altemate serial port. In this
manner thcy can be printed on a serial pdnter or logged on a
computer at the same time thcy were being transmitted to thc
Possible values are OFF, ASCII PORT 1 through ASCII PORT 4,

and RAW PORT I through RAw PORT 4. (The pon selccted by
the ENABLE palameter is excluded.)
The Asctr PoRT settings write messages in forrnatted, ASCII
foIm. The forrnat is described in "RTCM- 1 04 Input/Output,"
on page 213.
Thc RAw PORT settings write thc original (raw) correction
data- The format is descibed in RTCM Recomn ended
Standards for Dillerehtial NAVSTAR GPS Service; seE lhe
Bibliography for a complete citation.
90 Series 4000 Receiver Reference

The Confol Screens 5
. CTS >xMT DELAY: Delay between the time an attached device

asserts the clear-to-send (CTS) line and the time when the
recciver begins outputting corrections. The delay allows the
receiver to drive a radio transmitter that requires a "warm-up"
period before acceptinS data.
. TYPE 16 MESSAGE: Shows whethd the receiver is generating
Type l6 messages. (RTCM Type 16 is used to send ASCII
messages to the rcmote usefi.)
ln the third screen:

. CARRIAGE RETURN: Shows whether or not the receive! writes
a carriage relum characterafter each correction message,
. RTCM BIT RATE: Shows the RTCM output stream's data rate
h RTCM dala bits per second. (Note tha! each byte of serial
data contains or y six RTCM data bits.) Possible values are
oFF, 25.0, 27.3, 30.0, 33.3, 37.5, 42.9, 50.0, 60.0, 75,0, 100.0,
and 150.0.
The standard value is oFF, requiring the receiver to send
RTCM hessages at the port baud mte, once pfi epoch. Other
values are for use in special data link applications.
If this parameter is set to a value other than OFF, the time

requircd to trallsmit a cycle of RTCM messages may be
increased, increasing the minimum safe value for SYNC TIME.
For more infofination on this topic, see the discussion of sync
time in the section on DGPS n the Applicotion Cuide.
. MESSAGE SCmDULE: Shows the output schedule for the
various types of messages in the RTCM message sEcam. The
Type 1 message schcdule is determined by the sync time (one
message per epoch). The other message types' schedules are
proportional to the T)?e I schedule: one message of each lypc
per n Type l messages.
Sedes zlo0o Beceiver Befercnce 91

5 The Cort o/ Screens
DEFAULT meaDs that the factory default messaSe schedule is in

effect. USER means that at least one of the message types'
schedule par"ameten has be€n chaDSed.
Series z[000 rcceivers generate these types of RTCM- I 04

nEssages:
- Type l: Pseudorange and ranSc rate correclions.
- Type 2: Pseudorange and ranSe rate corection differcnces

between current cphem€ris and a previous one. This message
is used only when there is aD ephemeris issuc mismatch
bctween stations. Thc differences enable to rover to its own
values to the oncs the tlasc station is using.
- Type 3: Base station coordinatcs.
- Type 6: Null messages.
- Type 16: ASCII messaScs.

For more iDformation about RTCM mess.ges, see RICM
Recornmznd.d Standards for Dwrcntial NAySTAR GPS
Servic., dcscribcd in the Bibliography.
To use: Gctrersl iDfortDrtion. Prcss the CHANGE softkey Dext !o
the pammcter you want to change.
Most of the parametcB simply cycle lhrough a set of possible va.lues.

A few display lower level screens, as described below.
To Ese: STATION ID. The CHANGE softtey displays this screen:
RTCII-164 REFEREHCE STETION

sTeTloN ID t 6400 l NCCEPT
g2 Series (x)O Receivor Referenc€

The Coatol Screons 5
Eut r 8 Ddi, ID betweed 0000 aud 1023, th.a Ptrss ACCEPT or

IEFiEE'|to r.€pt the trow ID and trfilm to tf,e R!CIi{-f 04 OUTruT
scrce!-
To urc: cIs->XtuT DEtr AY. Ttc CSANGE roitey displlys thir
lci€cn:
E d ia a delay tiEc of up to 9-9 acoo!l&, thoD pre8s ACEBPT or

IEffiFI to stoE thc acw value atrd rEfi!! to thc RTCIU-I04 OIIfPUT
SCIEID.
To u!.: TYPE 16 MESSAG& lbe O{ANGE soffLey displEF this

scIEctr:
Thc 6!ct th[c. li[cs show th. t€xt of thc E {rrgc' a strirg oful, to
64 charecr6.
Yqr car cdit tho Gs.ge witi thc krypod" Oo cot!(
ftisagcs, sce 'Alph'ruDlric Ft ld&" @ pafp 27.)
Prc8r the AUI'A,/NIrMERIC lofrLcy to togelo to tcypld bctwc€o
.lfh, r''Fic mde and nttEic Dodc" Rron mbt8 ihlt vhco th.
loffkey i. labclrd NUMBRIC, fuloyrtrdts iaalpr@/ttoroic @
pc.silgthe roftoy wu d criary. itto truEio hod€,
PtEss tbe OIANGE sofl&ey to toggL lypc 16 Dsslgo g.o€r.tid @
and ofr.
S6rbs /o00 R**r€. Rsbrslco 9S

5 The Corlrol Screens
Press the lEiTEEl key or the ACCEPT softkey to accept the changes
you have made and retum to the RTCM- 104 OUTPUT screen. (If the
keypad is in alphanumeric mode the ACCEPI softkey is not
available; press the GIFFn key to retum the keypad to numeric mode
and display ACCEFI.)
To use: MESSAGE SCEEDULE. Thc CHANGE softkey displays this

screen:
RTCfl OUTPUT SCHEDULE TTYPET $565 PER.,.)

TYPE 2! 15 TYPE 3!56
T?PE 5tga TVPE 16!38 OEFBULTS
ECCEPT
This example shows that one Type 2 message is sent for every 15
Type I messages. One Type 3 message and one Type 16 is sent for
every 30 Type ls. The '00' value for Type 6 means that this message
type is sent only when necessary.
To reset all of the message schedules to their defaults, press the
DEFAULTS softkey.
To changc any message schedule, enter a number after the colon. For
example, to send one Typc 3 message for every l0 Type l's, change
the '30' after'TYPE 3:'to '10'-
To accept the schedule displayed on the screcn and retum to the
RTCM-104 OUTPT T menu, press the ACCEPI softkey.
Not€s on simultaneous RTCM-I(X inpu/output and static
survey. On receivers that havc the RTCM- 104 Input Option or the
RTCM-104 Output Option, i! is possible to use DGPS and run a
static survey simuhaneously. Thc two procedures interact in seveml
ways:
. Reference position. If you selected AUmMATIC for the
survey refcrence position, the survcy uses the positioning
94 Sedes 4000 Receiver Reference

The CorLol Screens 5
pammetersr reference position. If the positioning reference

position is not defined, it takes a position fix autonomously.
Elevstiotr mlsk When RTCM'104 output is enabled during a
survey, the receiver uses the static survey elevation mask fo!
positiorirg (and DGPS). The positioning elevation mask is
ignored for the duratio, of the sulleying session.
S}!c dme. If either the positioning syrc time or the static

survey sync time is a decimal fraction, the static surYey sync
time is applied ro positioning (and DGPS). The positioning
sync time pammeter is actually set equal to the cuEent value of
the static supey sync time; it is not changed back at the end of
the surveying scssion, and you cannot change it to e fractional
value during the session.
RTCM.I04 INPUT
Avallable o y with the RICM-I(H Inpot option,
Contols the rEceiver's use of RTCM- 104 messages.
When RTCM- 104 input is enabled, the rrceiver tunctions as a DGPS
rcver. It computes position fixes using conections generated by a
base station.
NOTE - RTCM-I 04 input and output cannot bo onabled

al tho same time. When you enablo one, thg rec€iver
automatically disabl66 the other,
To dispLay. Fmm the Corfol menu, select RTCM-IM INPUT.

The receiver displays the first of a series of three scr@ns. PEss the
MoRE softkey to cycle through the scEeDs.
Series ,1000 Receiver Reference 95

5 The Conlrol Screens
DIFFEEEI'iTIAL STFTION (-- }IORE

RTCI,I.164 INPUTS t OFF ] <-- CHfiHGE
FORT $ELECT T OFF ] <.- CHRNGE
FORI4CT t UERSION 2 ] <-- CHFHGE
DTFFERENTIAL STETIOII (-- HORE

A5CI1 PRINTOUT T OFF (--
] (.- THfiHGE
BEEPER T OFF ] CHCNGE
STPT]BH SELECT T NNV ] T-. CHPNGE
DIFFEREHTIBL STATIOH <-- IIORE

FGE LII'IIT T18S SECOHDS] {-. CHSR6E.
To read. Each screen shows the status of three of the RTCM- lM

input parameters:
. RTCM'lM INPUTS: Shows thc status of RTCM- 104 input
processing. Possible values are OFF, ON, and ON/AUrO.
oFF makes the receiver opemte only autonomously, that is,

without applying differential correctrons. This dmstically
reduces the accuracy of rcal{ime position fixes.
oN lets the receiver operate only in differential mode. [f no
corrections are received or the last messagc exceeds the AOE
LIMm parameter, the receiver stops Benerating new position
fixes.
ON/AUTO lets the receiver operatc either autonomously or in
differential mode. As long as valid corections are received, thc
rcceiver uses them to operate in differential mode. If no
corrcctions are rcceived, or none arc received for a time
exceeding the AGE LIMIT pammeter, the receiver automatically
falls back to autonomous positioninS.
Series 40oo Beceiver Refetence

The Corlrol Screens 5
This parameter is automatically tumed off when RTCM output

is tumed on.
. PORT SELECI: Shows which pon is used to receive
conections. Possible values are PORT 1 through PORT 4. (Ports
3 and 4 arc available only if the Four-Port Option is installed.)
NOTE - When the receiver is conligured to read

RTCM-104 input on a certain port, allother input on that
port is ignored.
. FORMAT: Shows the message format that the receiver expects

incoming RTCM messages to usc. lt must match the format
being sent by the base station. Possible values arc \ERSION 1.0
(for compatibility with older equipment that cannot generate
Version 2.0), VERSION 2.0 (the curent standard) and
USCC (similar to Version 2.0, but expects input to include type
9-l and/or type 9-3 records).
. ASCII PRINTOUT: Shows whelher the receiver is ourpu(ing
incoming corection messages to a serial pori in ASCII format.
Such output could be sent to a serial printer or recorded on a
computer for later use. Possible values are OEF and PORT 1
through PORT 4. (Po s 3 and 4 are available only if the Four
Serial Pon Option is installed.)
For a description of RTCM-104 output format, see "RTCM-104
Input/Output" on page 273.
. BEEPER: Shows the receiver's use of its beeper. Possible valucs
are ON (the le.eiver beeps when a valid RTCM message is
received on the selected port, even from a base station with a
different station ID than the one selected) and OFF (the receiver
does not beep).
Sorigs ZIOOO Receiver Reference 97

5 The Cortrol Screens
. STATION SELECT: Shows the station ID ofthe base station

whose conections the receiver should use. Ai.lY allows the
receiver to accept corrections fiom any base station.
. AGE LIMIT: Shows the period for which the last received
corection is considered good. Possible values are 5, 10, 20, 30,
50, and 100 seconds. The default value is 100 seconds.
When the age limit is exceeded, the recciver stops generatinS
new position fixes (if INPTITS is set to ON) or falls back to
autonomous positioning (ifINPUTs is ser !o oN/AUTo).
To use: Gen€ral itrformation. Press the CHANGE softkey next to
the parameter whose value you want to change.
Most of the paraheters simply cycle through a set of possible valucs.

The only exception is STAIION SELECT.
To use: STATION SELECT. The CHANGE softkey displays one of
these screens:
. If STATIoN SELECT is currendy set to ANY:
. If STATIoN SELECT is curendy set to a station ID:
RTCI.:144 6TETI0fi SELECT

'''iCcEFi EsfrREairom-FRon:
flNV STFTION --
INLY STFIIoII 60gA <,t
To set STATION SELECT to A IY, press the ANy STATION softkey.

The receiver automatically retums to the RTCM-I04INPUT sqeen.
s8 Sedes 4000 Recelver Relorence

The Cortrol Screens 5
Note that if more than one base station signal is available, ANY will
let the rcceiver switch among them mndomly. This is generally
undesirable, although it can be useful in a fringe reception anea
where no one station is contiduously available.
To set a station [D, press the ONLY STATIoN softkey. The receiver
displays the second form of the screen. Enler the desired station ID,
thcn press lENiEn-lto retum to the RTCM l04IMUT screen.
RTK USING RTCM

The RTCM SC-104 Version 2.1 specifies a set of messages to
support RTK positioning. These include RTCM message rypes 18
and 19, mw pseudomnge and phase measurements. Receivers
equippcd with the RTCM and RTK options are capable of
generating an RTK solution based upon the information coded
within. Specifically a 4000 Series configured as an RTCM base
station can be sefup in a mode which brcadcasts these messages
every epoch. Furthermore a 4000 Series configured as an RTCM
Rover can te set in a mode which uses these messages to geneEtc an
RTK solution.
Referonca Statlon
The 4000 Series using firmware version ?.00 has two rcal time
RTCM Reference Station formats: RTCM+RTK and RTK ONLY.
RTCM+RTK format rcsults in message Types l8 and 19 being
tansmitted every epoch. Also trarNmitted arc the usual RTCM
hessages using either thc default or a user defined schedule. Both
RTCM Differential uscrs and RTK users may opcrate ftom this Base
Station simultaneously. Also in the cvcnt that an RTK solution is
not possible, for example when tracking only 3 SV's or when the
radio link is interrupted, the RTK rover can still genemte an RTCM
differential solution.
Series 4000 Roceiver Reference 99

The Corltul Screens
If the user has limited mdio bandwidth and requires RTK using
RTCM the selection of RTK ONLY on the basc station limits the
fiansmissions to those messages required for the RTK solution.
Note that in this case therc is no RTCM Differcntial solution
available from this Reference Station.
Rovgr
At the Rover, under the RTCM- 104 lNPtnS selection the user can
configurc thc DIFFEREMIAL STATION as RTK L1 or RTK-
LllL2. From the user's perspcctive there is vinually no difference
b€tween these modcs and the L1 ONLY and L1lI-2 modes found
under the RTK ROVER CONTROL menu. Howevcr under the
POSITION softkey on the STATUS display the user will find the
RTCM-104 softkey, not an RTK softkey. The position displayed on
this screen will be either an RTK solution or an RTCM
DIFFERENTIAL solution or simply an unaided CPS solution and is
Iabcled accordingly. Thc solution type will depend upon the
informalion rcceived ftom rhe Reference Station.
Under thc RTCM- 104 softkey there is a DISPLAY RTCM RTK
STATUS selection which takes the user to the familiar RTK status
displays. On the RTK REFERENCE STATUS page of these
displays the user will note that the name given to the Reference
Station is RTCM. Trimble's RTK System permits a user-
programmable label to be transmitted fiom the Reference Station
however RTCM does not support this facility. The RTCM
Refcrcnce Station ID number is displayed along side of the RTCM
label in parentheses though.
Gracelul [legradation
When using RTCM 2.1 if the Reference Station is in the
RTCM+RTK mode a rover in one of the two RTCM RTK Rover
modes will perform an RTCM DGPS solution when it cannot
100 S€ries 4OO0 Receiver Reference

Th6 Co,f/o/ Scre€ns 5
generate an RTK solution and will continue to degradc performing a

DGPS Fixed or Constrained Heighr Solution or afl Autonomous
solution depending upon the operatrnS conditions.
RTK OUTPUT CONTROL

Aveilable only *lth the RTK FunctioDs Optiotr.
This section and the next one documcnt the RTK control screens that
appear on the receivcr ilself.
Note that the rcceiver scrcens are prirnarily for testing. RTK surveys
should normally bc performed with the aid of a handheld Trimble
Survey Controller or Seismic controller. For a full discussion of
RTK principles ard procedurcs, sce the IDc.l s/rvey Controller
Operation Manuol.
For descriptions of the receiver's RTK test scrcens, see "RTK," on
pagc 63. For information about using Trimble's TRIMTALK 900
radio to link RTK stations, see the TRIMTALK 9M Operution
Manual.
The RTK oUTPUT CoNTROL scrcen controls the RTK functions of
a rcceiver that is being used as an RTK base statioD. (Note that an
RTK base station neld not have the RTCM-104 Output Option; the
base station firmware for RTK is entirely differen! fiom rhe
corresponding frrmwaie for differential GPS.)
To display. From lhe Conrd menu, select RTK OUTPUT
CONTROL.
RTK OUTPUTS T OFF ] <- CHqNGE

PPPLICATION EBCSE-LI ] <. CHENGE
STNTIOTI I DEFAULT ] <. CHENGE
AHTENNE HEI6HT("') t +A,8OA ] <.
'HSN6E
To rEAd. The lines on the screen show:
Sories ,l0OO Receiver Referenc€ 101

5 The Confro, Screens
1. The serial port on tryhich the rEceiver is prcducing refeEnce

output. Possible values are the nahes of the available serial
pofis, and om.
2. The type of applicarioa for which the rcceiver is producing

Eference outpul Fo! RTK procrdues tle parameter must be s€t
tO BASELI.
3. Shows the stalion ID tha! specrlies the coordinates of the base
station's locatiol
Possible values are I through 30 and DEFAITLT. A base
station's index is initially set to DEFAITLT, which Bprrs€nts the
rcfercnce position defiftd by the Conrrol menu's REFERENCE
PosmoN scaeen. In some other RTK screens, this indcx is
shown as '31'.
Statiotr indexcs I through 30 lepresent the 30 stations that caII

be defined with a data collector, or with the ,S"rjir',r process
described in Chaptcr 7.
4. Shows the height of the receive!'s GPS antenna above the mark
in rneters.
. RTK OUTPU?S,.. CHANGE: Selects thc serial port used for
reference output; cycles through the available serial ports and
OFF (disabted).
The rEceiver will start producing RTK Eference output as soon

as an output port is selected.
. APruCATION... CHANGE: Cy€les through thc available types
of refercnce output. For RTK procldurcs, select ihc value
BASE Ll. (As of firmwarc rclease 5,72, the softkey has no
funciion becaus€ Do othar values arE supported.)
102 Seie6 4oo0 Rgc€iver Beforence

Tho Corfrol Screens 5
. STATION... CHANGE: Display the REFERENCE STATION

screen (below), which Iets you select the station at which the
base station is operating.
. ANTENNA IIEIGIIT... CHANCE: Displays rhe ENTER
ANTENNA IIEIGI{T screen (below), which lers you enter rhe
height of the base station antenna above the mark.
Reference Station
The REFERENCE STATION scrcen lers you select rhe station indEx
that represents the position ofthe base station.
To dlsplay. FIom the RTK OUTPUT CONTROL screen (above),
press the STATION. . . CHANGE softkey.
To read. The lines on the scrcen show:

l. Fixed text. The number in parentheses is the index of the
selected station, whose rcfercnce position idcntfies the
location of the base station.
2-4. The latitude, longitude, and heiSht of the sration rclative to
the WCS-E4 elipsoid.
. NEXT or PREV: Select the next or previous station. Station 3l
reprcsents the positioning refetence position, defined by the
Corrrol lnenu's REFERENCE POSnON scleen. Stations 1
through 30 can be defined with the Survey Controller or
Seisrnic Controller or with the,S.srions process descfibed in
Chapter 7.
Series 4Om Receiver Beference 103

5 The Cort r/ Scr€€ns
For a base station, the station index defaults to 3 1 .
. ACCEPI: Accept the station index shown and rctum to the RTK
OL.ITPUT CONTROL scleen. (You may also prcss EEn to do
this.)
Entor Antenna Height

The ENIER ANTENNA HEIGtff scrEcn lels you enter the rneasued
height of the base station's CPS antenna above Oa suwcy mark. The
neasurcd height must bc a corected (Eue venical) hcitht. (You can
entcr a corected or uncorrected height ftom the Suwey Controllet or
Scismic ConEoller.)
To dl6pLy. From the RT( OI.ITPUT CONIROL scrEen (above),
ptess the ANTENNA HEIGHT. . . CHANCE sofikcy.
ENTER PLUS
lll NUS
ECCEPT
To rcad, The lines on the scroeD showl

l. Fixed text. Note that the unit uscd to exprcss antenna heighi is
always METERS.
4. Antcnna heighr.
To use. Enter the antenna s corrrctcd height on the founh line.
Thc softkeys a@:
. PLUS or MINUS: Select the siSn ofthe antennas hciSht.
. ACCEFr: Acccpt the antenna hcight no\v displaycd and rctum
to the RTK OUTPUT CONTROL screln.
t(x Seri€s 4Om R6cafu6r Fofel€llce

The Cort o/ Screens 5
RTK FOVER CONTROL

Available ody vlth the RTK Functions and Carrier Phase
OptioDs.
This screen controls the RTK functions of a rcceiver that is being
used as an RTK rover.
For importadt ihfornEtion about the RTK Functions Option, see the
frrst few paragraphs in the section "RTK OUTPUT CONTROL," on
page 101.
To displcy. From the Conrlo, menu, select RTK RO\'ER CONTROL.
To r€rd, Tie lines on the scrcen show:

1. Fixed text.
2, The current status of RTK rover contDl: oFF (disabled) or
Ll ONLY (enabled).
To use. The sof&eys arc:
. ENABLE... CHANGE: Toggles RTK rover control on and off.
Note that an RTK rover cannot deliver very prccise position
fixes undl it has been initialized. See the section "RTK" on
page 63 for specifics.
POWER.UP CONTROL
Controls whether lhe rcceiver will automatically rcset the values of
ceftain pararneters (the power-up paratnete$) to thei! factory default
'105
Seri6s 4000 Receiver Belerence
5 The Conrrol Scroens
values at every power-up. The default settings of these paramete!

Eroups (and others) arc listed in "Factory Default Settings," on
page209.
The power-up pararneleG are:
CYCLE PRINTOUT parameters

MASKVSYNC TIME parameters
NMEA-183 OUTPUT pammete$
1 PPS OUIPUT
X)SITIONING MODES (position fix mode only)
POWER CONTROL
REMOTE PROTOCOL
RTCM- 104 INPUT palameters
RTK OUTPUT CONIROL
RTK ROVER CONTROL
SV ENABLUDISABLE
Note that the folloq,ing parameters are allea).r reset at power-up,
regardless of how mWER-UP CONTROL is set:
BACKLIGHT TIMEOIJT
LlTRACKING (applies only to receivers with the L2 P-Code
Option)
To disphy. From the Corrol menu, select POWER-UP CONTROL.
gstflR0L
I (-- CHC 6E
To read. The screen shows what the rcceiver will do at power-up.

Possible actions are DEFAULT CONTROH (reset power-up
pammeters to factory default values) and DO NOT DEFAULT
CONTROLS (do not reset the pammeters).
To usc. Press the CHANGE softkey to toggle the pammet€r sering.
106 Series 4000 Recoiver Befercnco

TIE Cor r/Scr€ 8 5
You crn abo usc th! Corrir, !qu's DEAITLT @NIROI,S itrm to
tlset thc pow.r-up pearctqr to th.ir fraiory d€fadt vdu.s .!d
lEsffi ths Eccivcr (rs at pow6-up) i@.dirtcly.
SV ENABLE'DISABLE
Controh thc ruler thlt tha tEc.ivcr ulcs to &ci& wt thcf, to tsrct
!!d Dr. orch srtellit vc,hiclc's drta, bascd on thrt sollitCr bth
ltiaus.
To dbplay. F!06 rhe Cordrrl Mu, lelect SV EMBLPDISABLB
thc Ecrivcr dirplays thc fiIst of lh.r€ scrccEr.
To r!d. Thc lircs @ thcr.rt.n rhw:

f . Thr c{lnlst Eodr of tu{tilg & s&rUitc! h€alth statu8.
Podsiblc Yaluet atr:
So ae i(r00 B€c€hi$ RgElErlc€ 107

5 The Cort o/ Screens
- IGNORE IIEALIH(POSnON): The receiver will attempt

to use this SV for positioning and dala logging regardless
of its health status.
- IGNoRE IIEALTH(SURVEY ONLY): The rcceiver will

attemp! to log carrier phase data from this SV regardless
of its health status. It will not use the Sv for positioring.
The data can be evaluated latet in postprocessing.
- DISABLED: The receiver will not attempt to use the SV

regardlcss of its health.
- ENABLED: The receiver will attempt to use the SV if it is

healthy, and will not use it if it is uniealthy.
Ignoring the health of an SV is generally not recommended,
since data fiom an unhealthy satellite can ruin a survey.
2-4. A list of satellites that the receiver is treating according to

this hcalth status dode's rules.
The rcceiver determines the health of a satellitc ftom the data

broadcast by the satellile itself, or fiom the o:her satellites. Thc
NAVSTAR system's Control Segment sets a satellite's health status to
"unhealthy" if its perlomance is known or suspected to be bad.
To use. The softkeys arei
. MoRE MoDES: Cycle through the available modes.
. SET MODES: Change a satellite's mode. The rcceiver displays
this screen:
ii EIiT sv
PREU SU
I CHEHgE T1ODE
Enter thc satelliie's ID, or use the NEXT Sv and PREV Sv

softkeys to select the proper ID. Then press the CHANGE
108 Serios zlo00 Receiver Reforencg

The Corfol Screens 5
MODE softkey to select the desired hode for that satellite. Press
GiiEf,-lto accept the change and retum to the Corrla, menu's
SV ENABLE/DISABLE SCTCEN.
ADJUST LOCAL TIME

Displays and lets you change the offset from UTC to local time, and
the tirne zone identifier displayed 'rith local time values.
Note thar this sqeen conEols only the y'fupra) of the time. The
receive/s clock is synchrcnized with cPs time ftom the Sv signals,
and carnot b€ set by the user.
To display. From the Conr.r, menu, select ADrusT LocAL TIME.
To rcad. The lhes on the scleen show:

I. ADruST LOCAL TIME: Fixed text.
2. The current day of week and time.
APPRo)0MATE means that the time shown is derived ftom the
receivels intemal clock only. When the receiver is tracking one
or more satellites its intemal clock is synchronized with GPS
time, and APPROXMATE does not appear.
3. The difference between the local (displayed) time and UTC.
4. The time zone identifier.
Io usc. The sofrkeys aI€:
. FoRWARD: Advance the local (displayed) time in l5-minute
incrcmen8.
Ssrigs 4000 Recoivor R€ference 109

5 The CorLo, Screens
. BACKWARD: Back up the local (displayed) time in ls-minute

increments.
Use the keypad to charge the time zone identifier (up to three
characters), The time zone identifier is always entercd in
alphanumeric mode. Prcss GFEB-Ito accept sny changes you have
made and leave the scrEen.
BAUD RATE/FORMAT
Show atrd change each scrial pon s baud rate, data format, and flow
control. Each polt must be set to valucs that match those used by
whatever &vice it is communicating with.
To dilplay. From the Conrrol menu, s.lect BAUD RATE/FoRMAT.
The receiver di$plays diffcrcnt versions of the BAUD
RATE/FoRMAT scre.n for differcnt pons.
To rcad. The lines on lhe scrcen sho*i

l. which serial port is being displaycd
2. The port's baud rarc.
3. The pon's data format.
4. Staurs of flow conEol.

The scttings aIld their possible values are described in "Baud Rate,
Format, and Flow Control," on psge 230.
110 Sod€s 4)o0 Rec€iver Bereror|ca

Tho Corrt o/ Screons 5
To use. To change a port's settings, display that pon's settings, then

change the baud rate, forrnat, an(yor flow control. You may then
Ieave the screen by pressing lE[En-]or lEIfIn-I.
The softkeys are:
. MORE: Cycles through the available serial pons.
. BALID RATE,.. CHANGE: Cycles through the available baud
mtes.
. FORMAT... CHANCE: Cycles ttuough the available data
formats,
. FLOW CONIROL... CHANGE: Selects type offlow control.
REMOTE PROTOCOL
Selccts an interface protocol that remote devices may use to conEol
tle receiver or request information from it througlone of its serial
pons.
To display. From the Cortrol menu, select REMOTE PRoToCOL.
To read. The screen shows the type of interface protocol being used.
Possible values are:
. DATA COLLECTOR COMPATBLE: Used with Trimble Data
Collecto6 and receiver firmware updale software. For
information about this protocol, see the 4@oSUSS, l?S"232
Interface Dota Collector Fonn4t Specilications Manual.
'111
Sories 4O0O Receivor Referenc€
5 The Gol,tol Screens
. 4000 A/S COMPATIBLE: A protocol used by older Trimble

application softwaft. Se the Model 4A)0 Remote Control
I terface Manual.
To us€. Press the CHANCE softkey to toggle the sclected protocol.
CAUTION - When using the ,loooly'S compatible remote

prolocol, do /,ol aiach a device lo a serial port until you
have configured baud rate and data lormat on the device
and the recoiver port. lf you ignor€ lhis rule the receivsr
may misint€rprot irrcoming data as a command, which
could conupt lhe receive/s inlernal database.
lf you do make lhis error and thE recoiver locks up or
behaves oddly, turn the r€coiver otf and back on. ll that
does not hElp, roset the rec€iveis parameters to lheir
factory delaull valu€s. ll lh€ problem still does not go
away, call the Trimble Assistance Cenler.
REFERENCE POSITION
Display alld sct rhe rcceive/s rrfarcncc posilion.
A differential GPS base station uses its rcferEnce position as a basis
for computing corrcctions. Any error in the teference position will
affect tie accuracy of the corrcctions, and thus lhe accumcy of the
position 6)aes computed with those correctioDs.
A DGPS rover may use its refarcDce position to set &e antenna
height in 2D (fixed height) positioninS mode. Thus, any eror in the
antenna height may lead to horizontal position errors when the
rcceiver operatcs in 2D position mode.
You can set the positioning refercnce position to a point other than
the actual position of the receiver's antenna to calculate SV rise and
set times at that point (with the Sar Inlo menu's RISE/SET TIMES
112 Series ulom Receiver Rel€rence

The Corfol Screens 5
screen) or to calculate range and bearing flom that point to a

waypoint (with the Srdrus menu's POSITION/NAVIGATE tunction).
For these functions the reference position does no! have to be exact.
The antenna should be disconnected so that the receive! cannot
compute new position fixes, forcing it to use the reference position
you have entered,
To display, From the Control menu, press the REFERENCE

POSTTION softkey.
ENTER REFEREHCE POSITIOhIi t'IBRTH

LRT 37"23.4727A45' N SOUTH
LoN 122'62.245?6r5', Ut HERE
HAT -8487.436 m FCf,EPT
To read. The lircs on screen show:

l. 'Enler Reference Posidon": Fixed rexl.
2. The reference position's latitude.
3. The reference position's longitude.
4. The reference position's height.
To use. Enter thc leference position's latitude, longitude, and height

with the numeral keys and the dircclion softkeys.
A rcference position must be entered in the wGS-84 datum. (In
North America the NAD-83 datum is close enouSh to wGS-84 to be
used for most purposes. The NAD-27 datum is not.) Height can be
entered as either height above the ellipsoid (HAE) or height above
mean sea level (MSL).
You may also enter the receiver's current position (ftom tho latest
position fix) by Fessing the HERE softkey.
To accept thc refercnce position you have entered and rctum to the
Conrro, menu, press the G fEEI key or the ACCEPI softkey.
The softkeys are:
sefes 4000 Beceiver Reference 113

5 The Cort o, Screens
. NORTIT and SoUIH: Set the latitude's dirEction. Visible only

when the cursor is in the LAT field.
. EAST and wEsT: Set the lonSitude's dircction. Visible only
when the cuNor is in the LoN field.
. PI-US and MINUS: Set the height's dircction (above or below
zero). Visible only when the cursor is in the ItcT field.
. MSUWGSS4: Select the reference point for height: mean sea
levcl or the wcs-84 datum. Visible only when the cursor is in
the HGT field.
. HERE: Set the latitude, longitude, a height to the receiver's
cunEnt position (ftom the latest position fix). Visible only
when the cursor is in the LAT or LoN field.
Remember thal an uncorrccted position fix may contain e[ors

of up to 100 meters in any direction due to selective
Availability.
. ACCEPI: Accept the refcrence position you have enterEd and
retum to the Corrro, menu; equivalent to Gi'EFI
MASKS/SYNCTIME
Dsplays and changes paramcters tlEt the receiver uses to qualify
salcllite data for use in computing positioo fix€s or conducting static
surveys.
The recaiver rnaintainr seveml sets of elevation marks and sync time
paBheters for use in different q?es of Procedures. This sq€en
coDfols the positioning parameters, which are used for computing
position frxes autotromously or with fte DGPS procedure- When a
static survey is in paogress, it can also change the paramete$ b€ing
used to log measurcment data.
To display. From rhe Canrml menu, select MASKS/SYNC TIME.
114 Serios 4O0o Recoiver Befererrce

The @rdsc.o.n 5
. Ifa static survey ir ir progrEss, thc rlcriv.r displsys this

scllcatl:
Ptrss thc app{qriate rotr..y to display thc ddic 8uwr},rg

plrBEetlls (MODIFY SITRVEY...) or thc Faiti@ilg pdtiErks
(MODIFr FOSnIONIM,. ..). The lrcciycr diQlayE oo of thcso
lc_r!6u8:
. If rcsutic survcy ir inp6ogr.rs, tLercclivcrdispl.ysthc

F(NmONING MASKSTSYNC nMB 1c[..0 i@cdi.t ly whcr
you selrc-t MASKS TYNC TIMB
To rt A The lin s @ both ofthc paramctcr scrcur rhow:
l. SITRVEYn{G [qPol [ONnrG] MASrS/SINC IIMB: Fixcd
tcxt
2, BLEVAIION MASk The llcsiv.( @ly uro! thc svs that .&.t
rr cl'atim .qud to or grt E thr! this v.trra SV clcyatioo i6
crl@klcd wirh Erpcci to th. cErr[t lditudc !!d logiodc ad
z.do bcight ThG tsqgc of v.lu6 ir -9" b +90".
Serl* i|{,m Rshr6r BobllrEo r15

5 The Conrol Screens
3. PDOP MASK: The receiver calculates positions only wherl the

PDOP is equal to or less than this value. The mnge of values is
0.0 to 99.9.
PDOP values of 7 or less should yield accurate positions. Use
satellite visibility sofiware such as Trimble's Plan or Quicl(Plan
to predict iow PDOP periods for a particulat location.
Note that unlike the other parnmeters on this screen, a PDOP
mask does not apply to a single procedure; the same value
applies to positioning and static surveying, and a change in one
screen will affect the value shown in the olher.
4. SYNC TIME: Controls the length of an epoch. The receiver

genemtes one corection message, computes one position fix, or
log one set of measurement data per epoch. Cycle printouts (if
available and enabled) are gcnerated once perposirioning
epoch.
WARNING - Changing the slalic survey sync time lyhale a

surveying session is under way may render lhe logged
data unusable. ln surveying applications, all data wilt be
unusable except that recorded at mulliples ofthe greatest
common denominalor of lhe sync times. Forexample, if
you change the sync time rrom 3 to 5 seconds, only data
recorded at s-second intervals will be usoable.
'1
To use. ChaDge numeric values witl the numeral keys. Use the
PLUSA,INUS softkey to change the sign of the field at the culsor.
Press the GliEil key or the AcCEFt sofrkey to accept chaiges and
relum to the Canrlol menu.
The softkeys are:
116 Sedes 4000 Receiver Beference

The Conrol Scre€ns 5
. PLUSA,INUS: Change lhe current field's sign. Displayed only

when the cu$or is in a field whose value may be positive or
negative.
. ACCEFI: Accept the mask and sync time parameter values you
have entercd and retum to the Control menu; equivalent to
EnrEFl.
POSITIONING MODES
Dsplays and controls the procedure that the receiver uses to
computc position fixes from satellite data and corrections. You can
select the positioning mode that gives the most accuate results for a
particular application.
To display. Frcm the Control menu, select POSmONING MODES.
To view and set the positioning mode, press the PoSITIoMNG
MoDE softkey. The rereiver displays this screen:
To read. The Iines on the screen show:

1- POSITIoNING MODES: Fixed text.
2. Shows the method bein8 used to determine ionosphe c delays
in SV signal propagation.
If the L2 P-code Option is installed
and L2 Eacking is enabled,
possible values are Ll IONO MODEL (the rcceiver will estimate
delays using a model of ionospheric signal Fopagation; the
default) or LllL2 IONO-FREE (the receiver will not compute the
delays).
S6d6s 4000 Roceiver Reterence 117

5 The Conrol Screens
Ifthe L2 P-code Option is not installed, this line contains the

hxed text L I IONO MODEL; if the option is installed but L2
tracking is disabled, the line is empty. In either case, the softkey
is not defined.
3. Shows whether or no! the receiver will compute weighted

positions. Possible values are ENABLED (compute weighted
positions; the default) and DISABLED (compute non-weighted
positions).
4. Shows thc curent position fix mode, which determircs the
number of SVs the receivcr must rack to compute position
fixes, and the type offixes it will compute. Possible values are:
- LAT/LON OR 1-AT/LON/HEIGHT: Auto 3Dl2D modei the

default. The receiver perfonns 3D positioning when four or
more SVs arc available, and 2D positioning when only thrce
SVs arc available.
- LAT/LON (FIXED IIEIGIIT): 2D mode. The rcceiver

computes 2D position fixes if three or more SVs are
available, and olherwise does not compute fixes.
In this mode the receiver assumes a fixed height. It uses the
positioning reference position's height unless its latitude and
longitude are both zero, in which case it uses the last
calculated 3D height.
- HEIGI{I (FXED LAT/LON): lD mode. The receiver

computes 1D position fixes (heights) if two or more SVs are
available, and otherwise does not compute fixes.
In this mode the receiver assumes a fixed latitude and
lonSitude. It uses the positioning reference position's latitude
and longitude unless both arc zero, in which case it uses the
last calculated latitude and longitude.
118 Series 4000 Beceiver Beference

The Coalro, Scre€ns 5
- LAT/I-ON/IIEIGHT ALWAYS: 3D mode. The receiver

computes 3D position fixes if four or more SVs are available,
and otherwise does not compute fixes,
A rcceiver must track foul healthy Svs to genelate 3D

positions; thEe to Senerate 2D positions; alld two to genemte
lD positioDs. If more Svs are visible than the selected mode
rcquiles, the receiver can use the extra information to genemte a
nore accurate over-detennined position.
lryAR}{lNG - The kinemalb, Faststatic, and qulckstan

static suNoying proc€durcs force lhe receivEr into auio
3D/2D mode. Once this change has been made, it
p€rsists untilyou change it explicitly. lfyou need some
other s6tting, always check tho paramster at the start ot a
suNeying session lo be sure it has not b€en changed.
To use. The softkeys aIe:

. loNo... cHANcB Toggles the ionospheic signal Fopagation
model between Ll IONO MODEL and LUL2 IONO-FREE.
. WEIGHTED SOLUTION... CHANGE: Toggler the panmeter
between ENABLED and DISABLED. When WEIGHTED
soLUIoN is enabled, the receiver gives more weight to
satellites with higier quality signals in computing
overdetemined positiol fi xes.
. Position f, modz. . . cH,.i,lcE: Cycles position fi-x mode
thrcugh the available modes, listed above.
POWER CONTROL
Availsble ody on portable leceivers (not rack-Eounted
rcaeiYers).
S€des 4000 Floceiver Reference 119

5 The Conlrol Screens
Portable receivers can supply power to low-wattage extemal

equipment while operating, or can charge Trimble batteries while
operaling from an OSM2. The maximum power the receiver can
provide is 6 watts (0.5 amp€re at 12 volts).
Rack-mounted receivers display the POWER CONIROL screen, but
cannot power equipment or charge batteries.
To display. Frorh the Conrro, menu, select POWER CONTROL.
To read. The lines of the screen show:

1. POWER I,ORT: Fixed text.
2. The power control parameter's setting. Possible values are:
- CIIARGER & PWR OUTPUT DISABLED: Power input is on

PWR - YO I and PWR 2&3.
- BATIERY CHARGE ENABLED: Power input is on PWR -

yo 1. Power must be supplied by a Trimble OSM or OSM2.
Battery charging output is on PwR 2&3.
'I'he Sta,ur screen displays a 'C' after the power indicator,
The battery charger feature is mean! to be an ovemight

charSer. It fast-charges a 3.5 AH camcorder battery to about a
90% of capacity in 3 hours. Trimble 6 AH and I 0 AH
batterics take longer. If two batteries are connected, one is
fast-charged before the other. After each battery has b€en
fast-charged, both are float-charged to fuII power.
- POWER OUTPUT ENABLED: Power input is on PwR 2&3.

Power output is on PWR - I/O I and I/O 2; power output is
limited to 0.5 ampercs unregulated at the supplied voltage.
/: ')' / "/":"/
't20 Sed6s 4000 Beceiver Beference

The Corlrol Scre€ns 5
The Srarru screen displays a 'P' after the power indicator.
Note that the power pins of PWR - YO I and yO 2 arc

hardwilEd together, so that power ouq)ut is always available
through one whcn power input is p.ovided thtough the other,
regardlass of parameter settings.
To use: General lnstructionc. Prcss the CHANGE softtey until the

desirEd parameter setting is displaycd. Press lENrenl or lefEFB-l to
leave the scrcen.
To us€r Chsrging olle or more batt€rles.

l. CoDnect the OSM2 to power port 1.
2. connect camcorder batteries or Tritnble ban€ry packs to powcr

ports 2 and/or 3.
3. Set the POWER CONlIROL parameter to BATTERY CHARGER

ENABLED.
WABNING - Enable and use the battery chargE. function

only with Trlmble's Oflice Support Module (OSM or
OSM2). The charging loature's design dgp€nds on the
output cunent limits of the OSM2; using another powsr
supply could damage the recelver andor lhe powgr
suppfy.
To use! Supplyitrg po*er to external equipme .

1. Connect battedes or an Office Support Module to PWR 2&3.
2. Conncct the rerrlote equipment to PwRI/o I a lotlo2.
3. Set the POWER CONTRoL parameter to PowER oUTPUT
ENABLED.
.121
S6des 4{)m Receiver Refebnco
5 The Confol Screens
DATA FORMAT
Avallable otr,l000SE Land Surveyor oriy.
This screen contols the rcceiver's data logging fomat.
Each model in the Series 4000 line logs data in eithet standard
fomnt or cohpact foat. Early models use compact formt if
equipped with the Kinematic Functions Oprion, and otherwise use
standard format. More recent models, including all models discussed
in this manual, use compact format. The 4000SE Land Surveyor can
be configu€d to use either format.
Some postplocessinS programs are compatible wiih only one fonnat

or the other. The progmms that postprocess kinematic data accept
only compact data: so does GPsurvey.
To displsy. From the Conrrol menu, select DATA FORMAT.
The '<*' symbol indicates the format currendy selected.

To use. Press the appropriate softkey to change the data logging
format.
12. Series 4000 Rec€iver Reference

The Corfo, Scroens 5
L1/L2 OPERATION
Avallable only with the dual-trequency optlon.

This screen controls the receiver's use of the Ll and L2 channels.
For most suwey applications, it is not necessary to access these
controls. Disabling L2 may be desirEd lor single frequency
applications to reduce the volume of stored data.
To dfsplay. From the Con trol nenJ, select LIIL2 OPERATION.
To rrad. The lines of the screen show:

1. Type of tmckinS on the Ll frEquency: P-CODE and C/A-CODE,
or C/A-CODE only (P-CODE disabled).
2, Type of trackinS on the L2 frequency: P-CODE and E-CODE, or
E-coDE only (P-CODE disable).
3-4. A waming rnessage if L2 TI{ACKING is set to E-CODE only or
DISABLED; olherwise empty.
NOTE - The above tracking typ6s refer to lhe 4000SSi.

For ihe 4moSSE recoivors, E-CODE is substiluted with
X-CODE, which indicales cross-corelarb, (see below).
S€des 4000 Receiver Beference 1n

5 The Corrrol Screens

. Ll TRACKING: TogEIes the type oftracking on the Ll
fiequency.
. L2 TRACKING: Toggles the type of tracking on the L2
frequency-
WhCN L2 TRACKING iS SCt tO DISABED, Ll TITACKING

automatically defaults to P-CODE and C/A-CODE.
Whcn L2 TRACKING is set to E CODE (x-CoDE in lhe

4000SsE), Ll TRACKINC automatically defaults to C/A-CODE
only, and cannot be changed.
About cross-corrclatioa. The 4000SSE rcceivcr supports cross-

corrclation, and the 4000SSi utilizes a proprietary Super-trak
technique. These techniques nrake use of encrypted P-code during
periods when Anri-Spoofin8 is active. Although P-code is encrypted,
cross-coEelation and Supcr-tmk techniques allow the rcceiver to
obtain satellile measurements and derive the L2 mnges.
Receivers that suppon cross-correlation or Supcr-trak activate it
autornatically whcn rcquired. When the receiver detects encryptcd
P-code on a channel, it automatically enables encrypted P-code
tracking on thar channel. That is, for the 4000SSi it changes the
channel's tracking mode frcm"L] P-code and (XA-code, 12 P'code
and E-code" (the defanlt) to "Ll C/A-code onlt, L2 E-code onlr".
The receiver switches the channel back to the default tracking mode
if encryption is tumed off, or if the channel is assigned to a different
(unencrypted) satellite or to no satellite.
The L2 TRACKING softkey's E-CODE (or x-CoDE) setting forces
the receiver to disable L2 P-code on all channels. lt is not a norrnal
mode of operation, and should only be used when suggested by the
Trimble Assistance Center.
124 Ssries 4000 Beceiver Reference

Tho OordscrElr8 5
NiIEA-18S OUTPUT
Dirplsyr dd rcLc{6 6c typcs d NMEA-O163 IEr$rge| th.t ar!
wriuatr to olq,ut
To r rt ry. EioE lhc Corrro, Droll, !€lc.t NMEA-lt3 OUTPUfS.
The llceivcr dispby8 a multi-!.G.o @u ltd shws thc st!!u of
.o.h NMEA{I8:} dr@ Dssagc tyF, For dcs.rilf,ions of ths
essrgc AFq scc 'NMEA{183" @ pagc 275.
To F.d. Thc trIst lirc of tho first sst@, BNABLB rho,r ttc ecrid
polt to s,hich NMEA-01E3 ouEut i! eriffi. Pocsiblc vilucs lrc
X,RTI tkutgn PORT4 (subj.ct to ihc nuDbcr of rviihblc p@ts)
EdGF,
Ttr Illr8iiirg prr.E t rs 8hw' thc strhrE of oacrh sulportrd Ecotd
typo: oN or @F. Er.h typc of rEcoid i6 sftrGo to thc ouEot p.Et if
th. odreaDoDding pdlDrb i8 (}{.
Notc thal soEe ofthc parrectd! showtr .bovc at disphrcd @ly if
c€at i! aslociatcd q,ti@r at! iMtallcd,
S6rld 40(x, R€c€fugr R€br€rE€ 18

5 The Corlrol Scroens
To use, To toggle or cycle one of the parameters, press the

corresponding CIIANGE softkey. Wlen you arc done, press GFiEa-l
or lafEIB-lto retum to the Conlrol lolenn.
To disable all message types, set ENABLE to oFF. Thc receiver

automatically sets all of the individual message types to OFF. To re-
enable message types, set ENABLE to a por! number, then toggle the
apprcpriate message types to oN.
CYCLE PRINTOUTS
Available o y vlth the Two or Four Serial Port Option.
Controls the production of cycle pnntouts.
A cycle printout ts a real-time log of some aspect of the receiver's
opemtion. An example of a cycle printout is Po sition Calculations;
when this printort is enabled, the receiver outputs a message
containing tide, position, velocity, and other useful data. Cycle
printout data is generated at well-defined intervals: for most types of
cycle printouts, once per cycle (per epoch).
In practice, cycle printouts are rarcly printed. More often they are
rccorded by a computer for later use, or arc fed to an extemal device
such as a navigatioD,/positioning system.
To display. From the Conrrol menu, selcct CYCLE PRINTOUTS.
OUTFUT EUERV EECEIUER CVCLE

FORNtrT ( RSCII ] <--
PostTI0N cfiLcuLSTIoHS }IEXT
<.- CHH'IGE
EHflBLE T OFF ] <-- CHRNGE
To rcad. Thc screen displays the status of one type of cycle printout.
For most types of cycle printouts lines on thc screen show:
126 Sedes 4o0o Receiver Reference

The Codro, Screens 5
1. OUI?UT EVERY RECEMR CYCLE: Fixed text. ('Cycle"

refels to the positioning cycle time.)
2. The type of cycle printout, in this example POSmON
CArcULATIONS. The possible types of cycle priltouts are:
Position Calculations
Navigation Calculations
Raw Measurements
Nav Display Unit
Compact Measulements
EpMon/UTC Data
Position Quality Stats
Raw Ll Data Message
Position Type 2
Navigation Type 2
I-ocal Daturi ne Pos
RT Surey Data
The cycle pdntouts are described in 'Cycle Printouts,"
beginning on page 251.
3. The format of the printoul Asc[ (suitable for printing or
display) or BINARY (suitable for [ansfer to a computer for
additional processing). Fo! some printout types this line is
blankl that means output is provided in only one format.
4. r here printout is produced: PORT I lhrough PORT 4 or OFF
(disabled).
To step throuSh the different types of cyclc printouts, press the

NEXI softkey.
To use. For most of the cycle printouts, the softkeys are:
. NEXT: Display the status of the next type of cycle printout.
. FORMAT... CHANGE: Toggle the format of this type of cycle
printout bctween ASCtr and BINARY.
Series 4000 Recefusr Rof6r6nce 127

5 Th6 Cortrol Screens
. ENABLE... CIIANGE: Change the place where the cycle

printout is produced from PORT I tluough PORT 4 to OFF.
Output begins as soon as the cycle printout is enabled.
Press the LI-AEl key to leave the screen.

Be sure that the receiver's and remote device's baud rates and data
formats arc the same. Remember to disable the printout when you
are finished, because it is not disabled aulomatically when the
rcceiver is tumed off.
For information about th€ format and contents of each cycle printout,
see 'tycle Printouts," be8inning on page 25 t.
Exception: Rf Sal,a) Dorz. This cycle printou! is an exceplion to

the rulcs descriM above, becausc it has more paraheters than the
two normally displaycd on lines 3 and 4- 1ls scrcen looks like thisi
OUTPUT EUEEY RECEIUER CVCLE

RT SURUEV DETA <-- NEXT
PORT SELECTIOH <-. IIEXT
ENEBLE I BFF ] <-- CHANGE
Line 3 displays the name of a pammeter; line 4 displays that
paraneter's value. You caD s€lect a parameter by pressing the NEXT
softkey on line 3, and then s€t lhat parameter's value by prcssing the
CHANGE softkey on line 4.
The parameters and thcir possible values arc:

. PORT SELECnON: Contlols the place where the cycle printou!
is poduced. Possible values are FORT 1 through PORT 4 and
OFF. Output beSins as soon as the parameter is sct to a port.
. CONCISE FoRMAT: Controls whetler outplt is produced in
standrrd format (ENABLE. . . OFF, the default) or concise fomDt
(ENABLE... ON).
. ADD RT FLAGS: ConEols whether the output will include
IODE values and carrier phase cycleslip countcrs. This data
128 Sed6s 4000 Boc6iver Refercrrco

The Corlrol Scr€ens 5
may be useful to computer piograms processing tle data in

rcal-time applications.
OUTPUT EPHEMERIS: Controls whether output includes
ephemeris data (ENABLE. . . ON) or does not irclude it
(ENABLE... OFF, the default).
OUTPUT POSmONS: Controls whether output includes

position data (ENABLE. . . ON) or does not (ENABLE. . . OFF,
the default).
NOTE - Cycle printouts can also be controlled by a

remole devic:€ such as a computer through tho Data
Colloctor CompatiblE Protocol. See the 4o@SSSSE
RS-232 lntedee Dala dl@tor Fonnat Specilications
Manual tot deleils.
INT/EXT TIMEBASE
Availsble only tlth the Exiernal Fr€quency Input Optioo,
ConEols the source of the rcference signal that contols the receiver's
timebase.
To dlsplay. From the Corllol menu, select INT/EXT TIMEBASE.
TI}IEBFSE COIITROL'
INTERMAL <,*
3
.10
I'lHz EXTERNAL --
llHz EXTERNCL --
To rerd. The symbol '< *' indicates the curent source of the
reference signal. The possible sourEes arE:
. INTERNAL: The r€ceiver's intemal quanz oscillator.
Series ilo00 Rec€ivar Reference 129

5 The Contlo/ Screens
. 5 MHz EXTERNAL: A 5 MHz extemal signal on the EXT REF

pon.
. l0 MHz EXTERNAL: A l0 MHz extemal sigral on the
EXT IiEF port.
To use. Press the softkey that coresponds to the reference signal

source you wa t to use, Then press Gfiin-l or lEIiiFl.
A high-precision external reference signal is useful for very precise

geodetic survey measurements, and for position fix measurements
when less than 4 SVs are available,
WARNING - Do not select EXTERNAL unless an ordemal

reference signal is actually available. Ooing so may cause
tha receiver to funclion incorrectly or cease functioning at
all.
1 PPS OUTPUT
Av.ilable oDly with the I PPs Output Option.
Controls the production of a 1 pulse/second (1 PPS) timc strobe atd
associated time tags. The leading edge of each pulse marks the
b€ginning of a second.
To display. From the Conrrol menu, select I PPS OUTPUT.
To read. The lines on the screen show:

1. Status of I PPs output: ENABLED or DISABLED-
130 Sedes 4000 Receiver Retorence

The Coflt o, Screens 5
2. The polarity of the pulse. PoslTIvE makes the leadin8 edge of

the pulse rise from 0.0V to 4.0V; NEGATIVE makes it fsll from
4.0V to 0.0V .
3. Where time tags arE written. Time tags may be written to
PORT I through PORT4, or to NONE (meaning that time ta8s
are disablei).
To use. To change any of the parameterc, prcss the coEesponding

CHANGE softkey. Prcss lEiEa-lor leffiFl to retum to the Conrrol
menu.
The time tag is issued apprcximately 0.5 secoDd prior to the arrival
of the pulse. Electrical char"acteristics of the pulse are described in "l
PPS and Time Tag" on p.233.
EVENT MARKERS
Available only with the Evetrt Marker Input atrd Memory
Opdons.
Controls the use of event rnarker input.
The event marker fcaturc is used to log a pre.isc GPS tirne ta8 and
sequential ID numter in the currcnt data filc for an extemally
Senerated pulse, such as the shutter a photosmmrneEic calnera's
shutter opcninS pulse. The inforrnation can be extra.ted from lhe
data file by TRIMVEC Plus; for firller information, sce the
TRIMVEC Plus documentation.
To display. From the Crrtro, menu, select EVENT MAR(ERS.
EUEIIT IIERI(ERS3 I ENABLED] <-- CHCIIGE
SLOPET t HEGBTIUE ] {.- CHANEE

EUENT BEEP: T DISPBLED ] <-- CHRHGE
S6ri6s 4Om Receiver Reler6nce 131

5 The Corfrol Screens

1. EVENT MAX.KERS: ENABLED (event markers will be
processed and events will be logged) or DISABLED (event
markers will not be processed).
2. Empty line.
3- SLOPE: Shows the slow of the leading edSe of an event marker
siSnal. POSITIVE means the leading edge has rising vottage;
NECATIVE means i! has fallinS voltage.
4. EVENT BEEP: Shows whether the instrument wiU beep when an
event marker arives. Possible values are ALWAYS (always
beep), SURVEY ONLY (beep only when logging data), and
DISABLED (never beep). The event beep is useful for testing a
sctup intended to generate event markers, and for confimation
that events are being rccorded.
To usa. Press the softkcys to select the desired paEmeter settings.

Press Gifn=l or lEE66lto retum to the Cortrol menu.
About the event marker sign l. The event mad(er input's electrical
characteristics are descriH in "Event Mark Input" on page 236.
About user.entered events atrd notes. When data logging is under

way, the user can generate an evcnt mark from the lag Data l'nenn
by selecting USER INPIIT, then MARK EVENT NOW. This does not
put a pulsc into the connector, but writes the same type of message
to memory.
At any time, the user can add notes to a specified event mark ftom
the aog Da,a menu by selecting USER INPUT, then MARK
COMMENTS.
Both of thesc operations are described in "USER INPUT: Enter
Notes and Event Marks" on page 196.
Sories 4000 Roceiver Reference

The Coflrd Screons 5
DEFAULT CONTROLS
Rer€ts rho pow€r-up pa[aEcters to their frctory drfault valucs and
rEst .ts the rrceiver ar if it werje po*er€d down ard back up.
To. Elrry. Frorn the CalrD, Detrtr, select DEFAITLI CONIROIS.
To ure. To rr3et ttc pow€!-up paraDatcls atrd rrrtrt thc rEcciycr,

prc6s the YBS softkcy. To crDccl thc opcrdioo, I,r ss lhe NO soflk y,
l6EEL or GIEFI
Thepoelf,-lp praE.tcrs ud theird!fu t s€ttingE .lr sholt.l i!
Tactqy Defa t Scfii!8p," o[ pagc Z)9.
Note thrt yql can alro u6€ ltrc Con ro, Mu'8 FowER-IrP
CONIAOL it E to dctE(,oile whcthd thc Eccivc( vill t€s€t the
powcr-ul, pararEtars ev6Jf ti
c it is Do*e,red up.
Sed64(m RGiwr R€b|€rE6 13al

6 The Modify Screens
l}e Mod|fi screcos (ehowa o! fte plrcodilg pogo) lot yqt irspcc{
aDd chatrgc p.raDet r r.ttitrgs thrt e@Eol c.(t!i! .spcctB ofthc
Ecciwds ilt mrl opcnti@: IiD viewiDg rrt8le .bd b..*liStt,
b.tt6y u!€, b..pcr vofuDc, lnd dispbyEd uritr of Ecarur!"
The lrodrryscreon
Dilplays s Euti-raEa![ trclu whoiir rnaEu itaEB regtrcnt gurpo of
paraEatcrs yotl crtr iDrpect aDd charlge.
To drplry. Prcre thc lkEFlkoy.
ltc lcccivc. di.pl,J'3 tbc fitst d a 8cEi.r of sorrcos that ltr!.ot S!
tr1o4, Dro!, ftrss tho l(()qB sofftcy to sAcle though thc &(.cos.'
Tho itlmc thst crtr rppcal itr tho rlodlD @u [s:
S6rt€a,'0m Hacelver RglbrErEa 135

6 The ,rodry Scre€ns
l6Nffir lflEiRl
I xran i I xrfl6 I
Iffi:
i5Elt.€€!
fHal-Ei.lff
ifnFdo tqli...'rai i
:
Flfurr &l Hhrttlhy ol bdi?Scll m
196 9ori€8 40@ Fec€lver RefererE€

Ths /t ldiryScr€€ns 6
VIEWANGLE
Dfuplays aud chargrs thc IfD screco's optidflr@ vi.wiDg agL.
To dfun .y. F!r6c.l/odg] eoui r€L(, VIEW ANGLE.
To ure. P]!ss itra t P or DOXIN loffL.y to rdjud thc optimur

viss,ilg lDgb for b.rt visibility.
BACKLIGHT
Disphys aad cbaago8 the sqE€o backlight's briShhcas nd ti@I
intrrval (tt! rl'F affcr wtich lia rccciv.r lEtre rhc bocLlight off to
s6v. powcr if no t€ys hoy. bccn F€!sd).
To dbpby. Ftm thc ModS rur, s€lccr BAC'IS.K IT.
To [!C. F!e6s thc I{CREASE q DBCREASE soffl(oy to r4iust th€

displryh trightucar for bcrt visibilig. If you arr tuuiDg thc lec€ivo
nltra b6.tiec r@Ebcr mat hrigbteuilg thr LaD rr,ill shqtetr thr
tire you cal nro oo a batery chargo.
Uso tho curso ud mual teys to cheg. tb. tiEcott irtcrval.
Nc that thc tiEcqlt is rhrrys tlcct to ttp d€f.ult vduc (1 Eiuut€)
d ItoYr€r-up.
To trtrtr! b the fodit scrtto, prtar @)
SedEG,{x)0 Rec€hr€r Rot€lqEo 197

6 Tho Modit Screens
How the backli8ht is contmlled. The backlight has seveml modes

of opemtion:
. At modemte temperaturcs, thc backlight is nornully on. If the
receiver is opemtidg on battery powet it tums the backlight and
display offto save power whenever the timeout interval passes
without any keyprcsses; it tums them back on when a key is
pressed. If the rcceiver is using line power the timeout interval
is ignorcd.
. Ar hiSh temperatures, thc backlight is tumed off to avoid
adding heat to the unit.
. At very low temperatures (roughly below 0"C), rhe backliSht is
tumed on at nlaximum bdghtness to walm up the display and
improve LCD performance. The BRIGHTNESS and TIMEOUT
paramete$ are both ignorcd. Note that this mode of opcmtion
incrcases power consumption, and dccreascs thc time the
leceiver can opemte on a battcry charge.
POWER
Displays $e voltage of any battery or OSM2 connected to the
rcceivcr, and the status of the intemal battery charSer (if enabled).
To displsy. From the Modi, menu, select POWER.
P0trlER STETUS/SELECT <CHBREER EHEBLED)

PtdR-I/o 1 ,** NoT DETECTED'ft{.,}
{----
PoR 2 12.84U
Pt R 5 12.36U
To rr.d. The display shows the voltage detected (if any) on each
power pon. The arrow identifies the powq pon currEntly in use.
The notation CHARGER ENABLED or POWER OUT ENABLED on
the first line indicates that the battery charger featurc is enabled or
t3a S€dos 4000 Boceiver Reference

Ths ,rodiry Screens 6
the power out fe.tu& is cDabled. (Only one of these can be enabled
at a time.)
IrWR 2 and PwR 3 rcfer to the power ports 2 alld 3 on the connector
labeled Iryr'R 2&3. (See the illustration of the portable rccciver back
panel on page 219.)
The voltage displays have a maximum value of 14.7 vDC. The

OSM2 or anothcr sourcc of rnorc than 14.7 vDc is displayed as
514.70V'.
To use. To select a power source manually, prcss the corr€sponding
soflkey. You rDry notic! a slight changc in scrEeD backliSht inl,cnsity
when you changc power sourccs. Press lErnea-) or GIml to rctutn to
trc Modil, nlEnn.
If you enable th€ battery ch8rger fcatuteand an OSM2 is connected,
the receivq autoEatically selects the power pon connectcd to the
OSM2. If you select another pon, fte receiver will switch io that
pon but lhen will immediately sivitch baak
The reccivcr will not let you sr,itch to a port that does not have
€nough voltage to operatc it.
For details about thc rccrivey's rulcs for auomatically sclccting I

power source, scc thc subheadiDg "How the rcceiver selccts a power
source" on page 224.
UNTTS OF MEASURE
Displays and changcs thc units ,rhich t[e recciver uses to display
latitudes and longitudes, antenna hcight, and time.
Sed6s 4O0O Roceiver Boterencs 13S

6 The Modiry Scroens
To display. From the Modr, menu, select UMTS OF MEASURE.
UHITS: LAT-LoH = dee-&ih-sec <-- CHFNGE

f,HTEHHC HGT ' tnetere <-- CHEHGE
TII'IE = l2 hr local (-- CHgNgE
F0SITIoN = IJGS84 LLH <-- CHANGE

l. Format of latitude and longitude. Possible fomats are:
- Degrees, minutes, and seconds; for example, 35' 25'

30.5000".
- Degees and minutes; for example, 35' 25.5083'.

2. Antenna height units: meters, centimeters, feet, or inches.
3. Time formag 24-hour UTC, l2-hour local, or 24-hour local.
4. Position display fonnat.
The value identifies the selccted coordinate system (the one $at
the receiver is using to display position fixes). Possible valucs
ille:
- WGS84 LLH: Positions are displayed in the WGS-84 datum

(the receiver's standard datum) as a laritude, longitude, and
height.
- Local LLH: Positions are transformed into the local datum,

and are displayed as a latitude, longitude, and height.
- l,ocal NEH: Positions are transformed into the local datum

and projected onto the plane defined by the local zone, and
are displayed as a northing and easting ftom the origia of the
zone. The displayed height is the local datum height.
The local datum is intended to define the datum that is
customarily used for local surveying in the region where you
140 Sories 4o0o Beceiver Reference

The Modiry Scroens 6
are working. The local zone is intended to define the customan/

pojection ofthe local datum.
A receiver can hold definitions of only one local datum and one
local zone at a time. To change them, you must connect the
receiver to a computer and run the DATM4000 progarn.
Whcn you selcct a different coordinate system, the change
aflects the Starrr menu's PCISITION screen and the positions in
the local Datunfhne PoJ cycle printout. It doe s not affect any
other rcceiver oulputs, such as position fixes logged to a file or
the contents of other cycle printouts. These always use the
standard datum, WGS84 LLH.
For nrore information about local datuos and zones and the
DATM4000 progam, see IncaL Datum and Z)nes Option:
Software Release Note s.
Select the desired units or datum by pressing the appropriate

CHANGE softkey(s). Then press Gr.nrn-l or fEfEIa-)to rctum to the
Modify
'i.rcnl!..
BEEPER VOLUME
Controls the volume of the keyFess beep (which sounds whenever a
key is plessed) and the cycle beep (which sounds once per
measur€ment cycle).
To display. From the Molify rrenu, select BEEPER VOLUME,
Se es ,[o00 Roc€rver Reference 141

6 The Modiry Screons
To rcad. The volume of each type of beep is indicated by the length

of the bar between the square brackets. If the beep is tumed off, the
word oFF is displaycd.
To use. To adjust each beep's volume, pless the coresponding IIP
and DowN softkeys. To tum a beep off, press the DowN softkey
until OFF appea$.
hess lfriEa]or (dIEm-]to retum to the Modi.& menu
ALTITUDE REFERENCE
Displays and changes the referencc system for heiSht (altitude)
measurements.
To display, From the ModaE menu, select ALTITUDE REFERENCE.
ELTITU9E REFEREI.If,E
HEIGHT FBOUE I ELLIPSO]D
To read. The HEIGHT ABOVE... line indicates the height referEnce.

Possible values are ELLIPSoID (the wGS-84 reference ellipsoid) and
M.s.L. (mea[ sea level). The mean sea level is defined by the
average of observations at selected points around the continental
United States over a period of yea$ (OSU 84).
To use. Press the CHANGE softkey to toggle the height refercnce.
KINEMATIC ALARMS
Available o y wlth the Kinemstic Furctions Option.
Displays and changes volumc settings for special alarms used in

kinematlc suveys.
142 Sefies 4O0O Receivor Reference

The Mod,iry screens 6
To display, From the MolE menu, select KINEMATIC ALARMS.
KIHEHETIC FLPR},I UOLUITIE! /--- UP

POOR P00P nLPRI'l t... l------
,/---9BtH
uP
RETURN T0 llPR'{ ALARI, tr.r l------ Dol,H
To read. The volume of each type of alarm is indicated by the
length of the bar between the square brackets. If the alarm is tumed
off, tie word oFF is displayed.
To use. To adjust each alam's volume, press the correspondinS UP
and DOWN softkcys. To tum an alam off, press the DOWN softkey
until OFF appears.
Press lE-[rEB] or laiEFF-lto retum to the Modi, menu
INTEGRITY ALARMS
Avoilable only with the QA/QC OptioD.
lntegtity alarrns warn the uscr when one of the siSma valEes exceeds
a selected lhrcshold. The possible thresholds are 5, 10, and
20 meters.
To di6play. FIom the Modf) menu, selec! INTEGRITY ALARMS.
Thc receive! displays this scrcen:
l(-(- DHPNGE
I CHE}IGE
ACCEFT
To u6e. Press the HORZONTAL... CHANGE softkey to change the

hor;ontal alarm threshold, and the VERTICAL. . . CHANGE softkey
to change ihc vertical alarm tfueshold.
Seios 4O0O Recoiver R6fercnce 143

6 The Modrry Screens
MODEM SETUP
Available oDly with Remote Downlosd option.
Use the hodem setup string to reinitialize a modcm ilit ceases to
function. The rcceiver sends this string to the modem after five
minutes without incoming or outgoing data, and every five minutes
thercafter until the modem responds.
To display. From the MolE menu, select MODEM SETUP. The

receiver displays this screen:
I'IODEX SETUP STRIi.IG T PORT T ] <-- CI,IANGE

(SCHEDULED EUERY 5 I4IHS IJHEN IDLE)
To read. Line 1 shows the port to which the modem setup string
will be writtcn. DISABLED indicates that the modem setup string
will not be written to any port.
Lines 3 and 4 form a single field that shows the current mdem
setup string. If both lines are empty, the modem sehrp string is null.
To use. hess the CHANGE softkey to select the pon that is

connectcd to the modem. If no modem is connected. select
DISABLED. Enter or edit data on lines 3 and 4 to change the string.
What value to set. The modem sctup string should re-configurc the
modem to its nomral opemting state. Consult the modem's user
documentation lor specifi cs.
At a minimum, the modem setup string should put the modem in an

on-hook state and should set flow control !o inatch the configumtion
of the receivefs serial pon. It may also havc to disable autornatic
baud rate selection and set the baud rate to lllatch the receiver's sedal
port. Automatic baud rate selection may select thc wrong selting if it
observes unusual data pattems coming fiom the receiver or the line.

The ,,io.f;, Sq!€nE 6
E[it[|kd tdulcy tbc-doE lor mod.u tcfitp *rfu8. Thc EodeE

s,Etop sEing Fovidcs t rpccial, a.t od.d lc\niqu€ fc €ot€rilg
.lp.nuoeric data. Ttis trchdqur A'hl.' J,ou to .ot.r.evqal
8yubols that .t! ulet in oodeo comand ruing.
t
Whln ].ou prlss thc G) y fhc rcceiv€r displsys a sofrL.y @!u of
four rlpbalumic chrncEs, as usud:
If y.ltt prrss @) r scc@d liDr, thmgh, tc l.cciv.f, dirplsf s .ccond

@nu of rdditiood dphrD[Dcric chrra.t rs:
If you p!068 @ r $ird atrd a ftorth timc, thc rcccivcr dirplayr . ltird
ad fourth ocuu of rilditiod chcactag:
If you pEss E)a fifi! tioD it Edisplrys $c frrt lod.ry lqll.
Serle! l|{lto Recalvlr Rehltflcs 145

7 The Sessions Screens
The lSE5Ei6NSlkey leads to a series of screens that let yo|r define and
modify plaN for static surveys a,rd other data logging sessions. This
key is functional only if tie Mcmory Option is installed.
NOTE - Preplanned sesaions may be us€d for both static

surveying and tor horFsuryey applicalions such as
preclsjon positlonlng. Many of the Sesslors and Log Data
screerc rcler only to "sutueys." Bemembor thal lhese
screens apply to non-survey applications as well.
Sessions defined with the lSESsi6[5]key are called preplained static

surveyint sessions, or simply preplatmed tessions. (A static
surveying session is the only tyF of survey that can be prcplanned.)
They staDd in conEast to quicLstart sralic suneyint s€ssrbnr (or
simply 4aic,tstart sessrbru), which do not re4uire pre-planning.
Quickstart sessions are described in Chapter E, '"fhe lag Data
Screens,"
This chapter descibes the individual Sessrbns scrcens. Topics such
as how to pla[ a surveying session and how to choose appropriate
values for the ,S€$ion,r parameten are coveld in the Application
Guide,
S€des 4000 Receiver Reference 117

The Sessions Screens
7
ffii*n",o.-,
iJ?o";*",
",*-'
Figure 7-1 Procedure for Uglng S658ior,3 Scrcona
Series 4OO0 Receiver Relererrce

144
Th6 Sdssions Screens 7
Sesrio4 J screens are s€quential. Unlike most of the Series 4000's

other groups of scre€ns, the S?JJioxs screens arc sequential, no!
hierarchic. That is, the lSESSi6[5] screens lead you throuSh a prccess
that has an inherent order, and the receiver insists that you use the
screens in the proper order. The ,iajor sections of this chapter
corrcspond to the steps in the.Sessrbzs process. The ltLeenlkey
generally moves you Lrack one step in the process.
Uses in other prccedurts. The prcplarned static surveying

procedurc is useful in seveml rypes of surveying in addition to slatic
surveying.
In the RTK procedurc, rovers arc initialized and reinitialized at
rrarion, $,/ith known coordinates. (The .Sersroz.r prccess may be uscd
to define these stations.) For a description of how RTK uses stations,
see "Select Rover Station" on page 6E.
Faststatic and kinematic postproccssing software can accept base

station data loggcd with the static surveying procedurc. Thus, the
base station in a Faststatic or kinematic survey can be set up to log
data in a prcplaDned stalic survcyin8 session.
Step 1: Select or Deflne a Statlon Descrlption

In this conlext, a rrarior is a position at which a stationary recciver
logs data, or a mobile rcceiver begins logging data.
In a prcplanned session, the user must select a station &scription
that specifies the position at which the session is conducted. ln an
RTK survey, the rcver must selec! oDe or more station descriptions
that define the position(s) from which the rover begins movin8.
Each station description consists of:
. A numeric iDdd.t which uniquely identifies the station in the
rcceiver's memory. A recciver can hold up to 30 station
descriptions, with indexes ftoln I to 30. when you enter a
S6ri€s zlO(X) Receiver R6fer6nce 149

7 The Sasslo[rs Sq€€n8
atatiou dcecription yor caEot choos€ its hder" but the ,'as.rions
s.xEelr show what hdcx it has be€ir alsigled- The RTK sclpelr
refcr to I statiotr dcscriptioa's iader.
. A for-chrrrctcr ID, chos€6 by you. Wh.n you dc,fiac a
',atbr
resrio dcscriptiou lalcr in the Scr.riars prwcso, you Eult rcf€r
to a strtion descdpti@ by sp€ci&irg its statiotr ID.
. A naEe up to 50 c.hara.n (s loag; clrocco by yql. $e Drne
idcndfies the statio in posQrcecso screene ud regcts.
To tlfuphy. Prerr the IEEEEG) key. The rtcciv€r dispLys orE of
these sorecos.
. If Dost tidd€acriptiotrs a(€d!fiEdiDthe&ccivcds D.oory:
. If ltry st ti@ dcs.ritsioos ste dcfiD€d itr tha r€oeivcds EcEory:
To rrrd. Th€ NBW STATIoN s(,Eer di6plry8 rc irfomatio!.

The EDff STATION scr! o dirplay! o.c rt ti@ delcriptio- To
display olher sttio rlcstriptios, plcss rh! ND{T STATION lrd
PRBV STATION 8d.rys.
To [s.! G.[.rd idoratloD, Thc sofiLqra a!:

. AILPHA/NI MBRIe Tog8tro tho receiver bctwccu alphaluoeric
ard lu!€rie Eo&; .quivalert to th.lliFim ky.
'150 S6ri66 /O00 B€c€lvBr Bgbrlrrco

The Sess/b,s Screens 7
. ACCEPIi Accept the station ID you have entered in the NEW

STATION screen; display it in the EDIT STATION screen.
. NEXT STATION or PREV STATION: Display the next or
previous station description in the receiver's memory.
. NEW STATION: Display the NEW STATION screen, allowing
you to define a new stalion descriplion.
. DELETE IT: Delete this station description from the receiver's
memory.
Selecting an existing statlon descriptioD with softkeys. Press the
NEXT STATION or PREV STATION softkey until the receiver
displays the station descdptroD you want. Then press lEiiEE-].
The cursor moves to the NAME field. Change the station
description's name, if appropriate; lhen prcss IEN'iER-I again. Go on to
step 2.
Selecting on existing station descriptio. vlth the keypad. You

can also select a station description by entering its station ID in the
EDIT STATIoN field. When you cntcr the flrst character of the
station ID, the receiver displays this scteeo:
Wlen thc station ID is complcte, press fE]f),

If the receiver finds the station ID in memory it retums to thc EDIT
STATIoN screen and displays the conesponding station description.
If the receiver does not frnd the station ID in memory it displays the
mcssage STATION NOT FOUNTD at the bottom of the screen. Press
lEIeIFlor {5E55i6 5} to clear the error message; then correct the
station ID and press IEFEEI again.
Seies 4O0O Receiver Referehco 151

7 The Sessrbns Scroens
In eilh€r case, when you have successfully sclected a station

descripdon the cursor moves to thc NAME lield. ChanSe rhe station
description's name, if appropriatei thcn prcss IENE'I a8arn. Go on to
step 2.
Defrring a rct{ strtlon d..crlpdoD. If the EDIT STATIoN scrEen is

displayed, pr€ss the NEW STATION softkey to go to the NEw
STATION scrEen.
Enter the station's lD and prcss the G TEB-I key or the AccEPT
softkey.
The r€ceiver displays the station lD you have entercd in the EDIT
STATION scrEen a.Dd movcs thc cusor to thc NAME field. Enrer fic
statioD descdption's nanE, thcn press fEt{IEnlagain. Go on to step 2.
Deledlg s stitio! dscdpdor. To delete a station description,

display the description as in "Selecting an Existing sratioD
Description," atrove. Then prcss the DELETE IT softkcy. The
rEceiver deletes the station dcscriptio[ and displays the Feceding
description (if any).
Now you Eay delete arother station description, select an existing
one, dcfine a new one, or prcss lc[ffilto return to the Starur scieen.
Stop 2: Enter Station's Retorence Posltion

The reference pition gves the aacapted coordinales of the trark at
which you will conduct a session that rcferc to ttus station
description. For surveying applications, this is the position of the
bsse station.
Solect Automatlc or Manual Entry

When you lesve st p I of the SsJsrbrs procc$, the rcceiver displays
lhis scrcetr:
152 S6des /moo Recefuor Ref6rgnce

The Sessrbrs Screens 7
REFERENCE POSITIOH FOR! 1234

flUToi{FTIC <'+
I,IANUPL --
To r€ad. Line I displays the station ID you selected.
To use: Automatic edtry. This choice is appropriate for a station to
be used in stalic surveys, where only an approximate position for the
survey site is necded to get the survey started.
Press the AUTOMATIC softkey or the IEEJER-Ikey. When the session

begins, the receiver will use the reference position defined in thc
positioning parameters; if there is none, it will perform a position
fix. It will store the rcsulting position with the logged data for use in
postprocessin8. It will not usc this rcference position as a basis for
RTCM corrections.
Go on to step 3.
To use: MaDuaI mtry. This choice is appropriate for a station to be

used in an RTK survey or on a rover in a kincmatic survey, where
accumte cootdinates are needed to ensure accumte survey results. It
may also t e used for static suweys.
Press the MANUAL softkey. The receiver displays this scrEen:
EHTER REFERENCE POSITICI i 'NORTH

LHT 37.23-47?78A5' !l ' : S0UTH
LON .122'92,2487615' ttl t HERE
HGT -0667.438 i RCCEPT
't|
Enter the reference position's coordinales in the WGS-84 datum. The
softkeys are:
. NoRTH and soUTH: Set the latitude's direction. Visible onlv
when the cunor is in th€ LAT field.
Sedes 4000 Receiver Roforence 153

7 Tho S6slofls Scr€ons
BAST ed WHIT: Sct tha l@gitud,e's dftctiotr Visible oDly

whetr lhc cursor is in the IJON fi€ld.
Pl-us ud MINUS: S.t rhc heigbts ditrdioD (above d belov

zorc). Visiblc only when thc cursor i! iD thc HGT frela
Mslra,cs84r Scbct the rEfdrocc poi fG hcigbt

Br.lutgtrtetrtE: rtcaD se! lcvel c the WG$84 dram- Visible
oDly whcn thc cErq is h the HGT trcld,
IiERR Sct thc latibde, looeihdq and heigh to thc rEccivcls

cun€at position (ftoD thc latcst position fix). Visible oDly
when thc qEs6 is i! thc LAT or LroN field.
ACCIPT: Accept thc tefctrncc position you have eoteiEd. Go

on to sEp 3.
Step 3: Select or Dsllno a Sesslon

Ncxt you aust seloct a rcssion from ihe t€ccivrds !nel!o{y (r defira
a acw gesgio.
To dkEhy. Whetr you finish cntErirg the rEfercm.c poritiou, the

ltccivcr dilpLys oDc ofthcre !ctEaD5,
. If tro rclsioas are dafiDed in thp tltcliv€ds rnxcy:
. If .try lcssioos all d.finrd in tbc Eoeiv€de @ory:
154 Serles ,+0(x) Roc€tuor Btforqnce

The Sdssiorrs Scrcons 7
To re.d. The NEw SESSION scr€en displays no irforDation.

The EDIT SESSION scrEen displays one s€ssion description, The
lines on the screen show:
1. EDIT SESSION or NEW SESSION (fixed text), followed by the

session lD.
Tbe s€ssion ID nonnally consists of the sessioD's Julian day

(the &y of year) followed by a sequenc€ number. For
exarnple, the first scssion conducted on February I would
customarily be named 032-l (because February I is rhc 32Dd
day of t[e yea!)i the second session on that date would [r
032-2; ard so on.
You ca! ser today's Julia.o day by Fesring lSi(ESI thcn
selecting DATE.
2-3. The station ID and ststion Dsm associarEd with the session.
To display other session dcscriptions, press th. NEXT SESSION md
PREV SESSION soffkeys.
To uao! Gercral lDfornladotr. The softkeys ar€:

. ALPHA/NUMERIe Toggle the !€ceiver bctwe€n alphanuEctic
and nuneric mode; cquivalent to the lEm^) key.
. ACCEPT: Accept thc scssion ID yolr have cnterEd iD the NEW
SESSION screcn; display it iD the EDIT SESSION sseen.
. NEXT SESSION o. PREV SESSION: Display thc next or
prcvious session clescription in the rcccivels rnernory.
. NEw SESSION: Display the NEW SESSION screen, allowirS
you to defDe e ncw session descdption.
. DELETE IT: Delete lhis session dcscription fiorD the rEccivcls
memory.
S6ries .(}00 R6ceivor Reference 155

7 The Sessiors Screens
Selecting an exisdng sessiol descriptioD with softkeys. Press the

NEXTSESSION or PREV SESSION softkey until the receiver displays
the session description you want- Then press fEFiEFl.
The cursor moves to the session lD on the first line. Enter the
session number; then prcss IEFEEI again. Go on to step 4.
Selecting an existing session description \rith lhe keypad. You

can also select a session description by entcring its session ID on the
first line. When you enter the ftlst character of the station ID, the
receiver displays this screen:
SEBRIH SESSIONT lga-o NLPHA

STA'T IOH!
HRME!
ACCEPT
\lvhen the session [D is complete. press GiiFFl.

If thc receiver findsthe session ID in memory it retums to the EDIT
SEssIoN scrcen and displays the corresponding session description.
If the receiver does nor find the session ID in memory it displays thc
message SESSION NOT FOUND ai the bottom of the screen. Press
LtEA-Hlor lSESSld[O to clear the error message; then correct the
station ID and prcss GIEFIagain.
In either case, when you have successlllly selcctcd a session

description, go on to step 4.
DefiDing a new session description. lf the EDIT SESSION screen is
displayed, press the NEw SESSION softkey to go to the NEw
SESSION scrcen.
Enter the session's lD and press the GiiEa-lkey or the ACCEPT

softkey. Go on to step 4.
I)eleting a s€ssion description. To dclete a session description,
display thc description as in "Selecting a.n Existing Session
De$cription," above. Then press the DELETE IT softkey. The
156 S€ries 4000 Receiver Roference

The Sessians Scr€ens 7
receiver deletes the session description and displays the preceding

description (if any).
Now you dray deleie aDother s€ssion description, select an existinS
one, define a lew one, or press GfAB-lto rEtum !o the refercnce
position screens.
Step 4: Set Special Controls

The SPECIAL CONTROIS screen sets pammetels that affect thc
leceivels logSing of position data.
To tllsplay. The receivcr displays this screen when you finish
defining the s€ssion:
SESSIOI'I 125.I SPECIAL CONTROLS

USE SPECIAL CONTROLS
USE RECEIUER DEFAULT8 <r.
To rcad. The frst line displays the session ID.

To u!€. The softkcys arc:
. USE SPECIAL CONTROII: Display6 a scrcen that lets you sct
lhe special controls parameters to non-standard va.lues. This
scrccn is descdbed below.
. USE RECEMR DEFAULTS: Sets the sperial controls
pammeters to standard values (shown in the illustration of the
menu in the ncxt section) and displays the next scl€€n in dE
S.srioru process. Go on to step 5.
Serles.rcoo Beqeiver Roference 157

7 The Sesslons Scre€ns
Sotting Sp€cial Conttols Valuas

To display. If you press the USE SPECIAL CONTROLS softkey in
the SPECIAL CONTROLS scrcen, the receiver displays a multi-screen
menu with thcse items:
sEssIoH 123-t SFECIAL C0 rR0LS

POSITION LOBGED T NoRI,IRLLY ] <- CH8N6E
OUER DETERTINE T ENRBLE
LOG SI'IOOTH PR T DISEELE ]'
<- CHFNGE
<- CHENEE
POSI?ION TVPE T 3D/20 ! <- CHFNGE
HEIGHT SOURCE T AUTO ] <- CHAHGE
To read. The palarneters are:

. POSnON LOGGED: Controls the type of data that is logSed
and frequency of loggint. Possible values are:
- NORMALLY: I,og satellite data once per epoch, and a

position fx once evcry five minutes. This is appropiate for
most survcying applications.
- EVERY CYCLE: l,og satellite data and a position frx once per
epoch. This is apprcpriate for applications that rcquirc both
rcal-dme position fixes and postprocessing.
- EXCLUSMLY: Do not log satellite data. l,og a position

once per epoch. This is appropriatc for applications that
re4uire rEal-tinF position fixes only.
Satcllilc data consumes considcmbly morc storage space than
position fixes alone. In applications whcre postprocessing is not
rcquircd, re.ording position lixes EXCLUSIVELY will
substantially increase the receivels data logging capacity.
. OVER DETERMINE: Controls whethcr the receiver will
compute overdetermined solutions if it is rracking enough
satellites to do so. Possible values are ENABLE and DISABLE.
Overdetcrmined solutions use all availablc satellites. Solutions
158 Seriss 4000 Boceiver Reference

The Sessrbns Screens 7
tha! are not overdetermined use the minimum number requircd

lo compute the rcquired type of position; the receiver chooses
thc best available satcllites for this purpose, considerinS DOP
values, satellite health, etc.
. LOG SMOOTH PR: ConEols logging of smoothed
pseudoranges. Possible values are ENABLED (log smoothed
pseudoranges) and DISABLED (log raw pseudoranges).
. POSnON TYPE: Controls the type of position fixes the
receivei will compute. This parameter overrides the positioning
mode set from the confol menu. Possible values are:
- 3D/2D: Auto 3Dl2D mode. The receiver switches between 3D

and 2D positioning depending on the Dumber of SVs
available.
- 3D ONLY: The receiver computes 3D position fixes if four or

more SVs arc available, and otherwise does not compilte
fixes.
- 2D oNLY: The receiver computes 2D position fixes ifthree

or more SVs are available, and otherwise does not compute
fixcs. The height is determincd by tie HEIGIIT SOURCE
parameter.
. HEIGHT SoURCE: Controls the source of height information
for computing 2D position fixes during the session. Possible
values are:
- AUTO: Compute height from satellite data if possible;

otlerwise use the reference position's height.
- USER; Use an opemtor-specified height.
To use: General itrformatioD. Press the CHANGE softkeys to cycle

thrcugh each parameter's possible values. When all of the pammeters
are set press [E[i-a-lto display the next screen. Go on to step 5.
Series 4O(lO Beceiver Beference 159

7 Tha Sassbar ScI!q|!
To !r: E[G[T 8(XrlCE Wh.a ya c,ycb ttc valuc b USB, ttc

EcciEdirylry! ltir sl.o:
Thc scrlc! rhows lb tcigh ttd vill ba urcd to oo@ F!id6

6f,es.
Ulc th. ruEd tq/s to.h.n8c thD h.iCr Pr! r rhc PLUS rDd
MIMrS lofftcyr to d.sge thc !i8p- Whlu th! &tl n cotad pc$
th. ACTCEPT tofrtly to tlEra to th. SPBCXAL CIO!flROI,s !c@
EDU.
S.tep 5: Schedub thc Sesslon

Io di4lry.It mt ltGp i! b iLGE ttc Flph[ql sc..i6t 6
tirc ad nqrcy. Tto tEivlr dirpLy! thlr lc(l.or
To Ed.Thr fittt linc showr thc ltrti@ aumbcr (ir this 6rc, f8tl)
tulovird by thc lcseioo luEbci ((x3- l), ltr other lincs p(!!.ot
rdt y hbck.
To .r. Scb.t th. q/pc of FlphDDcd scasi@ )rqr wrnt Ttr
rdtcyr aq
. MANUAL SIART BY USBR: Thc s.rsio! will be statcd .td
s@pcd by tbe usq.
t8o *aqDhGlrr€.RrhllE
The Sessions Screens 7
when you select this choice, the receiver goes d ectly to the
next step of the Seffiors process. Co to step 6.
. ANY DAY AT SPECIFIED TIME: If stalted with the START
PREPLANNED prccedure, the session will be run once, at the
next occurence of a specified time of day.
Ifstarted with lhe ENABLE AUTO-SURVEY TIMER procedure,

the session will be run every day, at the specified time, until the
auto-suNey timer is cadceled.
The procedure for specifying the time is similar to the one
shown below for ONCE AT SPECFIm DATE AN'D TIME,
except you are not prompted to enter a date.
. ONCE AT SPECIFIED DATE AND TIME: The session wiII be
run once, at a specifid time on a specified day, whether started
with START PREPLANNED oT ENABLE AUTO'SURVEY
TIMER.
When you select this choice, the leceiver displays the following
The scrcen shows the scheduled stan dme and date and the
observation time. Change the values as apFopriate and press
the IEIEA] key or the ACCEPI softkey. Go on to step 6.
Step 6: Set Addltional Parameters

To display. Next, the receiver displays this scrcen:
series zmoo R€ceiver Reterence 161

7 Th6 Sess,b/,s Scrosns
STFT I0|r/$ES9I0H: 1254-843-1 i

RECEIUER DEFAULTS tH USE i
ELEUI1Tl0H l4flBKr+15' l'1IN SU5! AS i l,lNUS
rEPS SYHC TIr,lEr 615.9 SEC ifiCCEPT
This screen lets you set the static surveying parameters for this
session. Note that it does not affect positioning paraflete$.
To rcad. The lines on the scneen show:

L The station number followed by thc session number. In this
example the station number is 1234 and the scssion number is
043-1.
2. RECEMR DEFAIJLTS IN USE if all of the special controls
have thei default values, or SPECIAL CONTROLS lN USE if
one or more of them have been chanSed.
3. The elevation mask that will be used to screen satellites for the
session, and the minimum number of healthy SVs that the
rcceiver must rack in order to log data.
4. The measurement sync time, that is, the interval at which the
Eceiver should 1og position fixes and/or raw measurements,
. PLUS/MINUS: Change the sign of the elevation mask.
Displayed only when the cursor is in the ELEVATIoN MASK
6eld.
Cartion. Negative elevation masks allow thc receiver to accept
data from satellires below tr elevation. Note that such
elcvations are meaningless unless the receiver is located
substantially above Sround level !
. ACcEPf: Accept the pa.rameter values entered and go on to the
next step.
Sec the parameterc and then press the fEFiiB]key or the ACCEPI
softkey. Co on to step 7.
162 Sedes 40oo Beceiver Beference

The Sess/brs Scre€ns 7
Step 7: Add Another Session

The next screcn asks if you want to select and schedule another
session for the same station:
... MS
, l{o.
'..
To schedule another session, press the YES softkey, Retum to step 3.
If you do not want to schedule another session, Pless the No softkey.
Go on to step 8.
Step 8: Add Another Station

The next screen asks if you want to select and schedule s€ssions for
another station:
To selcct another statiotr, prrgs the YES softkey. Retum to step l.

If you do not want to schedule sessions for another station, press the
No softkey. The receiver displays the lr8 Data menu,
If you want to start a session now, see Chapter 9,'"Tha IoB Dald
Sclcens," for directions.
Sodes 4o0o Rsc€iver Refererrce '163

8 The Log Dafa Screens
The lIGdAIA-lkey, shown on the prcceding pages, leads to a group
of scaeens that let you:
. Set survey conEol paaamete6 for quickstart static, Faststdic,
and kinematic surveys.
. Start 4nd connol prcplanned static suveys.
. Conduct quickstart static, Faststatic, and kircmatic surveys,
. Conduct non-survey data logging sessions (using the same
procedurcs as for prcplanned or quickstart siatic surveys).
This chapter gives detailed descaiptions of the Irt Data screcns. The
prccedurEs that use thcse scleeos ale d€scrib€d in the Application
Guide. How to log data to a computer's disk and how to download
logged data for postprocessing, are explained in the Receiver
Reference.
Serios 4(mO R6cefu6r Flelerence 1U

The Log Data Screons I
Flgure &l Prcc€durg tor Uaing Log Olta Scjlen! (Not Logglng Data)
Series 4{m Recelver Reterence 165

The Log Dala Screens
8
(Logglng Dati)
Flgure &2 Procedute tur Uslng Log Lafa Screen6
Series ,toOO Receiver Beference

165
The Lqg, Oata Scr€ens I
NOTE - ThE {Loc.fi l key ls functional only on recoivors

that have ihe Memory Option.
Log Data Scrcens and Surveylng Procedures

Becsuse ther€ is not a one-to-one @reqrondence between selections
on the Zr8 Dara meDu aDd the types of procedures a neceiver can
perform, it is important to understand which menu selections do
what.
Static survcys ar€ performed by QUICK-START NOw! and START
PRE-PLANNED; fte latter $,ith the aid of a preplanned sessioD
description, the former without it.
Faststatic and kinematic su eys ar€ performed by START FAST
STATIC OR KINEMATIC SURVEY. This selection leads to a
secondary menu that lets you choose the type of survey you wa[t.
Static procedures rnay also be used to l()8 rcferehce data (but not
rover data) for these types of suveys.
Non-survey data logging for procedures such as diffqential GPS and
RTK are done with the pleplanned or quickstart static pocedure.
NOTE - From the r€crivor's p€Ispoclive, there 16 no

€ssantial dlfterenca betwoen conducting a static sutuey
and logging data lh a non-6urvey application. Thi6 chaptor
uses the tErm "session' to refer lo both.
Sories ,{000 Bec€iver Reference 167

8 Ths tog oah Scr€ens
The LqgOat Screon

To dl4lry. hessrhc 1166-B ltey.
The !€crivcr displays diffcrcnt lrg Data scarcDs whcD it is not
loggiDg dat .ndwh.d iti! coDductiuaquictstEt6prpl!trrcd
dlta logging rcssi@. (Ott€( proccdurrs that log data do trot allow
you to r.trg. frl.ly thrcugh thc lEcaiveds sclEelr, lld so givc yor tro
obsrce to displEy thc IrS Dat4 wlf,*a-)
. If th.tlcoive!is !dloggirydats, itdirplqys anulti-screcu
menu of s€lcctioDr for pl.nning and stating dara logging
op€rations:
Ttc Ecciv€r.lro dirplays this Ernu whcn you poner it up or

rcstsrt it, !!d ar thc ctrd of tto scrsiou prograurming p,roccee.
Tho lEou sebctioDs ar! describcd in thc fo[owiag s.ctioD&

. If thc tecciver ir cofucriry r quicbtafi or ElplaD!.d dlra
Ioggirg lcrsion, fu dirpLys a EEru of solcctioD! f6 r..r!:ag
atrd stop 'prqg thc scssioll
This scr€eo ir d$cdbcd in '€ooEolling a Sessioq" o!

page 193.
160 SorlEs ilo00 R€calvor RsbIgrt!

The Log Oata Screens I
NOTE - The main Sratus screen prcvides a convenient

indicalor of whether the receiver is conducting a session.
Press ISifS and look at line 1 of the screen. lf ii says
LOGGING FOR..., a survey is running.
OUICK-START NOW
This selection starts a quickstart session. It is "quick' in the sense
that it lets you start data logging without scheduling a session first.
lYhen you select QUICK-START NOW, the receiver waits for the
minimum number of satellites to be available above the elevation
mask, then displays the static survey status screen and begins
logging data. lt takes the elevation mask, miDimum number of
satellites, and measurement rate from pammercrs set with the Zr8
Dara menu's SETLTP SUR\GY CONTROLS item before the start of
the session. It takes the reference position ftom the most recent
position fix. (Since this reference position is computed
autonomously, it is not accurate enough for most suwey
applications, but is adeq ate for rnany differential GPS applications
that do not rcquire precise absolute positioning.) It forces the
positioning mode to Auto 3Dl2D.
Under normal conditions (no power failure or loss of satellite lock,
etc.), a quickstart session continues until you stop it, or until the
rcquired minimu'm number of satellites cannot be tmcked.
For information about how to stop a quickstar session, sce
'Controlling a Session," on pagc 193.
Series 4000 Bec6ivor Reference 169

I The Log Dat€ Screens
START PRE-PLANNED
The station and session desc ptions that you progmm into the
receiver with the l5E55l6I5l key can be used ro srart preplanned data
logging sessions.
The following sections explain how to start a preplarned session.
For information about defininS a session, see Chapter 8, "The
Seffiors Scrcens." For information about stopping a session, see
'ConEolling a Session," on paSe 193.
A similar, somewhat briefer scction in rhe Apprication Cuide
cxplains specifically how to conduct a prcplanned static survey.
Step l: SllBct Stallon

Select the station descdption !o use for data logSing.
To dlsplay. From the lr8 Dara mcnu, select START PRE-

PLANNED. Thc rcceiver displsys this scrEen:
SELECT STRTIO}I! 1254 IDiA2 !NEXT STATION

NPTE! |PREU STNTIOI{
i NCCEPT
To rcad. Thc screen displays one station's ID, index, and name.
To use. The sof&eys arei
. NEXT STATION or PREV STATION: Select the next or prcvious
station description storcd in memory.
. AccEPf: Accepts the slation description now displayed and
goes on to select a session.
Select a station description by prcssing the NDcr srATIoN or PREV

STATION key, or by entering thc station ID and pressing GNEn-lor
ACCEPT. Oo on to step 2.
170 Sed€s 4Om Receivor Roference

Tho Log Daaa Screens I
Step 2: Select Ses.sion
Select the session description to use for this session. It must be a

session description that has been defined for the sclected station in
the J€rriDns process.
To display. After you select a station, the rcceiver displays this

screen:
SEL€CT gE9510Hr A9r-1 |HEXT SESSI0N

sTPTl0Ht .1254 TPREV SESSIOII
ftAi'tE! i
I ACCEPT
To resd. The screen displays one session's session ID, the station ID
you selected in step 1, and the station's name (on two lines).
To use. The sof&eys arc:

. NEXT SESSION or PREV SESSION: Select the next or previous
scssion description stored in memory.
. ACCEPI: Accepts the session description now displayed and
goes on to prompt you for session parameters,
Select a session description by pressing the NEXT SESSION or PREV

SESSIoN key, or by enterirg the session ID and pressing lEtre-n-lor
ACCEPI. Go on to step 3,
Step 3: Enter Antenna lnlormation

To display. After you select a session, the receiver displays this
screen:
I UHITS
I .NEXT
I HEXT
iACCEPT

I The Log Data screens
To r€d, The lines on the screen display:

1. Antenna height.
2. Type of antenna height measurement (conected or uncorrected).
3. Antenna type.
4, Antenna serial number.

A postprocessing program must know the antenna type to compute
the true vertical antenna height (distance from the phase center of the
antenna to the point on the gound directly below it) from the
uncorrected height (dist,mce from a specified pafi of the antenna to
the same point).
The antenna sedal number is helpful in troubleshooting. If

postprocessing rcveals that a survey was conducted with a defective
antenna, you can use the logged serial number to identify the
antenna that is at fault.
To us€, The sof*eys arc:

. LT,ITTS: Cycles through rhe unds of measure for antenna hcight:
INCHES, FEET, METERS, and CENTIMEIERS.
. MEAS TYPE... NEXT: Toggles the measurement type. Possible
values are UNCORRECTED and TRUE VERTICAL.
. ANT TYPE... NEXT: Cycles through the possible antenna types.
Possible values and their meanitgs arc shown in Table 8- I .
. ACCEPT: Accepts the values selected and entered, and Soes on
to promPt you to start the session.
Use the numeral keys and softkeys to enter and select an appropriate
value for each parameter. Then press lEfrifFlor ACcEPr. Go on to
srep 4.
If you want to
start the session quickly you may ignore ANT
HEIGIIT now, and set it while nnning the session. (lfno value is
172 Sedes 4o0O Receiver Referonco

The lqg DEE Screens 8
entered before the scssion ends, the rcceiver will prompt you for it at
rhat time.)
Table &1 At{T wPE Parametar Valuls

ANT TYPE V'IU6
EXTERNAL (UNKNOWN) Unsupport€d or unknown
@MPACT 112 WGBNO P Compact Ll/L2 Antenna wilh qroundplane
COMPACT L112 Compact Ll/f2 Ant€nna without groundplane
COMPACT Ll WORNO P Compact Ll Ant€nna with groundplano
COMPACT L1 Compact Ll Antenna wltholl groundplane
PERMANENTII/L2 PermEnenl Ref€r6no6 Shtion L1/12

Geodgtc Antaflna
INTEBNAL (ST) 4tmST hlesral Antenna (nol appllcabl. to

r€ceivers dEscdbed in thl6 menual)
ATTACHAALE (SE) ModulerAntenna
EXT CDMPACT I'OME Compact Dom6 Ant€nna
EXT KIN (ST,SST) 4o0oST and SST Klnemallc Ant€nna
EXT Lrl2 GEOD (SST/E) L1^2 Goodetlc Ant€nna

EXT L1/2 KrN (SSE, SSD L'l/L2 l(nematb Amenne
EXI GEOD LI (ST,SST) Ll eeodollc Antenne
series ,(x)o Rec€ivor Roler€nce

8 The Lgg Oalts Scr6ens
Step 4: Starl the Sesslon

To dlsplay. After you enter antenna information, the receiver
displays this scrcen:
STqTIoH/SESS!oN! 2345-693-1 i STf,RT SURUEV

CPPROI. [''EI,IORY LEFT: 8.4 HR! UEER INPUT
! CHFTJ€ES
Puel+tr*rrrl 2!61!59 PI'l PST!
To rerd. The lines on the scrcen show:

1. The name of the file that will be used to store measurcments
from this session. The file namc is cornposed of the station ID
(2345 in this example) and the session ID (093-l).
2. The approximate amount of memory left for logging data,
exprcssed as a number of hours of opcration with the currcnt
pafiuneter settings.
3. An empty line.
4. Power status: battery charSing and antenna indicators; currEnt
time and time zone ideniifier. For deails, see "The.Star6
Scr€en" on page 34.

. START SURVEY: Stans the session. The receiver displays the
data logging slahrs scrEen. This ends thc procadurc for staning
a preplanned session.
. USER INPUT: Displays a scrcen that le$ you entcr inforEation
abou! the session, This information is stored in memory alonS
with thc loSged data. The scrcen is describ€d in "USER
INPUT: Enter Notes And Event Ma*s," on page 196.
. CI{ANGES: lrts you correct the antenna height and change the
name of the data file used to log thc data. The scrEen is
described in 'Ch8ngcs," on page 2m.
174 Serios 4000 Receiver Refer6nce

Tho tog Data Screens I
To start data logging, press the START SURVEY softkey.

What happens next depends on the stating mode specified by the
session description:
. Manual Start by Usel.' The session stans as soon as the
requircd number of satellites is available above the elevation
rnask.
. An, Day at Specified fime.' The receiver will run the session at
thc next occurence of the specified time.
. Once ot Specilied Date and Tihtz: The rccei\ter will run thc
session at the specified date and iime.
If a session's scheduled start time is past but its scheduled duration

has not expire4 the receiver star6 the session iinrnediately and runs
it until it would have ended if stalted on time . For exampte, if a
session is scheduled to start at 1500 hours and run for one hour, and
it is started at 1545 hou$, it will start inrmediately and run for
15 minutes.
START FAST STATIC OR KINEMATIC SURVEY

Required optiois. Kinematic suveying requires the Memory
Option, as do all surveying procedures. Faststatic surveying requires
the Memory Option and the Carrier Phase Option.
To use. If the receiver supports Faststatic surveying, select START

FAST STATIC OR KINEMATIC SURVEY from the lo8 Data en\J,
The receiver will display this screen:
Sedes 4(mo Receiver Reference 175

8 The Log Data Screens
PTess the START FAST STATIC SURVEY oT START KINEMATIC

SUR\EY softkey to display the main screen for fie desircd type of
survey.
If thc receiver
does not suppon Faststatic surveying, s€lect START
KINEMATIC SURVEY ftom the Lo8 Dara menu. The receiver
displays the main kinematic suwey screen.
Main Faststatlc Screen

Available only on dual-frequency receivers rlth the Carrier
Phase OptioD.
To display, Press the lGTare-lkey to display the Zo8 Data menu.

From that menu, select START FAST STATIC oR KINEMATIC
SURVEY. From the following menu, select START FAST STATIC
SIIRVEY.
The screen displays different information at different points in the
Faststatic sufley procedure. These examples cover the major
variations.
. Waiting to start an observation:
FRST.. STFT.IC! IIOUE TO I'IRRK i STFBT

I
TRSCkING 5 6uE I INPUT./GHiIES
PRESS START CT HEIll }'ICR( I END SURUEV
. During an observation, before sufficient data for the

obse ation has been collectad:
FEST' STATIC! COLLECTI}IG DATFI

BBORT
IIFR|{. IDr -:-_AEAl 5 SU5 ! IIIPUT/CHNGS
TIHE EEI,AININ6: T4;59 I END SURUEV
176 Seies 4000 Receiver Belerence

The Log Dala Screens I
. During an observation, after sufficient data fol the observation
has been collected:
FPST STCIIC! CBLLECTING DFTRi i'IOUE

I FBORT
i(FR|< ID! FLDCAEA1 5 SUs J IHPUT.,CHHBS
,** FRESS I{OUE EEFORE I,IOUIR6 I ENF SURUEY
To read. Tho lines on the screen show:

l. The fixed tcxt FAST STATIC, followed by a descriprion of rhe
Faststatic survey procedure's cunent stanls. Possible statuses
are:
* MOVE TO MARK: The receiver is waiting for you set up
the antenna at the frst (next) survey mark. WIen the
antenna is set up, connected, ccntcred, and leveled, prcss
rhe START softkey to sran an observarion.
- WAIT FOR DATA: The rcceiver is initializing itself to

pelfolm a Faststatic survey. This status appea$ bdefly at
the beginning of the frst observation in each session.
- COLLECTING DATA: The receiver is collecting

measurcment data, or cannot collect sulficient dala to
ensure a valid observation because it cannot Eack the
minimum requircd number of satellitcs.
- SUmCIENT DATA| Thc receiver has collected sufficient

data to ensurc a valid observation, and cannol collect more
because it is tracking fewer than two satellites.
3. The ID of the mark currently occupied (if any) and the number
of satellites being tracked.
4. Contents depends on the mark's data collection status.
Before enoug.h data has been collected !o ensure a valid
observation, line 4 shows the predicted data collection time
remaidng, in minutes and seconds. If the rcceiver cannot Eirck
Sodss 4000 Bec€iver Referenc€ 177

The Log Data Screens
tle minimum number of satellites required by lhe Faststatic

data logging parameters, line 4 still displays the words TIME
REMAINING, but the time value is replaced by a message like
NEED 5 Svs ("need 5 satellites").
At most othertimes, line 4 shows a scrolling message

describing the next action you must take- When such a message
is displayed, you can redisplay it from the beginning by
pressing the IEIEiF-Ikey. lf the number of available satellites
drops below 2 (the minimum required to form a double-
difference) aTter the receiver has collected sufficient data for a
valid observation, the scrolling message on line 4 docs not
change, but thc procedure's status on line I changes !o
SUFFICIENT DATA. In this case you may terminate the
observation by pressing the ABORT softkey, and on the
rcsulting screen pressing the DATA OK softkey. Then you may
go on to the next mark. (See 'Aboning an Observation" on
page 203 for details.)
To use, The softkeys are:

. START: Start an observation. Press this softkey after setting up,
centering, leveling, and attaching the antenna.
. MovE: End an observation. This softkey is available only when
the receiver has collectcd enough data for a complete
observation.
You must press MovE before Eoving or discoDnectins the
antenna, or the dats you hsve collected at the curnent mark
will be mrruphd.
. ABoRT: Abort the current obscrvation. The receiver displays a
menu that lets you specify the reason for aborting the
observation.
. INPU'TCHNGS: Displays a menu that lets you enter antenna
pammeters and notes, and change the data file's name.
174 Sories 4000 Receiver Beference

The Log Dala Scroens 8
. ENiD SURVEY: Displays a screen that prompts you to confim

that you want to end the survey. Press the YES softlcy to end
the survey and retum to the ao8 Dala menu; press NO to
continue running the suwey.
Ifthe receiver is collecting data, ending the survey will

automatically end the curent observation if the rcceiver has
collected enough data, or abort the observation if it has not.
Enter mark ID, At some time during the obseflation at cach mark,
you must enter a mark ID. The mark ID field is eiSht characters
long; it consists of a four-chamctei identifier which you must enter,
followed by a four-character sequence number which the receiver
fills in.
The sequence number is reset to 000 I for the first obseralion at
each rnark. lf an obseflation is abo(ed and repeated, the receiver
ordinadly increments the sequence number by I . You also can
change the sequence number manually if necessary.
Time remaiDing may increase or decrease. The observation time

remaining, displayed on the fourth line, is a prediction based on the
settings of the Faststatic data logging paramete$ and the cuEent
observation conditions. It may increase or decrease during the
observation if conditions change. In any case, you can be sure that
the receiver has collected enough data for a valid observation when
the time remaining reaches zero.
Maln Klnemallc Screen

To display. Press the llEEATAl key to display the lr8 Data meru.
Frcm that menu, sclect START FAST STATIC OR KINEMATIC
SURVEY. From the following menu, select START KINEMATIC
SIJRVEY.
Series 4000 Rec6iv6r Beference 179

I The log Dact Sclr€fl6
Thc rotcn dirplays difrcreot irfdEation .t ditf.rlot poiEts iE th.

tircnatic ruvcy focc<ture. Th€sc .f,r!$pl€s cov6 tbe ln4id
vrirtiotrs-
. Waiting to stsrt Etr obsqvatiotr:
. Durilg a! obr.flatioE, Mde Bffici€Dt dnr foE thc

obBervatiou [!s be€n colbcted:
. Durilg E! obsavatioq & sutroicot dah f6 tbc obeervatio

har bceo collccrod:
To rtrd. Thc lince o tbe ..rrc[ show:
1- The fircd tc* trIIVEMAIIC IrIODE followed by a dcacriptim of

tbp kirrmatic survcy proc€duret curl Dt da$s, Possible
sttfu&a att:
- ROVING: lIE Ecciv€r ed ebEa uy

bc DoyEd to th. rqt
eurycy D[k. WLe'r thr !nt!!r!a ir sct np, c@D.ctc4
ceDtere4 and ls'vele4 !,rEs! thc STATTC rdLey b stdt e
obecrvstio-
't80 SeriE itcr(x, B€c6fu6r RolbrrIrct

The Log Daaa Scroens 8
- STATIC WAIT: The receiver is collecting measurement data.
- sTAfiC: The receiver has collected sufficient daia to ensure a

valid observation, but will contrnue collecting data until you
press the ROVE softkey.
2. The number of the current data set (the curent observation) and
the number of satellites being uacked.
3, The ID of the mark currently or most recently occupied.

4. The nuhber of epochs of data that have becn collected at the
current mark, without intcrruption and wilh the minimum
number of satellites available.
. STATIC: Slan an observation. Press this softkey after
positioning the antenna over a mmk.
. ROVE: End an observation. This softkey is availablc only when
the receiver has collected enough data for a complete
observation.
In a stop-atrd-go suFey you hust press ROVE bcfore
moving the antenns, or the dlta you hsve collectcd at the
curretrt Eark will be corrupted.
. ABORT: Abort the curEnt observation. The rcceiver displays a
menu that lets you specify the reason for aborting the
observation. (See 'Aborting an Observation" o\ page 2O3.)
. INPUT/CHNGS: Displays a menu that lets you cnter antenna
paramcterc and notes, and change the data file's name.
. END SUR\r'EY: Displays a screen that prompts you to confirm
that you want to end the survey. Press the YEs softkey to end
the suryey and retum to the Zog Dara rnenu; press NO to
continuc runling t]re survey.
Series rO00 Recsiver Re{erence 181

I The Log Data Screens
Ifthe rcceiveris collecting data, ending the survey will

automatically end the current obsewation if the receiver has
collected enough data, or abort the observation if it has not.
Enter point ID. At somc time during the observation at each mark,
you must enter a point ID. The point ID field consists ofafour-
character identifier followed by a four-chalacter sequence number.
The receiver automatically increments the ffailing numeric part of
the sequence number for each obse ation, so yol.r usually need only
press [E iia_] to accept the point ID displaycd. You can change the
sequence umber manually if neccssary, though.
INPUT/CHNGS Menu: lnput Data or Change Parametera
To display. From the marn Faststatic or kinernatic menu, press the

INPUT/CHNGS softkey.

. USER INPUT: Displays a menu that lets you enter field notes,
event marks, event mark comnents, and surface meteorological
data. See 'USER INPUT: Enter Notes and Event Marks" on
page 196.
. CHANGES: Displays a menu tlat lets you enter antenna
pammeters, change the data file's narnc, and change the volume
of thc beep that the receiver makes when it has collected
enou8h data to ensure a valid observation at a matk. See
"CHANGES" on paSe 200.
1A2 Series rO00 Receiver Reference

The Log Data Screens 8
You must use CHANGES to enter antenna pammeters- If you ale

using a tripod you must use CHANGES once per occupation,
since thc antenna s height will change each time it is moved.
. STATUS: Available only during a Faststatic survey; displays a
screen that shows the status of the satellite observations. See
the descriptiol below.
STATUS
To displsy. From the main Faststatic screen, prcss the IEE/iEl key
orthc INPUT/CHNCS softkey, then the STATUS softkey.
TII'IEs!
CO}ITINUOUS TRASKIflG !
a4) 5 6 $us i
RE0UIRE! --:-- 15!qO 8:69 !CURRENT
BEST! 19!16 19116 21gA i RETURH
To read. The lines on the scrcen show:

1. CONTINUOUS TRACKINC TIMES: fixed text.
2-3. The minimum measuement times required for four, five, and
six or more satellites by the Faststatic data logging
pammeters. (For information about setting these parameters,
see "Setup Survey Controls" on page 190.) In this example,
the value for four satellites was entered as 0:00, disabling the
corresponding minimum observation time. The '4' on line 2
is enclosed in bmckets, and the value on line 3 is blank.
Pressing the CURRENT softkey makes line 3 display the

curent continuous measutement times for four, flve, and six
or more satellites.
4. The durarions ofthe best (longest) continuous meilsurement
times. If any of the values on Iine 4 is greater than the
corresponding value on line 3, thc MOyE softkey is available
on the main Faststatic scrcen.
Sories 4O0O Beceiver Refer6nce '183

I The Log Data Screens

. CURRENT/REQIIIRE: Toggles the display on line 3 between the
continuous measurement times required to complete an
observation (the initial display), and the current continuous
measurcment times.
. RETURN: Retum to the main Faststatic screen. Equivalent to
GLEAFI.
Multiplc Dala Files tor One Faststatic Survey

The Faststatic surveying procedure nomally creates a single data
file for all of the observations in a survey. This simplifics the task of
file managemcnt.
It is also possible to create a separate file for each survey rnark.
Simply start each observation by performing the procedure for
starting a survey, and end it by pressing the END SURVEY softkey.
Each data filc will have ihe same filcname in the rcceiver (unless the
UTC day happens to chanSe during the survey). when you
download the files, you must combinc them or give them distinct
DOS file names.
Tuming Powor Olf Between Faststatic Suruey Marks

If a Faststatic survcy's marks are far apan, you may want to tum off
the receive/s power while moving to preservc the battery charge.
Before you tum off the receivcr you should end the session by
pressing the END SURVEY softkey. lvhen you tum the receiver back
on, it will start a new session (and a new data file) as described in
"Multiple Data Files for One Faststatic Survey," above.
Since it is possible to rcsume a survey after a power failure, it is
theoretically possible to tum the power off betweel marks by
pressing the MO\aE softkey, then powering off. The rcceiver will

The Log Daia Screens I
restart in the Mare mode when powered on. This technique is not
recommended, though, except irs a means of recovering fi1crh an
accidental loss of power. lt still produces multiple data files, but it
does not put a header in each file; thus you must concatenate the
files after downloading them in order to postprocess them.
ENABLE AUTO-SUBVEY TIMER

The ENABLE AUTO-SURVEY TIMER selection schedules all
sessions that hav€ been defined to stan "Any Day at Specified Time"
or "Once at Specified Daie and Time."
In addition, the ENABLE AUTO-SURVEY TIMER sclection makes
the rcceiver "sleep" until the time whcn the first session is scheduled
to start. Five minutcs before the session will star!, the rcceiver wakes
up and attempts to acquire SVs. It then starts the session
automatically. When the session ends, the receiver may remain
a\take or go back to sleep until the next session is scheduled to be
run. When there are no more scheduled sessions, thc receiver tums
itself off.
The auto-suwey timer is useful for unattendcd base station
operatiod. You can use it to schedule a series of data logging
sessions to coincidc with times when you are conducting surveys
with a rover. By Dot logging data between sessions, you conserve lhe
base stalion's memory and increase its effective data logging
capacity.
The auto survey tirner also conserves battery power, since baltery
dmin is very low when the receiver is asleep. A fully charged
2.3 ampere-hour battery can power a receiver for about 3.5 hours
when it is awakc, or for more lhan a week when it is aslecp.
When you use the auto-survcy timerr take care not to schedule
overlapping sessions; the eadier session will "cover" a laler one,
which thus will be unable to start until the earlier session ends.
Series 4OOO Receiver Beforence 185

I The Log Dala Screens
To displsy. From the lrg Dara menu, select ENABI-E AUTO-

SURVEY TIMER. The recciver displays this screen:
AUTO.SUROEV I'1ODE OFF Ig ENABLE

SCHEDULED SEESIONS!
1 EUERYDAV SESSION
N0 ot'tcE-oNlv sEssloNs
To read. The first line shows whether the auto-su ey timer is

enabled- The other lines show the number of "Any Day at Spccified
Time" and "Once at Specified Date and Time" sessions that will be
scheduled.
To use. Press the ENABLE softkey to display this scrcen:
EHABLE E SLEEP AETUEEH SURUEVS -_

.-
ENFBLE & STflV EI,,CI(E BEThIEEN SURUEYS
CANCEL -.
Press one of the ENABLE... softkeys to enable the auto-survey timcr.
ENABLE & SLEEP- . . makes the receiver go back to sleep after each
session; ENABLE & STAY AWAKE... makes it stay awale after
waking up for the fust session.
The TIMER indicator to the left of the keypad lights up, showing that
the auto-survey timer is enabled but the receiver is not yet asleep.
The receiver displays this screen:
CUTO-SURUE'/ HODE EHASLED CANCEL

DEFAULT I1HTEHN9 HEIEH'I! UHITS
6AA9. A6AA TNCHES
gERIAL *r 8AA6A6 f,CCEPT
This scrcen gives you one more chance to chan8e the antenna height
and serial number. If you €nror values, they will apply to all of the
scheduled sessions. When you are done changing these values. if
186 Series 4O0O Beceiver Beterence

The aog Dala Screens 8
necessary, prcss the ACCEPI softkey. The recciver displays this
TIUTD-SURUEV I,IODE ENNBLEO i EfiEEEL

i
GO1N6 TO GLEEF lH 39 5ECOHOS i
UNTIL:TUE I2-JUL-94 15125 P91/24 i
The last line shows the date and time when the receiver will wake up
for the fifit scheduled session. Thc COINC TO SLEEP. . . Iine counts
dowll to zero, then the receiver goes to sleep.
While the receiver is aslcep, the SLEEP indicator flashes every few
seconds to show that the receiver is not tumed off.
WheD scheduled sessions are run. "Schedules all sessions" means

that the rEceiver will run each session at the scheduled time without
fufther intervention. Any sessions defined to start "Any Day at
Specified Time" will be run €ver, da) until the auto-survey timer is
canceled.
Ifa session's scheduled start time is past but its scheduled dumtion
has not expired, the receiver staits the session immediately and runs
it until it would have ended if started on schedule. For example, if a
session is scheduled to start at 1500 hours and run for one hour, ard
the auto-survey timer is enabled at 1545 hours, the session will start
immediately and run fff 15 minutes.
Canceling the Auto-Survey Timer

You can cancel the auto-survey timer, if necessary, at any time.
Canceling the auto-survey tirner terminates the current surveying
session if any; deschedules any other scheduled sessions; and tums
off the timer.
Seri€s zO00 Receiver B€larence 147

I The Log Dala Scre€ns
NOTE - lfyou end a survey manually (with the survey

status screen's END SURVEY softkey) while ths auto-
sutuey timer is 6nabled, the receiver willdisable ths timer.
No other preplanned suryeys will run unlil the timer is
enabled again.
If the rccriver is avake: You can use most functions without

canceling the auto-survey timer. For example, you can download
logged data and delete old &ta frles. In this respelt, running a
session with the auto-survey timer isjust like running a session
manually, except that the receiver loSs data only when a scheduled
session is actually ruDning.
lfyou mus! cancel lhe auto-survey tirEr:

1. hess lLoc oATAl. The lr8 Dara menu will appear.
2. Rrcfi the log Data menu, pless the END suRvEY softkey. (See
"End Survey," on page 202, for more detailed instructions.)
If lhe rc(.eiver is ssleep,
1. Press the [F6Fin-] key to wake the receiver up. It will perfom
its power-up tests, then display this scrcen:
2. To prevent the rEceiver ftom goinS back to sleep, press the

CANCEL softkey within the 30 second countdown period. The
Ia8 Data will npFar.
'Ire,nn
188 S6des 40m Fbc€iver Refereflce

Th6 Log Dah ScrEos 8
RESULTS FROM PREVIOUS SURVEY

You caD roview thc rcsults fiom the most r€ccnt completed static
survey or oth.r data loggiag scssioD.
To dlspLy. From the log D4ra heou, !6lect RESULTS FROM

PREVIOUS SITRVEY. The Eceiver displays the first of these sqEeDs:
To rt.d: trrst rcrcor. Tte lh€s o! the 8areen show:

l. The station ID and sessiotr ID of the Eost..crEt coEpletcd
scssion.
2. The dat! rod tiDc when the s€seion beg&.
3. Thc duratior ofthc scssioD.

4. How tho sersion was qrd€d: by erpiEtio[ ofthe obsErv*iolr
titrF, by the utcr, ctc.
To rgld: gecoDd rarad. Each coluEn gives Dcrsurcmrtrt couots
for oae satcllitc thst w0s traaked during the session. The lines otr the
sCr€en show:
l. Salellite nurbcr.
2. CONTINUoUS: Thc nuEbct of lDcosuEEents Drde sitrce thc
rcceiver startqt loggilg data ro the culEnt fi'le or since
rneasureEedts w€(e i ellupted, whichever happaned latar.
Sories {I)0o R€c€lvor Faf€r€nce 189

I The Log lrab Scleons
3. ToTAL MEAS: Tic totsl numb€r of EEosurEEeDtE Eade sinoe

&a recciva strrt d loggirg datlto the c|rl!.r filc,
If the s€ssi@ us€d too E try 8atelliter to dirplay iD ooe sct€cD, ftc
rcrivcr displays additiout scEeD! i! thc saEc fortDrr as thc slcold
one.
To urc- Ihc softtcy! .rp:

. PREV: cyclc bekxr[d though the scrc€o!.
MORE: Clclc iorwad tlNugh lte scr!er!.
SETUP SURVEY OONTROLS

Thir $crl.n l.ts yqr viev .Dd !€t E gltup of p€rMr8 lhat aftct
the w.y a qEictrtut statiq Fal6tatiq or Lii.fl,tic surv.y ir
le(ftfim.d"
To dirpt y, Flom the Lg Ddro Dcrrr 8elec{ SEIrP S{rRVEf
coNIT.oLs. Thc llscivcf, display. . nrnu sirDile to ffir @c:
Plcss lhs rpprcprie roffLry to sdcct the goup of surv.y cotrttols

y(,r *tnt to act up:
1go Sod€s i(XX, Rocoitor FHelrrEo

The Log Dala Screens 8
KIHEI'ICTIC COHTROLS i
STORE POSITIONI HOBflELLC i'HAN6E
ELEUFTI0II l'lASKl+!5' 141N SUEr A4 IIINUS
I'IEAS SVNC TII,!Ei AI5.O SEC IECCEPT
To read! quickstatt coDlrols. The lines on the screen show:

L QUICKSTART CoNTRoLS: Fixed texr.
2. STORE POSITION: The rnode of logging data. Possible values
are described in "Setting Special Controls Values" on page 158.
3. ELEVATION MASK and MIN Svsr The elevation mask to use

for a quickstart session, and the minimum number of healthy
satcllites that must be available above the elevation mask.
4. MEAS SYNC TIME: The interval at which the rcceiver logs
satellite measur€ments.
To read: Faststatic cotrlrols (onl! vrith on dual-frequencj receivers
n ith the Cariet Phase Opri.rrr). The lines on the screen show:
I . FAST STATIC SURVEY: Fixed Iext.

ELv MASK: The elevation mask to use for Faststatic su eys.
2-3. svs... MIN: Each column shows the minimum measurement

time with continuous tracking that the receiver will need to
complete an observation with a specified number of SVs. For
example, the screen above shows that the receiver will require
20 minutes with 4 SVs, 15 minutes with 5 SVs, or E rfnutes
with 6 SVs.
4. MEAS SYNC TIME: The interval at which to log
measurements.
To rcrd: Klnematlc controb. The lines od the scneen show:
1. KINEMATIC CONIROLS: Fixed text.
S6des 4000 Receiver Roference 191

8 The Log Data Screons
2. STORE POSITION: The mode of logging data. Possible values

are described in 'Setting Special ConEols Values" on page 158.
3. ELEVATION MASK and MIN SVs: The elevation mask to use

for a kinematic su*ey, and the minimum number of healthy
satellites that must be available above the elevation mask.
4. MEAS SYNC TIME: The inte al at which to log data.
To us€. The softkeys are:

. CHANGE: Cycle the STORE tOSmoN parametcr through its
possible values.
. PLUS^VIINUS: Visible only when the cursor is in thc elevation
mask field: toggles the sign ofthe elevation mask between'+'
and '-'.
. ACCEPT: Accept the parameter values shown and retum to the
Lg Data rnenlu.
Performing Other Receiver Operations During a Session

Most of the recciver's functions work the same way when it is
running a static sl]l]ley or other data loSging session as lvhen it is in
positioning modc (not logging data). There are a few exceptions.
DuriDg a session:
. The lsraruSlkey displays the data logging status scleen instead
of the positioning mode status screen. If you press the ltiEIa-l
key enough times to rise to thc top of the screen hierarchy, you
will also see the data logging status screcn instead of Lhe
positioning status screen.
. The ll6pa'6lkey displays the sUR\aEY screen instead of the
leg Data fienn. (Sec "Controlling a Session," below.)
192 S6dos 40m Receiver Reference

The log OatE Screens 8
. The lSEsSdNSl key is locked out, and the conrrol menu's

LOCGED DATA FILES item is locked out to prctect fil€s from
accidental change.
The data rnay be compromised if you change most Control
parameters while logging data. The only Canrro, paraficters it is
safe to change arc the sntenna parameteG described in "Enler
A[tenna Information" on page l7l.
Controlllng a Sesslon
The rcceiver can display several scr€ens that let you contrcl imd stop
surveys of various types.
Static Surveys: Th6 SURVEY Scr€en

This screen lets you stop a static survey, enter supplementary &ta,
and change the data file name and antenna information paErneters.
To dlsplay. Wlile a static survey is ruoning, the ftoc olrllkey

displays this screen.
SI,RIJEV! IUSER ITPUT

! cHot{GEs
IEXD SURUE9
To u5e. The soflkeys are:

. USER IMUT: Displsys a screen tlat lets you enter
supplcmentary data about a session. This &ta is logged along
with the session's rncasurEment data and/or position fixes.
. CHANGES: Displays a scrEen that lets you vicw and change the
data file name and anten[a pafiuneteE.
S€de6 40m Receivor Referorrco 193

8 The Lqg Data Screens
. ENID SURVEY: Ends the session. If the autc.survey timer is

enabled, lhis cancels the timer (and with it, any sessions
scheduled to be run).
Faststatlc Surveys
While a Faststatic survey is rundng, the receiver displays the
Faststatrc survey main scrEen:
FESY STNTICT COLLECTING DFTfiI : TIOUE

I ABORT
r'lAcK. rD: FLDEB961 .5.9q5. r IHPUT/CHICS
,T'I. PRESS EOUE BEFORE I,IOUIr|6 I EHD SUCUEV
To read. The lines of the display showi

l. The survey's curent status:
- CoLLECIINC DATA: The receiver is conducting an

observation.
- SUmCIENT DATA: The receiver is conducting an

observation, but has collected enough data lo make the
observation valid-
3. The Elark ID of the mark being obsewed (which you must enter
during the observation) and the number of satellites being
uacked.
4. TIME REMAINING: During an incomplete observation, shows
the predicted time remaining to colle.t sufficient data. A
message like "TIME REMAINING: NEED 5 Svs" indicates that
the obsenation has been suspended due to insufficient available
satellites.
At othcr times, this line shows a soolling message that tells

you what to do next.
'104 Sedes .looo Beceiver Refererrco

The Log Oata Screens I
Mo\E or STATIC: Shifts the receiver's mode. MOVE is

available when the receiver is rnaking an obse ation, and has
collected sufficient data. STATIC is available when the receiver
is in Move mode (after you press MOVE).
ABORT: Aborts the curent observation; displays a menu tiat

lets you specify the disposition of the abortEd obseNatioD.
INPLn/CHNGS: Dsplays a menu that lets you enter

supplementary data and change survey pammeters.
END SURVEY: Ends the survey.
Kinematic Surv€ys
while a kinematic survey is running, the receiver displays the
kinematic survey rnain scrcen:
i.. HB0Ri ..
i rHPuf/cHHEs
I..EHD SUEUEV
To read. The lines on the scrcen arc:

l. Shows the fixed text KINI,MA.-TIC MODE, followed by the
kinematic suveying procedure's curent status:
ROVING: In Rove mode; the receiver is ready to move.
STATIC WAIT: ln Sraric mode; the receiver is collecting

data.
STATIC: In Sr4ric mode: the receiver i6 collecting data, but

has collected enough to eNure a valid observation. Press
the RovE softkey to go to.lRov? mode before moving the
artenna.
Series 4O0O Rec€ivBr Ref6rsnce 195

I The Log Data Sore€ns
2. The fixed text NOT LOGGINC indicates that the rcceiver is

acquiring satellites ard calibrating itself. This process rcquiEs a
few s€conds at rlre beginning of each survey.
For the rest of the suneying session, this line shows the number
of observations that have been made in this survey atrd tbe
number of satelliles being tracked.
3. The point ID of the mark cullently or most rEcently occuPied.
4. Midmum number of satellites required for data collection, and

Dumber of epochs of data collected.
Ifthe receiver was unable to rnainrain its lock on the minimum

rcqui€d number of satelliGs, this line shows the message
RETURN TO A PREVIOUS MARI(
To use. The soffkeys aIr:

. ROVE or STATIC: Shifts the receivels mode. ROVE is available
when the rcceiver is making an observation, and has collected
sufficient da@. STATIC is available when the rEceiver is in
Rare mode (after you press ROVE).
. ABoRT: Aborts the curent observado( places the receiver in
.ltov€ mode.
. INPUT/CHNGS: Displays a menu that lets you enter
supplementrry dara ard change survey pammeters.
. END SURVEY: Ends the survey.
USER INPUT: Enter Not€s and Evont irarks

To ilisplsy. mile a static survey or non-sur"rey data logging session
is underway, press (@ to display the SUR\EY screen. Then
select USER INPIIf.
196 Sorios ,l0OO Rgceiwr tl€fereic€

The log Aah Screens 8
You can also display this screen while starting a static survey (see
"Step 4: Start the Session," on page 174); ftom the "start the
Session" screen select USER INPUT.
To display this screen $,/hile running a Faststatic or kircmatic

survey, s€lect INPLrT/CHNGS: from the resulting menu, select USER
INPUT.
SURUEY ,INPUTg'

. MARK EVENT NOW: Irgs a serial-numbered, time-starnped
event mark.
The rcceiver displays a scrcen that says NEW EVENT MARK
ENTERED and shows the event rurk's selial number. Pless the
laagA:n-lkey to rctum to the USER INPUT menu.
The effect is the same as that of an event pulse on the AUX or

EVENT MARKER port. (See "Event Ma*ers," on page 131.)
. EVENT MARK COMMENTS: Irts you enter or edrt an
alphanumeric note associated with an event mark. Sce the
description below.
. FIELD NOTES: L€ts you enter up to tirce lines of field notes
concenfng the session or survey as a whole. See the description
below,
. SURFACE MET DATA: Lets you e[ter values describing surface
metcorological conditions at the time and location of the
session or survey. sec tie description below.
S€de6 4000 Recolver Relerence 197

I The Log oala scroens
EVENT UABK C,O{I'[ E]{TS
This sctren lct6 you entd ard dit a trote associrted lrith an event
E rL It applicsboth to cvetrt Darks ente.ed from the usER INPUT
rEnu and cvcnt mrr*s ente(Ed by a puls€ on the AUX or EVENT
MARXER port-
To display. From the USER INPT T mcDu, rlect EVENT MARX
COMMENTS. The rEcciver displays tbe first oftbese sotens:
To resd. The fust sorern l€t! you Bclcct .n cvent by ID, The secoad
trrts you vie* atrd edit the lelecEd cveftr8 codltnrEt6.
To usG. The sofrlcys rc:

. NEXT ID or PREV ID: Displays the noxt or pt9vious cyc
mark's ID.
. AILPHA.iNUMERIC: Togglci the kcypad b€twe€tr .lph.ND€ric
ntode 8!d nurrerio modo, Tlis softkry has tie saDc cffec't as
thc lEFrln ksy.
. ACCEPT: Accepti the coEEeDt as trow displayed otr thc s.n en.
The rcciver retums to thc USER INPUT Eenu.
Select thc evcnt Inatk you want to .dit by prrssiDg lho NE m D tr

PREV ID key, or enter its mber with the nuDc'.al kcys, Then Fqss
lREa-I TIE r€ceiv€r displays the sccoid s6r!.tr shown .bove. Eotcr
or edit tbe notE; thetr prrssEE)or ACCEPT.
1SA Sorios ,(,(x, R€c€fusr Reftr6noe

Th€ Lqg Dala Screons 8
FIELD NOTES
This scrcen lets you enter notes associated with the curen! session
or survey as a whole.
To display. From the USER INPUT menu, select F]ELD NOTES.

. ALPIIA/NUMERIC: Toggles the keypad between alphanumeric
mode and nuderic mode. Equivalent to tbe lmEl key.
. ACCEI,T: Accepts the note as now displayed on the scrcen. The
receiver retums to the USER INPUT rnenu.
Ente! the note; then press IEEB-I or ACCEPT.

Eacb time you display the FIELD NOTES screen it prcmpts you to
enter a new note. Thus you clm enter ary numbr of notes for a
session or survey, but oDce you have entered a note you cannot
change it or delete it on the receiver.
SURFACE MET DATA

This screen lets you enter information about surface meteorological
conditions at the time alld place of the session or survey. This
information is for your use only; it is not used in calculations.
To ilisplay. From the USER INPUf menu, select SURFACE MET
DATA.
Se es 4000 R€ceiver Referonce 199

I The Log Dala Screens
SURFfiCE I4ET DFTf,'

TEt'tP! (oEY)+82A.6 (tdET)+689.S'C LIHITg
PRES: 1813 mi I Iibtsrs
RH: 5E Z LIEflTHER CODE: 99999

1. SURFACE MET DATA: Fixed tcxt.
2. Dry and wet tempemtures.

3. Atmospheric pressue.
4. Relative humidity and NOS standard weather code.
. uNrTs: Toggles the display between metric units (tcmperatures
in Celsius, pressure in millibars) and English units
(temperatucs in FahrenlEit, prcssure in inches of mercury).
Enter appropriate values in each field. To lcave the screen, prcss
EfiiEA until the cursor is at the last field, then prcss IEfrER]once
more.
You can change the siSn of the wet or dry temperature by placing the
cunor at the sigl and pressing the @ key (for'1ninus") or the @
key (for "plus"). Note that this is different from most other signed
fields, which expect you to press a PLUS/MINUS $fikey.
CHANGES
This screen lets you enter or change the antenna informatron
parunete$ and the name of the cuient data file.
To display: For a qulckstart or preplsnned (saatic) sessio[.
Beforc you have started the session, select CHANGES from the "Start
the Session" screen. (See "Step 4: Stan The Session," on page 174.)
Aftcr you have started the session, press IIGDATAIto display the
SURVEY screen. Then select CHANGES.
200 Series 4000 Rec€iver Beference

The Log Oala Screens I
To display! For a Faststatic or kinemrtic survey. Select

INPUT/CHNGS; from the resulting menu, select USER INPUT.
SURIEY CHNHGESI ANTEHNE HEIBHT

FILE NF}IE

. ANIENNA HEIGTIT: Displays a screen that lets you change the
antenna height and othcr antenna inforiration. See the
description below.
. FILE NAME: Displays a screen that lets you change the name of
the dala file. See the descripdon below.
AI.ITENNA HEIGHT
This screen lets you change a session's antenna information

pammeters while data is being lo8gcd.
To display. while data is being logSed, press lG-Iiilto display

the SURVEY scrcen. Then select CHANGES, then ANTENNA HEIGm.
PNT I{EIGHTI A896. A886 INCHES UHITS

I,IES6 TVFE! UNCORRECTED ' . NEXT
OHT TVPE! EXTERHf,L ( U$K}IOIJH } IIEET
PNT SERIAL! BAAABB CCNEPT .
To read and use. See "Enter Antenna Information," on page 171.

The screcn described there is identical to this one.
FILE NAME
This scrcen lets you charge the name of the file being used to Iog
data. It renames the file without disturbing its contents.
Sodes zO00 Receiver Boference 201

8 The Log Dala Scresns
To dlsptay. while data is being logged, press lioc SArA]to display

the STIRVEY screen. Select CHANGES; then select FILE NAME.
CHFHGE SURUEV FILE NETE! f,LPHR

oLD! 8492-lX7-9
flEU. A,+92-137-g
FCCEPT
To read. OLD shows the file's current name. NEw initially contains
the same name.
. ALPHA/NUMERIC: Toggles the keypad betwecn alphanumenc
mode and nurneric mode. Equivalent to the IIIFFAI key.
. ACCEPI: Accepts the new file name as displayed, and retum to
thc CHANGES menu. Equivalent to the lEiiEFlkey.
Edit the NEw field with the keypad, then prcss lEiffil or ACCEgf.
To discard any changes you have made, press IefaAE.
END SURVEY
This sclection ends the current surveying session. If the auto-survey
timer is enabled, it also disables the timer.
To display: strtic survey.Ifthe receiver is in sleep mode, press the
IEWEF-Ikey to wake it up: ther press the CANCEL softkey to retum
to the original survey selection menu.
Press the [iG1Iiril key to display the slrRVEY sqeen, then select
END SIJ'RVEY.
To display: fasEtatic or kirematic survey. From the survey
sratus screen, selcct END SURVEY.
ln either case, the receiver displays a sclcen like this one:
202 Sedes zlO0O Beceiver Befersnce

The toE aarr Scr€6,rs 8
To I!c. Sclcct YES. Thc rcceivcr stopc troSgiDg d.t&

If you hsvc Dot y€t aDtr[Ed atrteDru l,liaEetars; thc rcccivar aow
tr lorDpts
you to do so:
Eater u
apprrcpriatc vdno in eh
ficl4 rh.o F..s! thc @)k
yG
rhc ACCEPT softLoy. (Fo. (baik, scc "EDEr ADt oDt Inforlt sdoD,"
oopagc 171.)
Thr r..civ€r retums to tie pociti@irg Eodr's Eain Sr4a.J sac€o.
Abortlng an Obsorvatlon
Y.E c.n ibGt e Flsstatic r LiFnrric obsqvaiiou by p(tssiig thc
ABORT 5ofi*ry fiorn tlo rurvcy st{it8 lcr€eo-
This s€dio &{cribc6 thc Fartstltic ABORT 3c!e.o. fhc Ermatic
ptoccdttc h,r Do AB(XT scr!€o; thc ABORT sofftey siEply rbol!
an obc€svafio rDd phces th! lcccivcr i! Iora Dode.
To dll,fry (Hlfficprocttf[lc on Ft@ thc F.56'tatic rtdts

s.r,e.o' F!$ rt! ABORT rofrtey. Thc rcceivcr dilphy6 a scr!.o
siEilrr to this orc:
s6deo 4000 R€ccivor RsrgrBrrce 2G'

8 Tho Log Darr Scl€ons
Press one of the softkeys:

. DATA BAD flags the data as suspcct and incrEments thc mark
ID. This is the appropriatc choice if the antcnna has b€en
disturbed.
. DATA OK flsgs the data as paocessable and inqements the
mark ID. This is an apprcpriate choice only if the MOVE
softkey has not yet appeired and the antenna has not been
nroved,
. REOBSERVE MARK is equivalenr to DATA BAD, bur d@s ltot
incremellt the mark ID. If you accidentally gess REOBSERVE
MAR( instead of DATA BAD, you should incrrmeDt thc marl
ID rnanually.
. CANCEL ABORT rcdisplays thc main Faststatic screen and
allows the obsfrvation to continuc undisturbed.
An observatio[ is also aborted if you press the END SURVEY
softkey before sufficicnt data is collected for a valid observation
(before lhe MOVE loftkcy has appe!rcd). This is equivalent to
pr€ssiDg DATA OK, exccpt that it ends the survey as well as aborting
thc obseryatioD.
How the Rocelver Names Data Fllos

When the rccciver c[latcs a data file it assigns the file an eight-
chamcter name in thc folm srrx-arrd. An ciarnplc of a data filc
dame is 0m5-137-0.
For a prEplanncd static su8cy, thc pans of the nade arE:

. The four-cha.raater stotion ID ofthc station wherE the survey is
being performed.
. The dEec-chaiacter s€ssion ID of6e session for which the
survey is being pcrfoErEd.
N Serie€ /l()fi) Receivor Rofolerrce

The Log Data Screens I
. A one-character numeric sequence number.

For any other type of survey, the parts of the narne are:
. The last four digits of the receiver's serial number.
. The Julian date on which the survey was staned.
. The one-digit sequence number.
To rename the curent &ta file. Display the CHANGES menu and
seleci FILE NAME. (Sec "Changes" on page 200.)
lnterruptions in Data Logging, and Recovery

If the receiver's power fails during a survey or session, data logged
before the power failure is preserved in the data file. The fiIe rccords
the fact that the session was ended by a power failure.
Data loggihg also is interrupted when the receiver's memory is filled,

or whcn any condition occurs that reduces the number of availablc
satellites below rhc minimum requircd by the procedure being used
and the receiver's parameter settings.
The rcceiver always retums to the state it was in when the failure
occurred: static (collecting data) or moving (waiting for the user io
press START). The best continuous measurement infomation is
retained. If the receiver was in a "ready to move" static state when
power failed (that is, if it had collected sufficient alata for a valid
observation), then it will still bc 'teady to move" when power is
restorcd.
Data logging will resume when the condition that caused the
interruption is corrected: that is, when power is rcapplied, fiee
memory becomes ava.ilable, or the required number of satellites
becomes available.
When the rcceiver resumes an intenuptcd survey, it creates a now
data file with the same name as tle onginal one. whcn you
Sedes 4O0O Beceiver Roference 205

8 Tho Log lraaa ScEsns
dovnlood the data files, you Eust coEbine lhedr d give them
distinct DOS frle namcs. Usc the COPY colnorDd with the /B
(bimry) optioa; see your DOS uscfu Emual f@ dct!i16.
Recovoryr Auto€unroy Tlmer Not Enabled

To Iertafl thc suwey or sqssiotr:
l. RestoE pover to the rcc€iver.

2. After the receive! coEplctes its powcr-up t!st, the survey
Gstarts .utomatically. The rccrivcr display! 0ris BcrEen:
3. Prers ey key to display the stairs sclrctr.
DataftoE the rcst fted sEssioir ir logged to a file with the same
ns@ as thc odgiDat file. CIhe r.eiver, unlite most computcrs,
dlows duplicrfe frL naEr.)
Rscoycry: Auto€urvey Tlmor Enabled

10 rcstart the survey o( 6essioD:
l. Restotr pover to the rcceiver.
2. After the receivcr cmpLtcs its pover-up test, the session
Iest.rts autofitlically. Thc leceivfi dispbyi thia scr€.n:
206 S6ri€6 /mm Hecoiver Relaronce

The Lqg Aara Scr€€ns
Wheo t&c couutdowa reachas zerlo, ihe seBBior i! r€atartrd. D a

is loggcd to . n \r, filc with the sarE !!trE as the orighal fih.
Cfhe filca Ely be distinguirhed by thck sta ti@s.)
Whco Tlirrble's softw,Ip downloads the drta files to a
coEput€r, it tcnaEas tfte 8coold frl€ to avoid a nadring colrflicL
The frlcs shold bc rnergcd .fter thc dowDload is c@plet!"
Sgds ,(,0() Roc€i,Br RdolgrEe N7

Features and Accessories
Factory Oefault S€ttlngs

Tablc A-l lists the Se.i6 ,1000 factory default psr.rtret r s€Ei[gs.
Notr that so@ of drcsa paraDeErs do not erist on particulrr
Eodel6, dcpcdirg otr what optioD6 arr iustallcd. The table shows
which pararrlcters arr dlpendrnt on options.
Sader.{{rO0 R€coivsr F€lelence ,00

A Features and Accessories
Table A-l Faclory Default Parameler Settlngg
r' Pourer-Up Paramet€r

:F Resets al power up regardl€s6 ol pow€r'up mode
Sc16.n Dolaull Value
PRINT/PLOT ON POBT I
Corrfo, acraana
NTCMN 04 OUTPUT ENABLE
Bequlres RTCM-104 STATION ID 0000

Output Oplion. Vercion 1.0
PBINTOUT
CTS->XMT DELAY 0.0 seconds
TYPE IO MESSAGES
CABBIAGE FETUFTN ON
BTCM BIT SATE oFF (use serial Port's baud

rat6)
MESSAGE SCHEDULE
BTCMN04INPUT BTCM.l04INPUTS
Requires RTCM-I04 PORI SELECT

lnput Option.
ASCN PBTNTOUT
BEEPEFI
STATON SELECT
AqE LMIT 1m soconds

POWEB-UP CONIBOL DO NOT DEFAULT CONIBOLS AT
210 Seriog 4000 RecEiv€l Releronce

Featur66 and Accessories A
Table A-l Factory Oelault Parameter Settlngs (conrhusd,
Powgr-Up Paramet€r
*" Beset at power up r€gardl€ss ot pow€r-up mod6
Scre€n Paramatar ilemc Der.ult Value

Cortro, acra€na (conllnued)
SV ENABLEDISABIE List of svs in 6ach All SVs enabled in IGNoBE
mode HEALTH (POSITIONING) MOdE
ADJUST L@AI TIME TIME OFFSET 0:00

TIME ZONE IDENTIFIEB 9MT
BAUO FATE/FORMAT BAI]O BATE 9600
a data bits, padty odd, r $op
bit-
CTS CONIROL DISABLE

(ports2&4only)
FEMOTE PROTOCOL Bemote inl€fac€ DATA COLLECTOB COMPATIBTE
FIEFEFENCE POSITION LAT, ION, IIGI Allzero

MASKSEYNCNME ELEVATION MASK 1C
7.O
SVSYNCTIME 1.0 a€cond
POSIT|o ING MODES Type of solulion WEIGHTEO SOLUTION ENABLED
lonosphedc Mod6l Ll loNo
P6ition fix mode LAT,ION OB LAT/LON/HEIGHT
RTK OUIPUT @NIBOL BTK OUTPUTS
Requlres RTK Funclions BASE-L1
Opnon. SIATION
Sedes 4000 Receiver R€ference 211

A Features and Accossories
Table A-1 Factory Oefault Parameter Settings (coatirrued)
Po$/er-Up Parametor
R6set at power up r6gadless of pow6Fup mode
Scre6n PaEnEler l{ans Dstault Valuc
Contror acr€an6 (continuad)
BTK FOVEB CONIBOL ENABLE

Raquircs RTK
Funclions Option-
POWEN C,ONTBOL Chargor/power oulpul CHAFGEFAPWA OUTPUT
Ponable rcceiverc only. DISABLED
4O1oSE Land SuMeyot (Standard or Compact)

ohly.
L1/L2 TRACKING L1 TBACKING P-@OE

Reguircs Ctoss. T2 TBACKING P{OOE
Conelation Oplion ot
Super-tak technoloqy.
NMEAN63 OUTPUT ENABLE
ALM, BWC, GGA, 6tC. All message types: oFF

CYCLE PRINTOUrc FoFMAT (tor pdntouts Ascn lor pdntoui6 that have
wilh more than on€ ASCII a6 an optlon; othorwise
format) BINARY,
ENABLE
'l-imebas€ control INTEFNAL
IM'EXTTIMEBASE
Raqui@s Enemal
Frcquency ln$ Optbn.
1 PPS OUTPUT DISAELEO
Requires I PPS Oplion- SLOPE
ASCIITIMETAGS NONE
212 Seies 4000 Receiver Reierence

Features and Accessories A
Tablo A.l Factory Eaqlt Parameigr S€ttlngs (corrrrugd,,
r' Power-Up Paramoler

* Bes6t at power up regadless ol power'up mode
Scleon D€lault Vrlu.

Corrtror acruen3 (contlnued)
EVENI MARKEBS EV-ENT MAFKEBS ENABLED
SLOPE NEGATIVE
EVENT BEEP OISABLED
Uodllys,ct.rf'6
VIEW ANGLE Viewing angle Csnter posillon
BACKLIGHT ARtGHTNESS
TIMEOUT
notb
UNITSOFMEASUBE LAT ANd LON Dggre€s and minut€s .

Antonna hoight units INCHES
TIME uTc (Univ€rsalTimg

coordinated)
BEEPEB VOLUME KEYPBESS BEEP 20% of maximum ('l bar)
CYCLE BEEP
ALTITUDE REFERENCE Coordinate syst€m ELLIPSOIO
RETUFN TO MABK 3 bal!
INTEGBITY AIARMS HORIZOMTAL
Series 4000 Roc_eiver Ralerence 213

A Features and Acc6ssories
Table A-1 Factory Oclault Paramgter Setting8 (cont rr.red,
r' Power-lJp Parameter

,< Beset at power up regadless of powot-up mode
Screen Param€tor Namo Default V.lue
,rodiY acr6.m (coriinu.d)

i,IODEM SETI]P Enableddisabl€d DISABLED
Mod€m s€tup sl ng
S.3sroa,3 3cl!rn3
SPECIAL CONTROLS POSITION LOGGED NORMALLY
Reeuies Memory OVERDETERMINE EMBLE

Optioa. LOG SMOOTH PB DISABLE
POSITIONTYPE 3D/2D
HEIGHT SOURCE AUTO

Log Dlt scre€.r3
SETUP SURVEY @NTFOLS STORE POSITION NORMAI.IY
Req,irires Menory ELEVATION MASK All types olcurveys: 15'
OpUon. Quickstan 6urveysr 3

Faststalic auN€ys: 4
Kinematic surveys:4
MEAS SYNC TIME Alltypes ot suw6y5:
ENABI.E AUTOSUBVEY AUTO.SUBVEY

MODE IS
RESULTS FROM PREVIOUS List oI avaalable resulb All results are deloted.
214 Series l()0O Becoiver B€ference

Features and A@essories A
Beceiver Options
This section describes options that Series 4000 models may have.
The availability of options varies from model to model. Thus, some
options may be standard features on your rcceiveri othen may not bc
available at all. Your rcceiver's Urer GuZe states which featues are
standard features, which are tluly optional, and which a.te not
available-
Slgnal Preproces3ing Optlons

These options affect thc types of information that a receiver can
extract ftom satellite signals.
All rcceivers are capable of hacking C/A code on Ll; thcrcfor€ this
capability is not considered an option.
l?-ChatrDel Opfiotr. Enables a receiver to track twclve satellites
insteadofthe standard nine.
Dual-Frequency Opdon. Bnables a receiver to traak both the Ll
aDd f2 carriers. A rcc€iver without this option can Eack only the Lt
carrier, and so cannot comtrrnsate for the effects of ionosphedc
propagation delay.
A re.eiver with the Dual-Frequency Option can conduct Faltstatic

surveys and dual-ftequency statrc suveys. These techniques offer
' better range and precision than the single-frequency altematives by
compensating for ionospheric effects.
This option is unusual in that it is not truly optional on any curent
model. Each model either hds dual-frequency capability as a
standard feature, or does not support it at all.
Tha res, of the signal preprocestinS optio s are avoilable only if the
Dual - F r.quency Option is installed.
S€rie6 4000 Receiver Referonc€ 215

L2 P-Code Option. Enables a receiver to mcasure satcllite mnge

from thc offset between the L2 P-code received from the satellite alld
a replica that thc rcceiver generates intemally. This option is
generally accompanied by the Canier Phase Option, which may bc
used as a fallback technique when Anti-Spoofing is active.
LUL2 P-Code Optiotr, Similar to the L2 P-Code Option, but can

measurc P-code on both the Ll and L2 channels, increasing range
and precision.
Carrler Phase Option. Enables a receivff to me.lsure satelli(e tange

by observing (among other things) the phase differcnce between fie
Ll and L2 carriers. This option is less precise than the L2 P-Codc
Option, but it is not affectcd by Anti-Spoofing. It may be used as a
less sophisticated altemative to thc L2 P-Code Option, or as a
fallback when Anti-Spoofing is active.
Cros!-Correlation Option. Enables a receiver to compensate for the
effects of ionospheric delay by measuring the offset belween the L1
and L2 P-codc signals. This technique improves the precision of all
measurcments. It is not \,'lllnemble to Anti-Spoofing, since the
depends only on ihe offset between two P-code signals transmitted
by a satellite, and those are identical whether they are encrypted or
not.
Hslf-Wave L2 Option. A techdquc for conectirg ionospheric
delay enols without the use of P-code; replaced in reccnt dual-
frequency receivers by thc more accuratc Crcss-Correlation Option.
Super-trak OptioE. Super-trak enables acquiring low power

satellite signals, maintaining bettcr lock on signals once acquired
and Eacking under conditions of high RF interference. Super-trak is
a mmbination of hardware and firmwarc technology, including truc
multibit signal processing. Perforrnance tests show significantly
improved janrming irununity over lesser equipped reccivers-
Another system benefit is measuremeDt of the L2 rangc during
216 Sedes 4000 Receiver Beterence

Fealures and Accessorios A
P-code cncryption. Receivers with the SSi designation use Super-

trak technology.
Memory Option
The Memory Option provides battery-backed memory in which a
receiver can log satellite measurements, position fixes, and related
data. Such data can later be downloaded to a computer for
Postprocessins.
Receivers that lack this option cannot perform any of the surveying
procedures that rcquire data logging. They can only compute
position fixes in real time, and output satellite measurements and
position fixes in real time to bc captured by a computer.
Each Series 4000 model actually accepts a number of memory
options with diffcrent adounts of memory. When other factors
rcmain constant, more memory allows a receiv$ to log &ta for a
longer period of time before downloading it. Most receivers can be
cquippcd with only one Memory Option, although you can upgrade
a receiver by replacing a smaller Mcmory Option with a Iarger one.
lnpuUOutput Options
These options affect the types of electronic connections you can use
to move data into and out of a teceiver,
Two Serial Port Option. Provides two serial (RS-232) ports. Each
pon may be used for a variety of purposes, such as: oulputting one_
shot ptiDtouts and cycle printouts; inputting and outputting
RTCM-104 corections; outputlilg NMEA-o183 messages;
uploading lo88ed data: controlling the receiver from a computer or
other extemal device; controlling an extemal device such as a
NAV BEACON XL ftom the receiver; and downloading firmwarc
updates to the receiver. In many cases a single port rnay be used to
S6des 4000 Receiver Relerence 217

input onc kind of data and output another, making thc ports even
more useful.
Four Serial Port Option. Provides four serial (RS-232) ports.
RTCM-104Input Option. Enables a receiver to serve as a DGPS
differential station (a rover) by inputting RTCM-104 corrections
through a serial pon from a digital radio receiver.
RTCM.104 Output Optlon. Enables a receivcr to function as a
DGPS reference station (a basc station) by outputting RTCM-104
corrections through a sedal port to a digital radio tnnsmitter.
NMDA-0183 Output Option. Enables a receiver to output sevcral
types of NMEA-o I 83 messages thrcugh a serial pon. Other devices
can use these messages for navigation and similar functions. This
option is used primarily in marine applications.
I PPs Output Option. Provides a port through which the rcceiver
can ouhut a very precise one pulse/second strobe, based on timing
information in the satellite signals. Other devices can use this strobe
as a timing signal.
Event Marker Input Option. Enables a receiver to log a time-

stamped rccord whenever an event (an electdcal pulse) is detected on
a special connector. You can rccord alphanumcric messages
associatcd with panicular events; you can also gencrate events from
the receiver's keypad.
Extemal Frequency Input Option, Enables a receiver to substitute

a very precise extemal oscillator, such as ar atomic clock, for its
intemal quanz-crystal oscillator.
Other Options
Kinematic Functions Option. Enables a receivcr to perform
kinematic surveys.
218 Series 4000 Receivor Reforence

Feature€ and Accesgo.i€s A
RTK Furc{ioDs Op6on. Enables a receivcr to perform RTK (Rcal-

Time KinerDatic) surveys.
N.vlgrtioE P.ckrge Opdor. Provides an extended set of
navigation functions, includirg a cross-track cror display and the
abitty to define and usc up to 99 waypoints.
QA.TQC Optio[ Enablo r r€ccivcr to cotopute thc probable crror
("sigma") in its rc.I-tirnc l,osition fixes.
ReDot Dowtrlo.d Opdo!. Enablca a comput r equipped with a
rnodem to download data filcs from an unattendcd rccciver.
Oata and Power Connectlons

Scrics,l0m rrceivaas have two difleltnt rcar panels. Porrable
tEcciv€rs us€ thc patEl shosn ia FiguE A-1. Rack-rnounted
recrivers us€ the parcl shown in Figut! A-2.
All of the connectors arE describcd in Table A-2.
a@r
Flgurt A-1 Portabb Rolvlr Ror Pfid
Sed€a i()Oo R€c€iver Rsterencg 2r9

A F€a 16 end Accossorb€
rE!!F .E4r. {iilar JtiiF

D
b
-,,#* @@@'e
xE #
FlguD Ai Frck-[o.rntld R€cohrgr Ror Prnel
m g€d€s ,()(l0 R€celver Rgr€renc€

Features and Accossories A
Table A-2 Connectors on ihe Bear Panel
Poaabb Rack-Mountsd
Receiva16 Funclion
Ac powet inptttt 1ool12ol2o/24o volts at 47-63 Hz.

Ssialpon 1.
Power polt 1; 10.75-35 voc input or 12 voc output.

uo2 Serialport 2 (if Two or FourSerial Pon Option is
inslalled).
Power oulput with direct connoction to power lines on
S6 d pon 3 (il Four Serial Pon Option is installed).

Pow€rporls 2 &3i 10.75-35 vDc input or 12 voc
output on €ach port.
S6rialport4 (if Four Serial Port Option is installed).

Ev€nt ma*er input (il Ev6nt Marker lnpur Option ts
install€d).
1 puls€/socond output (il1 pps Option is install6d).

l2VDC IN 11 to 35 VOC pow€r input.
S€rial ports 1 & 2 (i, Two S€rial Pod Option is

installed).
Sedalports 3 & 4 (if Four Serial Port Oplion is

installed).
EVENT MARKEB Event marksr input (if oplion ls install€d).
1 pulse/s€cond output (if optlon ls install6d).
Aa,ITENNA GPS ANTENNA
Enemaltimebase input (if Extemal Fr€quency lnput

option is installed).
Series rO0O Beceiver Refercnce

A Feafu res and Accessorigs
Power ln
Portable rectiver power. A rcceiver can input power through the
PwR - l/O I and PwR 2&3 connectors. Cable P/N 18939 provides
dual fused power input rhrouSh PWR 2&3. Trimble batteries,
adapters, or other special cables ftay also be used.
TabloA.l Plnout8 ,or PWR - lro I

Pln Functlon
t Powsrl in&out
2 Pow€r 1 grcund
3 Serial UO r data in
4 S6dal l/O 1 signal ground
Serial UO 1 data out
Table A€ Plnoutr lor PWR 2&3
Pln Four-Port Oplion lnat lLd Sion taot lnrall.d

1 Batlsry 2 powsr ln Batlery 2 power in
2 Batr€ry 2 groond Bafiery2&3ground

g sodal [O 3 data lh
4 Sodal UO 3 signal ground Battery 3 power in

5 Sedal l,/ic 3 dala out
A rcceiver Equi.Es a l-ampeE, I t to 35 vDC po$rer supply. The

rcceiver will tum itself off if the voltage dropr below 10.75 VDC.
The power souce ttrust be Foterted by a 3 to s-amper€ load fuse,
2. Seria8 4000 Recelver Referenc€

Feafu rEs and Acc€ssories A
and must be rEgulated to eliminate voltage spikes or voids. It must

be filtered to within thc I 1-35 volt operating raDge: power ftom an
unliltlrEd automobile bancry charger is not ac.eplable.
CAUTION - Th€ recsivg/s OC power Inputs hav€ no

user.servlcrabl€ fuses. Any extemd t)c pow€r supply
must be fusg-prolecled. Ths Trimble equipmont warrarfy
willbevoid6d lfthl6 precaution is not followed.
The DC power cable, P/N I 6474, has two pairs of wircs, one red-
and-black pair and one white-and-black pair. Esch pair can be
connccted to a DC voltlgc source. The rEd and white wircs are
positive leads and the black wircs are ground leads. Onc paia gcs to
the '?WR 2'pan of the PWR 2&3 port, and rhc other to the "PWR 3"
pafi.
Rack-Doorled reccivcr Dower. Rack-mountcd rcceiveB can accept
DC through thc 12 VDC IN connector, or line powcr throuSh fie AC
INPUT conneclor. Power rcquirEm€nts are the same as for the
portable receivcr (above).
Line polver rnust bc lm, W,2m,or24OYAC 47 to63H\

supplied from a groundcd sou&e. To s€lect thc AC voltage level:
l. Disconnect lhc !ow€r.
2. Remove ihc fuse holde/cover adjacent to thc AC INPUT
conn@tot.
3. Remove the selector board from ihe covar.
4, Move the scle.tor board's white selcctor tab to the desired

voltage.
5. Reinshll the boad with rhe tab poiDting outwffd.
6. Oricnt the fusc hold€r plate on the insidc of lhe cover to nufch
rhe voltagc lcvcl,
S€d€a ,1000 Recriver Bef6rerrco 23

A Fealures and Accessories
For 100 and 120-volt opcration, the side of lhe plate with onc
fuse and one jomper wire must face away from the cover. (This
side will face illto the rcceiver when the cover is reinsElled.)
For 220 and 240-volt operation, the side of the platc with two
fuses must face away from the cover.
To change lhe fuse holder plate's orientation, loosen the screw

that fastens the fusc holder to the cover. Remove the fuse
holder, rotate it, and replace it. Tighten the scrcw.
7. Rcplace the firse holder/covcr.
E. Reconnect the powcr.
Ho* lhe r€ceiyer selects a polrer sounoe. If a source of morc than

14.7 VDC (such as an OSM2) is attachcd to any of a recciver's powcr
input connectors, the reccivcr automatically selects that source when
tumed on. lt ordinarily will not change sources while running unless
the selected source drops below 10.75 VDC, but it will switch to the
OSM2 ifonc is pluSged in while battery charging is enabled. (See
'About Batteries" on pagc 226.)
lf a source of morc thao I 4.7 vDc is not available on a power
connector at powcr-up, the receiver selec6 thc lowest-voltage source
available. When that source drops below 10.75 VDC, it
automatically selects the next lowcst souce.
Power Out
Available oDly on port ble (!ot rack-lltounted) recelvers.
Portablc receivers can supply 12 vDc at 0.5 amperc through pons
yO 2 (with the Two or Four Serial Port Option only) or PWR - VO l.
This power output can be used to opcrate a low-power rremote dcvicc
such as a remote display or a radio modem. fie remotc device must
use a soft-start sequencc so that thc initial cu[ent drain is not too
lar8e.
24 Series 40m Beceiver Beforence

Feaiures and Accessories A
To enable power output:

l. Connect PWR 2&3 to a power source.
2. Disconnect PWR - yO I ftom any powe! souice.
3. Connect the rcmote device to VO 2 or PwR - Uo l.

4. Fanr\ the Conttul $el.u, select POWER CONTROL. Prcss the
CHANGE softkey to enable the power output.
5. Tum on the remote device.

Rack-mounted receivers can display the POWER CONTROL screen,
but do not provide power output.
The Oftlcs Support Module 2

Available only otr porhble (trot rack.mounted) receivers.
The Of6ce Support Module 2 (OSM2) performs three functions for a
portable ft.eiver: AC to DC power conversion, battery chargi[g, and
s€rial yO through a DE9S conncctor. The OSM2 accepts power at
all widely used voltages and ftequencies, including lO0,120,220,
and 240 vAC at 50 and 60 Hertz. It has foul slots for charging video
camem battelies aDd a LEMO connector for charging extemal
batteries.
The oSM2's serial output is conDe4trd to selial port I if the oSM2

is plugged inlo PwR - yo l. It is coDnected to serial port 3 if the
Four Serial Polt Option is instaued and the OsM2 is pluSSed into
PWR 2&3.
LEDs indicate the OSM2'S status. The omtrge PwR light indicates
that AC voltage is applied. The orange FAST CHARGE light
indicates that baseries arc being bulk charged. The green FLoAT
CIIARGE light indicates that the battenes are at least 90% charged
and aE being hickle-charged.
S6des 4OOO H6ceiver Rofer€rce 25

A Fealures and Accessoies
About Batteries
Available only on portable receivers (not rack-mounted
receivers).
Trimble produces a variery of batteries for differenr kinds of
applications. The batteries are described in a table of accessories and
spare pafis that appears in lhe User Guide for each model of
receiver. (See the list of tables near the end of the Table of
Contcnts.)
Batteries are sta[dard equipment with certain portable rcceivcrs. See
your receiver's User Grrid" for specifics.
You can use Trimble's OSM2 to recharge batteries. Simply plug a

camcordcr battery into one of the OSM2'S battery slots, or pluS an
extemal battery's standard cable into the OSM2'S 5-pin LEMo
connector.
An cxternal battcry can be bulk-charged to approximately 90% of
capacity in about eight hours. At that point the OSM2'S red FAST
CHARGE LED goes off and the grecn FLOAT CITARGE LED goes on.
The battery may need another eight houls to tdckle-charge up to
100% of capacity. lt is safe to leave the battery plugged in
indefinitely.
When the rcceivcr is connected to the OSM2 through PwR - yo I
port, battenes rnay be rechargcd ftom the receiver's PwR 2&3 pon.
To enable the receiveis battery charging featurc:
I. Conned an OSM2 to PwR - Uo L

2. Connect one or more batteries to PwR 2&3.
3. PowER
Press the ld6NiEor-l key. Frcm the Conrro, menu, select
CoNIROL. Prcss lhe CHANCE softkey to cnable the battery
charging function.
A receiver that is not connected to an OSM2 will not charge
batteries even ifthe baftery charging firncrion is enabled. Ifan
26 Seies 4000 Receiver Retorence

Fealures and Accessorios A
OSM2 is plugged in while the receiver is running and battery

charging is enabled, the receiver *ill s\ritch over to the OSM2 and
begin charging the battery.
Note that rack-mounted rcceivers also display the X)WER

CONTROL scrcen, but do not have the connectors or circuity needed
to charge batteries.
GPS Antennas
The antenna that a receiver uses to collect satellitc signals is
sometimes called a GPS rrrenna to distinguish it fiom a radio
antenna used for communication between receivcrs in procedurEs
such as RTK and DGPS.
CAt flON - The recoivors descdb€d in this manual will

nol operale with lhe oarlier Trimble 40OOA, Ax, SX, or SL
antennas. Also, the newer antennas will b€ damag€d it
used with those oadier re@ivers, or with rsceiveB from
anolh€r manufaclurer.
Contrectiotr to lhe rcaclycr. A porable rcleiver is connected !o its

antenna through the LEMO connector labelcd ANTENNA. A rack-
mounted rcceiver is connccted lhrough the type N connector latreled
GPS ANIENNA. Both use a coarial cable with a tyF N pluS at the
anlenna end.
For antcnna cable lenglhs of 35 feet (10 meters) or less, RG-58 cable
rnay be used. For cable lengrhs over 35 fe.t, RG-213 cable must be
us€d. For cablc lengtls over 100 feet (30 meters), an inJinc
amplifier, semi-rigid coaxial cable, or other lowloss cable assembly
must be us€d. See the table of accessories and spare parts in your
receivels User Guide for specifics.
Sledes 4000 B€ceiver Bef€rence 27

A Feafures and Accessodes
Use and c{rc. The Application Guide destr'ihes the typ€s of

anteillns that may be used with Series 4000 receivers. It explains
which procedurcs each antenna may be used for, a.Dd discusses each
antenna's use and care.
Serlal Pons
Series 4000 receivers have one or two standard se al pons,
depending orl the model They may be upgraded to two aniVor four
serial ports, depending on the hodel. See your model's Uset Guide
for specifics.
On hulti-port receivers, all pofis arc electdcally ideDtical except for
baud rate and flow control. On port I, baud rates r.nge from I l0 to
57,600; on ports 2 through 4, they mnge from 50 to 5?,600. Ports 1
6nd 3 can Fovide XON/XOFF flow conEol only: ports 2 and 4 cari
Fovide either XON/XOFF or CTS/RTS flow contlol.
Portabl€ receiver cornecton. Portable receivers prEsen! port 1 on
ihe PWR - yO 1 cormector, ard port 2 (if available) on LIO 2, Port 3
(if available) is otr PwR 2&3. Port 4 (if available) is on AIIX; some
of the pins on AIlx have differeDt assignments depending on
whether pon 4 is available or not.
Table A-, @ pnge 222, shows pinouts for Pvr'R - VO 1 Table A-,
also on page 222, shows pinou6 for PwR 2&3. Table A-8, on
page 234, sho*s pinouts for AUX. The pinouts for the other serial
poft connectors ate shown bclow.
2A Seies 40m Rec€fuer BeterencE

Feaiures and Aclessodes A
Tlble A€ Plnouis lor lro 2 (Pornbb R.cetrcre Only)
Pin Funcllon
I Sional oround
2 Powor 2 ground
3 Serial l/O 2 data ln
4 S6dal UO 2 RTS
5 S€dal UO 2 CTS
6 Po 6a 2 oot
7 S6dal UO 2 data out
Rack.rountod recelver coDnectors. Rack-mounted receive$

prcsent the serial ports on four dedicaled connectors, DATA yO
PORT I throuSh DATA I/O PORT 4. All four connectors are prrsent
on the rerl panel whethcr or not they arr active. All four cooDectors
&e DE9S'S i, a st idard DCE conliguration.
Tabl. A.6 Plnout! ror DATA UO PORTSI t to 4 (Rack.irounttd

Recalwra Only)
Pin Porta I &3 Pon 2&4

1
2 Data out Dala ou,t

3 Data in Deie ln
4
5 siional qround Slgnalgrcund
a
7 RTS
a cTs
I
S6des 4{XlO Recoivor R6feroic€ 29

A Foalures and Accessodes
Baud Rata, Format, and Flow Control

Each sedal port's baud rate, format, and flow control can be set
independently. Table A-7 shows the combinations that can be set for
each Pon.
To change a pon's format, baud rate, and/or flow contlol:
l. Press the lE6Frn-dll key.
2. From the Control rl|(nu, select BAUD RATETFORMAT.

3. Press the MoRE softkey, if necessary, to display the settings of
the pon you want to change.
4. Select the port number, baud mtc, and format, and type of flow
conuol.
Table A.7 Serlal Pon Param€lers
Porl l Pon 2 Port 3 Port il

Baud Rale 10, 300,600,
't 50, 110,300,600, Same as Same a6
1200,2400,4800, 120o'2400,@, port2 pon2
9600, 19,2m,343m, 9600, 1 9,200, 38,400,
57,600 57,600
Data Foarnat 8,Non€,1 8,Ev6n,1 Any combination ol Sam€ as Same ag

(derr blt5, 8.Odd.1 8,Non6.2 7 or8 dala bits; €vsn, port 2 pon2
Parity, 7,Ev€n,1 7,Odd,1 odd, orno padly; 1 or
rtop bit ) 2 6top bit5
Flow Control XON'(OFF OI NONE xoNr(oFF, cTs/BTs, Sam€ as Same as

'l
OT NONE Port Po(2
230 Series ,rcm R€caivor Reference

Fgafurgs and Actessoias A
Each time a serial port's format is changed (each time a CHANGE

softkey is prEssed), the rcceiver serds a rnessage o[ the affected port,
in the new folmat. The message coosists of 216 charactcrs followed
by a carriage rcom,/line fee4 arld describes the new foroat like this:
BAUD RATE I 19200 ] FORMAT [ 8.NONE 1 ]
XONDaOFF flow coirhol uses the contlol characteB 1 lH GOIO aod

13H (XOm). The extemal device caD send an xoFF to stop the
rcceiver output and an XON to stan thc output again. If XON is not
rEceivld vithin 60 s€conds the rcceiver will rcstart the data flow
automatically.
CTS/RTS flo,/ control uses the CTS/RTS lines as specifred by the
RS-232 standard, That is, the rcceiver, as o DCE device, asscrts CTS
when it is ready to send data.
Data Cablr3
Tdmble produces two data cables to bring out the data lines to DE9
socket connectoN in s DCE configuration. Their descriptions arc
given below.
S6de6 4O(b R€ceiver Hoferonce 81

P/N 18a2A P/N r8&r7
IEIO +pin o€s6 lErlo Trln DEIE
I tvc 1- 5
2 rvc N/C
3- 3 3- 3
4- 5 4- 7
5- 2 5- I
l.l/C
7- 2
Both cables can be connected dirccdy to a computeis RS-232 COM

port i! DTE configuration (tlte standard configuation on IBM PCs
and Pc-compatible computers).
To connect lhesc serial ports to a DCE device such as a modem,

connect a null rEodem cable !o the end of the slandard cable. The
null cable simply swaps the pin positions of the data lines and thc
conEol lines so the one device's '.lrallsmit" Iine, for example, is
attached to the other's 'teceive" line, An examplc pinout is shown
below.
l{ull Modem Cabl.

DEOP DE9P
2- 3
3- 2
5- 5
7- A
8- 7
w. S€ries 4)oo R€ceivor Rofgrerrce

Feafures and Accessodes A
Splll Data Cabl.

A serial port can read and wdte simultaneously. This nakes it
possible to "split" a data cable 60 that a single serial port on the
receiver can simultalleously input data tom one device and output
data to another. For exaluple, port I can simultaneously input
RTCM corections and output position p ntouts.
The following diagram shows a suitable design for a split cable
arhched to a portable receiver's PWR - yO I port. 'Data Source"
inputs data to port l: "Data Sink" rcceives the outpur &ta from
port l.
Split C.ble
Port I Drt iourcc Dct. sltrl(
LEMo 5 ptr (DTE) DE9P (DTE) DE9S
3 (Dara ID) 3 (Daborr)

4(G-*o) -L_1(c-,-d)_
- 5 (orcud)
5 (Datr out) 2 (Dara In)
You can design split cables for the other ports as well. For ports 2
and 4, rcmember to wLe the CTS and RTS lines if CTS/RTS flow
conEol may bc used.
PPS and Time Tag

The receiver can output a I pulsey'second (1 PPS) tihe strobe and an
associated time tag. Portable receivers oumut the pulse on the AI)x
conttector, using dre piDouts shonm in Table A-8; mck-mounted
rcceivers output it on the I PPS BNC com€ctor. Both types ouBut
the time tags on a user-selected se al port.
Series 4000 Recaiver Befor€nce n3

Tabl6 A{ Plnouts for AUX (Ponabb Receiver3)
Functlon Functlon
(Four Seri.l Port (Four Serial Po.t
Pin Option in3lalled) Option nol
instatted)
1 SEnaloround Siqnalqround
2 1 PPS out 1 PPS out
3 Soiial UO 4 dala in
S€rial l/O 4 RTS
5 Serial l/o 4 CTS
6 Evenr in Event in
7 Seial l/O 4 dala out
The leading edge of the pulse coincides with the beginning of each
t TC second. (See Figure A-3). The pulse is driven by an RS-422
driver between nominal levels of 0.0V and 4.0V. The leadinS edge
may be positive (rising from 0v to 4V) or negative (falling from 4V
to 0V), under user conEol.
The pulsc is about I psec wide, with rise and fall times of about
100 nsec. Resolution is approximately 40 nsec, but seveEl extemal
facto$ limit accuracy to approximately il
psec:
. Position enors (especially if a user-entered reference position is
used): Each meter of eror can result in 3 nsec. of error in the
1 PPS pulse.
. Sclective Availability: When in effect, introduces errors of up
to 30 meters (100 nsec) in satellite signals, with coresponding
enors in the 1 PPS pulse.
. Antenna cable length: Each meter of cable adds a delay of
aboul 2 nsec. to satellite signals, and a corresponding delay in
thc 1 PPS pulse.
234 Sedes 4000 Beceivor Beference

Featrres and Accessories A
l tPt/be Po*itt !'lqe Pl/l€
n
l
_l
0v tt
\\
tt'i I
t
'-i#."J r"r" e *Ua r,",.1
n*,* ,r,* n.r"
|
Flgure A{ Tlmo Tag Rllltion to 1 PPS Wav. Form
Each time tag is output about 0.5 second beforc the corresponding
pulse. Time tags are in ASCII format on a user-selected serial port.
Ihe format of a time tag is:
uTc t!.firrLdd hh:nt n:ss ab

Where:
. UTC is frxcd text.
. yf,rntn"A is $e yeat, nonth, alld date.
. fir.'tt
r.'rs is the hour (on I2,{-houI clock), Einute, and second.
Note that ftc tirne is in tlTC, not GPs.
. a i6 the position-fix t,pe:
I = time onty
2= lD&time
3 is curendy unused
4=2D&time
5=3D&time
S6ri63 4o0o R6c€iv6r Belorence

A FEatures and Accsssories
. , is number of satellites being Eacked: I to 9, ':' (for l0), ,f

(for I I ), or '<' (for I 2).
. Each tiriE ta8 is telmi'l,attdu retum lincleed
sequence. ^carriag.
A rypical printout looks like this:

uTc 93. i2.21 20:21:16 56
VIC 93.12.21 2Ot2L,\7 56
VIc 93.!2.21 20:21:1.8 56
a and, rnay bc '??', meaning that the time is based od the rcceiver
clock because the rcceiver is not tmcking salellites. CIhe rcceiver
cloct is lcss accurate than time r€adings extractEd from ratcllite
siSnals.)
Event Mark lnput

Avdlablc ody trlth the Evert Muker Itrput strd Melnory
Opdooe
Event mark input is used to log a precise GPS tioc rag on rcceipt of
an extemally generated pulse, such as a shutter closing pulse ftom a
photogrammetric camem. Ponable rEceivers input the pulse on the
At,x pon; for pilouts s€e Table A-8, on pagc 234. Rack-mounted
rcceive.s input the pulse on the EVENT MAR(ER coDncator, ! BNC
@nnector.
The event marker input iB pulled up to +5V through a I kO
im@ance. The pulse should bc TTL lcvcl (low < 1.0V, high >
2.5V) *ith lise and fall times less than I m nsec. Tte leading edge
rnay be positive (rising) or [e88tiv. (falling), under user confol. Thc
tine tag rccorded for a! event is accumte to about I Isec.
An cvent mark can also be gencratcd manually from the ftont panel
with rhe ,rt Dara screcns. (Se. 'USER INPLIT: Ente. Notes And
Event Marks," on page 196.) This does not put a pulse iDro thc rcar
panel, but does log the sarE type of oessage.
M Sedgs 4Oq) Recetucr Bofororlco

F€atures and Accassories A
INT/EXT Timebase
Available only with the Ertemal Frequency lEput Option.
The INT/EXT TIMEBASE control lets you drive the rcceivefs
timebase ftom an extemal ftequency source, such as a high-stability
atomic standard clock, instead of lhe receivefs internal quartz-crystal
oscillator. The extemal frequency source may run at either 5 or
10 MHz.
The extemal ft€quency source is input though the E)(T REF
connector (a BNC connector) on the rcar palel. The conne.tor is AC
terminated through a 50O load. The signal must be 1.0V to 6.0V
peak4o-peak with a stability of 2 ppm of the specified value (for
example, 5 MHz i
l0 Hz).
NOTE - The extemal r6leronc6 runs the l€crive/a

tim€base directly. It the receiv6r is in one ot the extemal
timgbaae modes and an appropdate oxternal fi€quency
sourc! is unavailaue, or the signal ls interrupled, lhs
rcceiver wlll nol fuhction propedy.
Sodes ,rc00 Bec€iv6r Reference x7

Data Output Formats
Series 4000 receivels can generate ts.o classes of pfintouts (rcpons):

single-shot printouts and cycle printouts. Single-shot priDtouts are
available or all Eceivers. Cycle printouts arE available only on
rcceivers that have the Two Serial Port Option or the Four Serial
Port Option.
Single-shot printouts are poduced once only, on rEquest. They may
be captured by a computer or wdtt€n dirEcdy to a printer.
Each type of cycle pd

out is produced one entry at a time, in most
cases one enty per receiver measurement rycle. Thc tcrm'lrintout"
is misleading, because cycle printouis are lnost often captur€d by a
computer to keep rccords of the r€ceivefs operation. Yoo can
Eoduce them with the Canrro, rnenu's CYCLE PRINTOUT selection.
The receiver produces thrcc other types of output on a per-cycle
basis, but ftom other parts of the rnenu systetrl They arc RTCM- lO4
output, RTCM- 104 input, and NMEA-0183 ougut, aU controlled by
separate, appropriately Damed items on the Conrm, menu.
All of the printouts are written to the sedal ports. Note that these
pofis rnust be properly configurrd at both the EaNmitting end (the
Sedes rlo00 rcceivcr) and the rEceiving end (the computer, printer, or
other device). For infomEtion about configuring serial ports, see
"Baud Rate, Fonnat, and Flow ConEol," on page 230.
Serie6 4000 Recoiver Belerenca 239

B Oata Output Fomats
Slngle-Shot Printouts
The receiver can prcduce fte followinS types of sinSle-shot ASCII
pri outs:
. BroadcastDab: me rnost rEcently decoded epherDeris ard
alnamc for a specific satellite.
. lonospheric & UTC Data.' The most rEcently decoded
parameters for the basic ionospheric delay model, and for the
conversion from GPS system timc to Universal Coordinated
Time (UTC).
. Satellite Elevation Plorr A graph showing the elevation and
of a selected satellite versus time for any selected UTC
^zimuth
day.
. Schedule Plot For Al, SarJ. A graph of visibility for all known
satellites over any sclected Urc day.
. Receiver Setup Info: A description ofthe rcceiver, its
characterislics, its con[ol scnings, ctc.
All of the single-shot printouts ale produced with the lsif iFEl key's
PRINLPLm scrcen:
PiIHT/PLOT: ON PORT T2t <-- CHRHGE

BROADCBST DRTF <-- CHEIIGE
FoR SUgl <--HEXT SV
+,.PR I NT.+*
For an expla[ation of how to use the screen, see '?riny'Plot" on

page 75.
The following sections describe each type of printout.
2Q S€ries 4000 Hecelvor Relererrc6

Data Outpst Format8 B
Broadca3t Data
Prints the DoBt rcce ly dccodd €phcoe.i8 ard alD.nac d&for a
specific satellite.
To u!€- At thc PRINTmOT scrrcq pllss thc typc-of-Filfout
CSANGE soffkey uril BROADCAST DATA appcat8.
Prcss the NE fr sv softl(.y uDtil tic ID of thc desitrd r.t€llitc

appcars. lhoa prcss tbe PRINT soflkcy.
Thc first scctiotr of thc p.iDtout co aiD3 eph€eerir data forthe

salellitc, plus a fcw o(ic( iteDs. The sccond section c.ntaiDs
alE n& dat& Mo6t of thc itoDs alE labeled with trrDe! drrivcd ftoE
the GPS systeE sl,€cificatioas ard use thc salIe u[its. (sec
NAySTAR GPS SNcc Segrnqtt, list d i! thc Bibliogaphy.)
FigurE B-1 Bhores ! s.Dple pdntouL
Sed@ ,lofi) R.c6iver Refgr€atc€ a1

B Data Outpul Fomats
BROADCAST EPHB{ERIS DATA

01
69? IICODED lRI M 21-MAY 93 11:59:52
473204
+2.30000000000E+01
+4.73304000000E+05
-3.243s9233864E 05
-3.06954461843E-12
+0.00000000000E+00
+1.1959A3a6192E-09
+2.300000000001'01
+4.?8304000000E+05
+s.151596883??E+03
+1.42113424159E-49
+3.a51a9730!33a-03
-6.490308004t3E 01
+f,04505a39012!-01
I .17326064446E-70
-3.57246595433E-01
-1.05591832024E-01
-2 . 49644925952E-09
+2.?3125000000E+01
+1-6?443?50000E+02
+3.4?912750847E-06
i4.3933?53S800E-O?
-4.t5029655816E-09
-3.14236133639E-04
000
ERI 141 21-!,lAY-93 11:59:52
FRI 141 21-MAY 93 12:09:00
698 DECODED ml 141 27-wY-E3 15t25t23

+1.13784000000E+0s
+5.15353662109E+03
+3.36235731860E-03
+7.3994994153sE-01
ISUAO +3.04470a251958-01
-3.s7763051986E-01
1.'I4539511244E-01
-2.4333??50405E-09
Flgure B-l A Brodca lrde Printout
212 Saies,1000 Bgc€iv€, Refor€nce

Data Output Formats B
Table B-'l Broadcast Data Prlntout, Notea
Fiold D.Bcrlption
Time ol week ol the slart ol th6 ephemeris

transmission, in seconds, deived lrom the Z-count-
cus, cuc, ctc, cts All are easurcd in semicircles, not radians,
HEAL-TH Mosl rocontly d6coded heallh datalrom any sourc€,
HTIME Time that the last health data was collecled.
LASTUSE Tim€ thai th€ rocsiver last lock€d oo lhis salellito,
MESSAGE Most recently decoded ASCII sp€cial mossage lrom

any satelliie.
lonosphsric & UTC Data

Prints the most recently dccoded pammeters for the basic
ionospheric delay fiodel, and for the conversion fiom GPS system
timc to Universal Time Cooldinated (trc). The rccord format is
similar to that of thc Eph./lon/UTC Data pintonti see the Model
4000 Remote Control In erlace for a description of that printout's
record format. Refer ro NAVSTAR GPS Space Segmenr (ICD-GPS-
200) for detailed description of the ionospheric and IITC paramerers
and their uses.
To use. At the PRINT/PLOT screen, press the type-of-printout

CHANGE softkey until IONOSPHERIC & UTC DATA appears.
PRI}.IT,,PLOTI OH PORT t T ] {-- CHANGE

IONOSPHERIC & UTC DATfi <-- CHNNGE
Press the PRINT softkey.
&ries 4O0O Receiver Bereronce 243

B Data Output Formats
Figure B-2 shows a sample printout.
IONOSPiIERIC AND UTC DATA

AI'N..... 0698 DECODED FRI i41 2l-MJ\Y-91 15:21:22
ALPHAo. +1, 02445483207E-08
AIJPHA1. +2.23517417907E-08
ALPHA2. 5.96045447753E-0a
ALPHA3. 1,19209289550E-07
BETAo. . +9. 62560000000E+04
BErA1.. +1.31072000000E+05
BETA2.. 5.55360000000E+04
BETA3.. 5.89824000000E+05
A0.....,r..58324837684E-08
41-..., +1.85517468137E-14
T SUBOT +1. 18784O00000E+05
D TlS,. +08
D TLSF. +09
I,IN SUBT 186
liN IrSF. 191
DAY NUV 4
Flgurr &2 An lonospherlc lnd UTC lraia Prlntout
Satellite Elevatlon Plot

Prints a graph of the elevation and azimuth of a selected satellite
versus time for any Urc day.
To use. At the PRII.IT/PI-OT screen, prcss the type-of-printout

CHANGE softkey until SATELLIIE ELEVATIoN PLoT appears.
Enter the date for which a printout is wanted.

. The fornat of the date is day-month-year.
. The default is today's UTC date.
244 Sodes zlO0O Beceiver Reterenco

Data Oulpul Formats B
. Calculations for dates in the distant past or frrtuie ale bas€d on

lhe nrost rcctndy received o6ita.l descaiptions, and do not take
into account any orbit shifts or degradatioas.
Pte,ss the NEXT SV softkey until rhe ID of ftc dcsitrd sltellite
appeals. Th€n pr6s thc PRINT sofrtey.
C'hrogirg lhc vteEtrs locadon. The rcceivcr uscs its most recently
determined position as the location for rvhich thc plot is produced.
This is the same as the position displayed by the Srarrr menu's
POSmON scrcen.
To producr a priDtout for a differetrt location, enter thc location as
thc positioning refercnce positiorL Disconncct the antcnna beforc
changing thc refdence position to Eate thc rEceiver usa the
rcfcrcnce position instcad of iB own lo6ition fir. RsrEmber to
Econnecr thc antcnna affer producing rhe printoul
The plot's time axis is labeled in bod UTC timc and in local time as
defined by the Corrro, rrcnu's ADruST L@AL TIME item. The
tEsolution is four points pcr hour. At each point whcre the satellite is
above the horizon, it is ploned with an asterisk (a 'r') rnarking
clevation in dcgre.s, and a thlEe-digit azimuih valuc. A doned line
cortrspodds to thc curcndy sct elevation mrsL
Sod98 4000 Rocaiw, Relerorrcs 26

tD
6 lEr,ElrArrolr .
azrrns Errlr r9i Ev01
u lBr 37:23.5005tr rB !22.02.2711A Er,ElrrTror XrSi .06 at rI4
T l.ru!rrN DAy tro - tnt20/na\11993 - cps xEa 069?
60 70 3o 90
---------t---------
I
I
I
--------t--------
I
I
-- ------ ---------
l
I
I I
---------l---------
il I
I
I
E o
I
I
q
o
g
a
{ ol. S.i.lllb J
Flgur! BO A P.rt ELvaUon Plot
l
il
I
Oata Ouhut Formats B
Schedule Plot for All Sat6lllte3

Prints a graph of satellite visibility versus time for all known
satellites over any UTC day.
To use. At the PRINT/PLOT screen, prcss the type-of-printout
CHANGE softkey until SCIIEDIJLE PLOT FOR ALL SATS appeals.
PRIHT/PLOT! ON PORT [ 1 ] <-- CHCNGE

SCHEDULE PLOT FOR ELL SqTS <-- CHE}I6E
64-65(|lav)-95 r.,ipRllrr**
Enter thc date for which a printout is wanted. All of thc comments
for the date in the Satcllite Elevation PIot, above, apply herc.
Press the PRINT softkey to produce the printout.
ChaDgirg the vlewlng locatloE. The receiver uses its most recently
determined position as thc location for which thc plot is produced.
As for the Satellite Elevalion Plot, thc positioning referencc position
may also be used.
Chapging the elevrtio[ rnask. To clrange the elevation mask, use
the Coffia, menu's MASKS/SYNC TIME scr€en. For lrrorE
information, see 'Mask Sync Time," on page I 14. Remember that a
change to the elevation rmsk affects a.ll of the rcceiver's operations,
not just this printout.
The plot's time axis is labeled in both UTC and local time as defrned
by the Corrral menu's ADJUST LocAL TIME it.m, The time
rcsolution is four points per hour. Each colurnn rcprcsents one
satellite.
For each time intewal, every satellite's elevation is chccked. If a
salellite is above thc clcvation mask, its twodigit PRN number is
printed in the appropriate column. If the satellite is below the mask
S€.i€6 ,l0OO Receiver BeferEnc€ 247

B Data Outpul Formats
but abovc the hodzon, four dots (' :: ') ale printed. If the satellite is
belo*, the horizon, the sat llitc's cotutnn is blank.
LU LAT 37:23.5054N Lt],it I22:O2.215au EIEVATION !{ASK +05 de9!ee6

;ruLrAN DAY 140 7flJ/24/$at/!993 - CrS rtrEEK 059?
cc
17 o0 -- -03 -.-. 12-13-------76- --- --- -- -20- --- ------24--- ------- - -------
03 12 13 16 20 24 ,t
03 12 13 15 20
o1
a3 12 76 71 20
02 -------03----r r ---------16-1?----- -20-- -- -- 24 25- -- -- --- --

03 16 t7 20 24 25 :,
03 16 17
03 20 ,t t, tt :,
20 03 't
03 16 77 20 ,t 27 26
t5 i7
04 ----- -03-- ------ -- --16-17- -- -t.-t:-22-21-------26- ----------
03 :: 77 .. 21 22 21 26 ::
03 .: 21 22 23
22 05 - . - - - - -o3- - ------------ - - 7---- -----21-22-23 -- - 25----2A-. ----
o3 2t 22 23 26 2A
21 22 23 25 2A
o7
L1 2t 23 28 31
11 12 17 21 23 2A 3!
o1 17 72 28 31
01 0a
Flguir 84 A Palt ol a Sch.duls Plot lor All Satllltt g
Recelv.r Setup lnfo

Prints a dcscription of drc rc.livcr, its charaateristics, its conEol
settiags, e!c.
24 S€rles,1000 Bgcalver Rof6rencs

fbou$utF rG B
To rrc. At thc PRDTT/gra s.r!ca, Fcss lbc t,'Dcd-pti!!d

OIAI{@rdLryE iI RBEIVEn StsTt P INFO qlpcat
Ifutr Er.. thc DRDIT .ont t.

ltc Eccivcr.ho Dm&cc. thi! Fituut @ tiDa whln ],fi colblc
ttr Fosmo{ CAICI LA'IIol{tl 6 F(NIIIO}{ TYIE 2 qycb Fidott
itr ASOI tubr-
S4mfuoahr.RltrqI. gE
B Dala OutM Format6
TRIME]-! NAVIGATION 4OOO RS - SERIAL NUUBER 3252442142

T&IT!'BLE NAVIGATION
SUNNWALE CALIFORI{IA
soF,rwARE REVS: NAV-5.65 23l.rur,/93 SrG 1.23 24l!EB/93 !OCr'-3.30
l4/JuL/92
CHANNILS INSTALLED: 09 L1 ONLY IMERNAL XEUORY: 0512 (BYTES
NUMBER OF RS232 PORTS, 2
CAl.RllR PIIaSE PROCESSING: INSTAT-IED
XINEnATIC xoDE : TTNAVAILABLE
RTCM 104 \TERSION 1 INPUTS: INSTALT,ED

RTCM 104 VERSION 2 INPUTS: INSTALLED
RTCU 10{ \'!RSION 1 OI.rTPrIIS: INSTALLED
RTCM 104 \aERSION 2 OlrlpuTs: INSTALLED
NAVIGATIoN oPTION: INSfALLED
RTCM NETWO!]( OPERAIION:SNAVAMBIE
POSITION STAIISTICS : INSTAILED
1AILBUOY OPERITION:UNAVAILABIE
RTK1 OPEBATION : INSTALLED
IONO.FREE POSI?IONING :I]NAVAI,ABI,I
FASITEST IIEA.SUREI,IE{I RATE: .5 SECoNDS
FIRII4A]IE UPCRADES: L'I.IAVAI LABLE
INPUT: INSTAI,I,ED
ONE PUISE PER SEcoN! OUTPUT: INS'TALLED
EXTERIAL TI}tEBASE. INSTAI-LED aiID OFF
COCOI{ ALTITUDE/SPEED I.IUITS: IIiISTA'IED
RET.1g!E DOWNI,OAD! UNAVAI],A3LE
REFERB{CE PosIfIoN: 37:23.5314587N 122:02.2566574n 10124 heters

ELEVATION UASX. +00 degree. IDOP @sk: 07.0 SYNC Tr E: 001.0
DISABj,ED SVS: NON!

(POSITIONING) sVS. NONE
ICNOiE IIEATTH {sDRvEY) svs: NONE
POS]TION fIX UODES:
LAT/T,ON/HEIGHT
I,AI/ION USING FIXED HEICIII
JULIAN DAy 140 - TInt /20 /MA\ / t993 - GPS ltEE( 0697
Flgurc B€ A Roc.hrgr Setup lnlo Prlntout
250 Series 4(X)O Rsc€iver Beleronco

Cycle Printouts
Avdhble oDly vtth the T\"o or Four Serlol Port Optlon.
The Corrrol menu's CYCLE PRINTOUTS scrEen controls the
generation of the following rypes of cyclc printouts. For dctails
abort how to use this scrcen, s€e 'Cycla Printout!," b€ginning o!
page 126.
. Position CalcularionJ.. Information &bout the posirion fLes that
a differential or autonomous station produces every
measurernent cyclc.
. Naeigation Calcula,ionr (ASCtr foniat only): IDfomation
about the Esults of th€ navigation calculatiorN for thc sclected
waypoints.
. Raw Measurements: Vnprocessed satellite data.
. Nae Dkplnf Utit (ASCII format only): Data rcquircd to &ive a
Trioble Navigation Display Unit. Thc format and @ntcnts arc
the samc as for the Position Cdculations.
. Compact MeasurcnA^ri (binary fonDat only): SatelliE data in a
compact foritut for cfficient Eansfer to a computer.
. EpMon/UTC Dab: fhe ephemeris, ionospheric, and Urc dara
transmitted ftom the SVs.
. Potition Quality S,att: Sigrm valucs; cstimates of cror in
position fixes. Available only $'ith QA,/QC Option.
. Raw Ll Dala M.ssdge (binary foniat only): Raw Ll
melsulenEnt dats for each sv.
. Position TJpc 2: Very sitri'.r to Position Calcuhtions:
Unneeded charactcrs ale omittcd to mrke rcom for hithcr
prccision coordinates.
Sories 4)OO Recaivor Ref€asnce 251

B Dala Output Formats
. Naeigation Type 2 (ASCI format ohly): Very similar to

Navigation CalcuLt ions. UDne€ded characiers are omitted to
make rcom for higher precision coordinates.
. Iocal Datumz-one Por (ASCII fornat only): Position fixes
computed with the local datum.
. RT Suney Ddta (btlrary format only): Survey data, in the same
format as a downloaded .DAT file.
Two fo.Dats for cycle prlrtouts. Many of the cycle printouts can
be poduccd in either of two fornats, ASCII and BINARY.
. ASCII format is suitable for printing on a I 28-column printe!,
or for input to computer proglams that can only handle
printable data. Each line of the printout is terminated by a
cortiage retum, linefeed sequence. The following sections
illustrate and explain each cycle printout's Ascll format.
. Binary format is meant to send data to a computer or data
storagc device in a compact form. For specific infonnation
about binary formats, s€e tbe Modcl4000 Rerrute Control
Interface.
NOTE - Som6 of lhe cycle prlniouls produc€ very long

records, The examples wrap such records onto two or
more lines, like this:
IOO suN 150 3O-.IrAY_932r:38:24 31t21.4235N

122:01.63111r 000? 03.3 462910 +000.00 000.38
194-4 -1.7?09E 0? 0050 312,13.241
I00 SUN 150 30-MAY-93 21:33:25 31t21.4234N
122.A\.6112fi -000? 03.3 {62533 +000.00 000.35
190.0 3.7734E 01 0057 3 L2,17,2A)
An indent€d lin6 in an example is a continualion of tle
precedlng line.
2 se.ies 4000 Receiver Referenca

Data Output Formals B
How to Read the Format Tables

Each ASCII format printout is describcd in a table with two
colllJfins, Field Name a d Description. These should be self-
explanatory.
Each binary format printout is described in a table with three
col[mns, FieA Namq Format, and Description. The Field Name
a,nd. Description colrfiir.s should be self explanatory. The Fomat
column contains a letter and a number, such as 'N 4'. The lettcr
specifies the type of data in the field, and the number is the field's
length in bytes. The letter may be:
. B: Code or bit field.
. C: Character (alphanumeric) data.
. F: Floating point number in IEEE-754 format. To conv€rt to the
format used in DOS progranJs, see the Model 4000 Renote
Conrrol Interface Operation Man al.
. I: Signed integer in Motorola format (high-order bytc first). To
convcrt to Intel format (used in DOS programs), reverse the
order of the bytes.
. N: Unsigned integer in Motorola format.
. y'Vore. Entry represents a group offields. See t\e Description
colunn for details.
A Fonu, like '8 . N 4' means, "cight fields with format N 4."
In thc description of an integer field, thc abbreviation hD means
"least significant bit." The text identifies the uniis that apply to the
value. For example, "lsb = I cm" means "t'he least siSnificant bit of
the value rcpresents I cm." In other words, a value of I rcprcsents
I cm, 2 reprcsents 2 cm, etc. For another example, "lsb = 0.2 cm'
means 'the least significant bit represents 0.2 cm." [n other words, a
vahre of I represents 0.2 cm, 2 represents 0.4 cm, etc.
Series 4000 Beceiver Reference 253

B Data Oulput Formats
Positlon Calculations
CoDtains infomEtion about the position fixes that a differential or
autonomous station prcduces every measurcment cycle.
When you enable lhis cycle printout the rcceivea p&duces a setup
printout that describes ho{/ the Eceiver is conligu€d aod how the
contlols arc s€t. The rcceiver then begins gcnerating the cycle
printout.
Figure 8-6 shows an exafitple of a Positioh Calcuratirrs pdntout in
ASCtr format. The printout contains two g?es of rccord groupsi
position records and satellite status recods. The printout prcsents a
goup oflen position rccods (rcpr€s€nting position fixes from ten
cons€cutive cycles), then & goup of satellite status r€cods
containing one rccord for each satellite being tracke4 then another
gloup of ren position rEaords, and so fonh. Each group of rccords is
peceded by a ritle line that describcs the coluErs in that goup.
Each position rccord is enclosed in square brackets ('['
and ']'). A
computcr protram can use thc bmckers to identify position iecords.
Between the brackets &e the fields descriH in Table B-2.
The fonDat of a satellite status lccold in ASCII forDat i6 describ€d

ir Table B-3.
The format of the printort in binary forEat is descnH, in the Model
4Un Remote Coitrol lnterface Oryrution Morr@].
4 Sories ,loo0 tloc€iver Rsf€rsrEe

Dah Output Fomatg B
TRIXB'E NAVIGATION 4OOO RS GEODETIC SURVEYOR - SERIAI] NIJMBER 3252^42146

TiII,IBLE NAVIGA{ION
SLsINYVA!9 CAI,IFORN]A
SOFTWARE REvs: NAv-s.66 23lWL/93 stG-1.23 24/FEB/94 BoOt 3.30 l4/Jt)1'/92
CHANNEiS INSTALLED: 09 t1 ONLY II+TERNA! EUoRY: 0512 (BYTES
NUUaER OF RS232 PORTS: 4
CARRIER PHASI PROCESSING: INSTAIIED
XINEIiTATIC IrODE: INSTALLED
NMEA oUTPUfS: INSTAT.IED
RfCM 10.4 VERSION I INzuTS: INSTAI-IED
RTCM 104 vERslON 2 INPU'|S: INSTALLED
RTCU 104 VERSION 2 OUTPU'IS: I\S?A',J,ED

NAVIGA?ION OPTION : INSTALTID
OPERATION: UNAVAILABLE
PoSITION STATISIICS : INStAITED
TAILBIOY oPERATIoN :UNAVAIIAELE
DGPS+ OPEiATION;UNAVAIINB"
IONO.FREE POS]TJONINC:
FAs?Es" sEAsrrREuENa RATE: .5 SEcoNDs
FIRId{A]{E UPGiADES: INSTA!]-ID
INPT,T: UNAVAILABI,E
OME PUISE PER SECOND OUTPUT: INSTALLID
COCOI{ ALTITUDE/SPEED TIMITS: INSIALLED

REMOTE DOWNIOAD:
REFERENCE PoSITION: a7 t23.4721445N 122102.24375L5s -0007 neters

ET,EVAIION !,iASX. +00 deqlees prOP !tAS{: O?.0 S\iNC TIME: 001.0 6ec6
DISABLED svs: NoNE
IG ORE llEAlTtl (POSITIoNINCI svs: NONE
IGNORE HEAITH ISURVEY) svs! NONE
POSITION EIX XODES:
I,AT/I,ON USING FIXED HEICHT
wI,raN DAy 150 - suN/30/rrAY/1993 - GPS WEEK 0699
TIME ],ATI?I'DE I,ONCIIUD! HGT ?DOP CI,OCX

V.VEL H.VEL HDG IREO,OFFSET COIIT S svs
(00 sUN 150 30 l,lAY-93 21:36:24 3?:21.4215N 122:01.6311w -0007 03.3 462910
+000.00 000.33 794.4 -3.1149E-41 0050 312,13,241
[00 suN 150 30-uaY 93 21t30t25 3?.21.2I2]aN 722.01.6X12w _000? 03.3 462533
+000.00 000.35 190.0 -3.??34E-0? 0051 312,13,241
t00 sUN 150 l0 xAY-93 21:34:34 3712!.4225N 122:01.5313w -000? 03,1 459134
a000.00 000.43 139.1 -3.?315E A1 Aa59 312,13,24)
sv EL AZM SN IODC CONT GPS.TIME
07 57 035 11 0018 0059 +0??922.000
0a21 0059 i077922.000
Flgurq 86 A Poaitlon Calculatlona Cfde Prlntout
Series ,1000 Receiver Reference 255

B Data Outpul Formals
Table B-2 P@ltlon Calcarlatlons Posltlon Rgcord, ASCII Fomat
Flald Nam6 D.acrlptlon
to Oummy two{igit field, included lor compalibility rvith eadier 4oooA/S

,Eceivers. Alweys sent as '0O'.
Dat6 and tlm6 when th6 position lix was made.

DOY
OAIE
TIME DoY is lh6 Julian day ot yoar.
DATE is lhs dats in ddrrn -yy fomat.

T|ME is tho tim€ of day in ir,:mm.rs fomat.
Note that il it ls not poGslble to do a posilion fix th6 roceiver will conlinus lo
pdnt onc€ p6r cycle, ahhough the position and tho time liolds wlllnot
change. lf e 'clock-or y tit' is possible, then tho crockand FFEO. oFFSET
vqlues will ohange.
A single cha€cter app6are betweon the rrME and LAT[uoE ll€lds io indicate
the lype ol posilions b6ing computod. There is no epsc€ on ehher side ol
th6 letier. Po66ible values are:
d: The rocolvar is op€Eting as a DGPS rovsr, and is recefulng and applying

RTCM diff Ergntial cofiectlons.
f: The rocolvor b operallng as an RTK rorer, and is compuling FToal

60lulions.
l: Th6 recelver is op66ting as an RTK rov6r, and is computing Fixed

(intege, solulions.
Drerk The r€ceiver ia computinq aulonomous p6llions,
LATITUDE Re6ults o, the most recent position fix. LATITUDE and LoNGlTtloE are
LONOITUDE fomatied In degrees, mlnutes, and decimal traclion6 ol mlnul€s, regardloaa
H6t ot hdv lh6 receiver E conligurcd to lormat coordlnates in act.ons. tlGT ia
heighl in m€tela above the wGs€4 gllipsoid.
Position dilution of preci3ion, assoclalod with th6 mo6t roceni Poeition.
256 Sedes ,lIlOO R€c€ivsr Fleference

Dala Output Formats B
Table B-2 Poaition Cabulallona Poaition Record, ASCII Format

(continued)
Fiold Namo Doscrip,lion
CLOCK Clock ollsst in nanoseconds; the dillerence b€lrv€en the recoiv€r's intemal
clock and lhe calculated GPS systom ciock. The range is 0to 99S,999.
There is no "cor€cf value, The numberwiliddll lrom measur€ment to

measurement at a latE that depends on the accuracy ol lhs r€ceiv€r's
The receivers vaticalvelocity and horizontal valocily in knots, and its

H,VEL surlace hBading in degroes relatve lo true norlh.
HDG
FFEO. The calculated relativo error in the receive/s timobase. 1.00O0E 6 implies
OFFIET thal the receivels clock is 1 ppm low.
CONT lnlormation about the type of posjtion fix, whlch satellites wer€ us6d, and
s how much smoothing the integrated Doppler syst€m did.
coNT is lhe minimum number of cycles (ov6r allsatellites usod in the
position lix) that have passed without a loss of lock.
s indicatss the type ol posilion fix:

4 = lavlon/hsighrclock (lullsolulion). 1 = heighyclock wilh fixed larlon.
3 = larlon/clock wilh fix6d height. 0 = clock with rlxsd lavlon/height.
2 = lavlon with lixed h€ight and clock.
svs shows the PRN numb6rs ol th6 satellites which were used ih lhe
positjon fix. Nots that sinc€ the receiver compLrtss overdetemined solutions,
mor€ than four PBN numborc may appoar.
ll svs > 6, the coNT and s tields ar€ suppressed to allow room forthe
satsllits numbers, ln this case. coNT can b6 deducedfrom lhe individual
satellite data lhat is pdnted ev6ry t6nth cycl€. s can be deduced lrom lhe
faci that with mor6 than six salellites lho r€ceiver will use the most complel€
typ6 ol fix. ln general, this implies s=4 (la on/heighuclock) unlesElh6 typ6s
of fix have b€en lhanually limit€d.
S6des dom Beceiver Bef6rence 257

B Data output Formats
Table B€ Posltlon Calcutationa Satelllte Status Bsclrd, ASCII Format
Fi.ld Nam6 Oescription

The satellite's PBN number.
The sat€lllte's cufient slevation and a2imoth.
SN The satellite's signal-to-noisg lalio. Th€ valu6s lange is 4to 40.

4-9 W€aksignal.
1G19 Mode€toly strong signal.
2029 Stong 6ignal.
30-40 Verystrcng signal.
roDc lssue of Oata Clock ol the most reconlly d€coded ephemeds dala lrom a
sat6llite.
CONT The numberof continuous measurement cycles du ng which no lo6s ol
GPS.TIME Thetim6 at which the most r6cent moasur€ment onthis satellite was
made- Th6 valu.s should beih. samo for all sarellites.
Navigation Calculations
Avlilable ody wilh the Navigation Packsge Optiotr.
Contains information about the results of the navigation calculations.
Figurc B-7 shows an exarnple of a Navigation Calculations pintolut
in ASCII fonnat (the only format available).
The printout contains just onc type of rccord, shown in Table B-4.
The tide line is repealed after every ten rccords. Table B-4.
64tr t22ta2-2693q o.0 wP00>H.0r

21uY93 1s:24,22d3?:23-4s
21sY9r 15:21:2riBT:2r.45
Flgure B-7 A Navlgatlon Calculations Cycle Prlntout
253 Series 4000 Receiver Beference

Table B-4 llaylgatlon Calcutatio,E Becord, ASCII Format
Fiold ilame Deacriptlon
DATE Dale and lime when th6 navigalion resutls wer€ calculated,
TIME
d, *, This characlerappoa6 betweon lho nME and LATTTUOE colLrmns.
'd'indicales that th6 currenl posilion was produced using RToM-104

blank
ditferential corections.
'*'indical€s thal th6 recerver was unable to produce a positionlix, and th6
posilion data theretoro is old.
A blank indicatss that the position rjx is curenl, but was produced without
RTCM-104 corrections.
LATITUOE Th€ position ofth6 rec6iver. Coordinales are in ds9re6s, rninules, and a
LONGITUDE docimallractron of minules. HETGHT ls in metars.
HEIGHT
The format of HEIGHT may change to titth6 value intothe five-character llsld.
SPEED The r6csive/s horizontal spesd in meters psr s€cond, heading in degrses
HDG relativs totrue north, and rat6 ol climb in met6E psr second.
cua ll the valus of Ct-irB is greater than 9.9, th6 fomat willchangeto fit the valus
in a three-character lield.
LEG The courso leg novv b6ing navigatod, shown as an origin and a dostinalion
waypoint number. For exampl6, 'WP05>WPo3' represents acoulse leg from
waypoint 05 to waypoint 03.
FANGE Range from position to snd o, l€g ln kilom€16rs, b€anng in degrees r€lativ6 to
BRG tru6 north, and cross-track erorin kilom€t€rs. XTE is followed by an 'L' or an
xtE 'R' to andicate that lhe position is l6lt or dght ol th€ leg.
The tormals ol FANGE and XrE may change to fit the valu€ in a frve-
S6ries zlO0O Receiver Rsference 259

Baw llealuromonta
Contains unpocessed satellite position dara.
This 'lrintoufis not suitable for printing, even in ASCII format,

because the Ecords are too long to fit on a line and therc is no visual
separation bctween frelds. Thcreforc rhe rEcord format is not shown
or dqscribed her.. S€e the descriptioD of the PRINT MEAS printout in
the Model4000 Remote Con rol Intetace i\antral for details.
NAV Dlsplay Unlt

Pmvides info ration to a Trimble Navigation Displsy Unit (NDt).
An NDU attached to your rEcciver can display cor{,rchensiva
navigatio! &ta, including waypoinrs, steering directiotr display,
navigation alartns, disrance and b€aring calculations, etc.
This printout is available only in ASCII format, Its folmat is
identicnl to that of the Position Calcalatilrts Dtrinto'ut.
Thc NDU is Do lon86 available; thc ntssate is provided for
compatibility with existing units. The E hoXL Remote Dirplay
rcplaces the NDU, but it uses the NMEA-0183 messagB for
iofomration.
Compact ileasurements
Contains satellite data, including raw phase, mw code lane, Doppler
shift, i-ntegrat d Doppler,i cgrated Dopplcr cpochs, SNR, and time
ta$.
This printout is i
€nded to Ea$fcr measuement records to a
computer or recoding dcvice in a mrnimum number of byter, It is
available only in binary format.
Each re.ord has two primary componcnti: ftatning inforrnation and

satcllit€ dat& The format ofa r€cord is shown in Table B-5.
2AO Serie6 ,lO0O Rec€ivsr Rsto.gnc€

Table 8.5 Compact l4eacuonen s Rocord, Blnary Form5t
Fl.ld l,Lmo Folm!t Dc.c.lptlon

sTx B,I 'Sta of transmission' code (0x02).
NI Lenoh ol the cod6 6poch and meaauroment data bl@k,

in byt€8.
Message lag Nl Flrcd valu. (oxol).
Code €poch N4 lsb = 1 mlllisecond.
Maa suram6nt sr17 B€peaH s time3 lor s satsllilos. The format ot 6ach
block
Fi.ld N.nE Format

SV paeudorandom nois€ Nl
€8ryI!v.be.
Code pha.6e N3 lsb = 2 cm; e.9., l0 repr€senl3
m cm, RangE ol valu€s is
(F33.55:1,330 cm.
Codo lang N1
t:!_l}rrlll.s9_
O@plor t3 l8b = O.0Ol Hz; e.9., 10 repll3ents
0.010 Hz.
lntegrated caflior t4 bb = 0.5 cflit €.9., 10 .€pr6s€nt6
5.0 cm.
Continuous codo epoch N4

counl
tiignal-lcnols6 latio (SNR) N,I
Check6um N1 Th€ two'6 compl6m6nt oi lhe bytE-wido 8um ollhe

msssag€ tag byto and m€asuroment deia block.
EIX B1 'End ol llansmBsion' cod€ (m3).
S€rles ,O00 Recelver BeferEnc! 261

EpMon^rTC Data
Contains the ephemeris, ionospheric, and UTC data transmitted from
the SVs.
This cycle printout is produced every frve minutes mther thar once
per cycle. Its record fornat is very long, and so is not described here.
It is identical to the Ral, Measurem.nts pintc,')t (see the description
of rhe PRINT MEAS print$t in the Model 40W Renoe Control
InterJace Operation Maaxrl), except that it omits the last two
sections of each message: the rneasurcment and position dafa blocks.
Position Quallty Stat3

Avallsble oDly with the QA,/QC Optlon.
Contains sigma values, which cstimate the eilor in position fixes.
ln ASCII format, this cycle printout uses the same basic layout as an
NMEA4I83 dessage. It omi6 the asterirk ('*') and che.ksum
customarily found at the end of an NMEA-01E3 message.
Each record consists of a frxed number of fields separated by
commas. One or more spaces rnay appear after each mm]I)a. The
fields arc described in Table 8-6.
HerE is an example of a record:
$PTNL,QA,152545, 0.41, 0.45, 0.8r, 0.00,3.47, 0.45,

0.41,179.80,1,1
N SoriEs 40oo Receiver Rofer€llce

Table 86 Polltlon Ouality Stat3 R€clrd, ASCII Fomat
FIeld DGcriptlon
Fixsd text '$P|'NU ldenlifios type ol record. (Position Ouality Stak lollows
the lormat of an NMEA-O183 record.)
2 UTC timo of pGilion lix in hou6, ninul€s, & s€conds.
3-5 Slgma valu€s for longitude (ea6t is poBitjv€, w6st iB n6gative), lalitudo (north
ls positive, south iB negaliv€), and height. Allvalue6 ar€ in metels, wilh
range Oio 999.9.
6 Covariancs between sigmavalues lor longitude (fi6ld 4) and latitudo (fi€ld 3);
ranqe -999.9 to +S99.9.
7 The valu6 of UNIT, a moasure ol the probable rslationshlp belween lhe

algma valu€a and lhe actual er.or; range O lo 999,9. Meaningful only il field
11 is non-zero. For more intomalion, see "P6ilim," on paq€ 43.
8-9 Soml-maior and semi-minota(es oferrcrallipse, in meto6.

10 Ori€ntaUon otsemih4or aris ot efior 6llipse, in dagroes clockwiae lrom truo
norlh,
11 'l: Po€ition Eolution is overdot€minod; UNfT (field 7) b moanlnglul. 0:

Position solution is not or/eftlatemined.
12 0: Posiuon detgrmlned by absolute po6itionin0. 1: Po6ition d6ismin6d by

ditferontlal corgction.
This message's binary fonnat is descdbed in Table B-7.
Sedes 4O(X) Recoker Belerence 263

Table B-7 Posltion Ouallty StaB Rocord, Blnary Fomat
Fleld Name Formall D€cription

srx B1 "Start of lEnsmi6sion" code (0x02).
Slatus N1 Recelver status indicator; vEluo is not Bignificant.
Mossag€ lD B1 Fixsd (0x44.
Length N1 Numbero{ bytes lrom the nexifield through ihe end olthe last
data block. Equalto 27+6s, where s is th6 nurhber of satellhes in
this msssage,
GPS time tag N4 lsb = 1 s6cond.
Slarting \Mlh lhe mo6t significant bit:

lB1
Fl.ld ! Bft D.8c.lptlon
Namo :
:7
s6t J Position solulion was weiqhtsd.
sgl --, Oiff€rsnlial coreclron an use
s6l --, Overdet6mined solution.
o- 3 Number of satsllit€s in use (an unsigned numb€r).
PDOP N2 lsb = 0.1i e.9.,56 r€presents a PDOP of5.6.

HDOP N2
VDOP N2 lsb = 0.1
Longilude sigma N2 lsb = 10 cmi e.9., l0 represents 1 meter.
Latitude sigma N2
Hsightsigme N2 lsb = 10 cm.
N2 Ssmi-major axis of eror ellip6e,lsb = 1 m6t6r.
N2 Semlminor axis ol €ror€llipse, lsb = I meler.
4 Series 40m Recoiver R€ference

Data Oulput Formats B
Table B-7 Poottion Oualtty Stats R€cord, Blnaty Fo.mat (contin@d)
Fl.ld Narna Follnal DGcripnton
N2 Odentation o, semimajor axis of 6rror ellips6; bb = 0.1 ',

moast/r€d clockwise from liJe north; e.C,,900 represBntB du6
ea6t (90').
SV dala block s*6 One block lor €ach 5al€llite in th€ messeg6. At pr€s€nt the daia
blocks conlaln no meaningful data.
Ch6cl(sUm NI The sum of the bytas from Srell6 through the ond ol the last SV
data block, nodulo 256.
ETX B1 'End ot tmnsmbsion' cod€ (OO3).
Raw Ll Data Ms3sage

Contaias the raw Ll rneasurement data for each SV.
This cycle pdntout is available in binary format oDly. The fomat is

shown in Table B-8.
Series 4om Rocefuer Reter6nc6 245

B Oata Outpul Formats
Table B{ Rlw Ll Datr Record, Binary Fonnat
Fl.ld l{ame For.rEt I D.rcriptioo
STX B1 'Start ol transnission" cod6 (0102).
Stalus N1 R€c€lvor status indicator.
Moesage lD B1 Fix6d (0x80).
L€ngth N1 Numb6r ot byto6 lrom lime of wsek though la6t SV data block.
Equalto 9+20s, wh€r€ s isthe number of salellltes ln thls
message,
Tlms ol wgek N4 lsb = 1 milli8scond.
Clock oflaet N4 lsb = 2'7 m6ter; e.g., 128 (27) lopr6sent6 1 m6ter
127 x2'7 m=1 m).
SVs N1 Numb€rol setollil€s in thiB mssaage (lhs valus of s).
sv data blocks s*m Bepeated s limes tor s Batellit*. See Tabl6 B-9 lor details.
Ch€dGum N1 The 6um of lhs bldes lrcm S[alus through the end ot the last SV
data block, modulo 256.
ETX B1 'End oI transmissioo' code (O$3).
266 S€des 4OOO Recelver Reference

Table B-9 Raw Ll Data Record's SV Dala Block, Blnary Format
Format I O$cription
sv tD N1 Satellite lD.
FLAG B1 Starting with tho mo6t signiticani bit:
Field Bit D$crlptlon
7 s€t -+ New posdon computed in rhis recsiver

6 sot, Ll data loaded.
5 , Res6Ned,
s€t J L1 phase valid (lock poirt valid
. _-19,.j Fgsgrve!.
1 set + Ll cycleslipsince last message.
FLAG 2 I Starling wilh th6 most signlficant bit:

FI.ld Bh i D$cription
:
3 ser r Filtered Ll [E6udorange.

:1 2
0 clear -, Ll trackino C/A cod6.
Signal-to-noi6e N1 lsb = 2 2i 6.9., 16 r€present6 4 (16x2_2 = 16/4 = 4).

Etion (SNR)
Ll C/A range N4 lsb = 2_7 meter; ag., 128 (27) represents 1 m (27x2_7 m = 1 m).
L1 Phas€ FA lsb = one Ll wavelength; e.9., 0.01 repres€nts l^0o of lh€ lengilh
Doppl€r N4 SV signal's Doppl6r shill. lsb = 2_6 Hz; 6.9.,64 reprcs6nts 1 Hz

l.Ax2rHz=1Hz)-
Sedes 4000 Roceiver Reference 287

Position Type 2
Contains essentially the same information as Po sition Calculations.
In ASCtr fonnat the po6ition record layout is slighdy differenq
unneeded chamcters are omitted to make room for higher-precision
positioning information and Irlore satellite IDs. The ASCtr format
setup aod saEllite informatio! messages ale the sarne as in the
Position Calculations printout, as aIe the binary fomatJ for all
messages.
Herc is an example of the printout hcader and a position rccordr
rlI{E
2lrtAt93 L5t26.01d37 t23.454333N 122:02.269493w -00046.451 01,5
...crocx v.vEL H.\|EL riDG FREQ.OFPSEI CONT S svs

{47984 000.05 000.00 000.0 -5.16458-07 AASA 4 79.28,14,Ia,27
Navigation Type 2
Contains rcarly the same infonnation as a lVavi8alr'oz Calcuhtions
record with a slight differcnce in thc recold format. Unneeded
chaBcters e€ omiBd to make rcom for higher-g&ision positioning
information.
Lika Navigatian Calculatiot s, the Natigation TWe 2 cyclc plintout
available only in ASCtr format.
Here is an example of the printout header and a record:
DATE TII,IE IATITUDE ],ONGITIJDE HEICHT SPIED EDC

CI,UB LEG IANCE BRG XTE
2lt Av93 75.25.44d3't .23 .1547O5N 122 tO2.26952Ou -000{4.956 000.0 oO0
-000-0 vJ?o0>r,llo1 0.235 162 0.004R
2@ Serigs 4000 Recoivor Referenoo

Data Output Fo.mats B
Local Datumzone Pos

Contains position fixes computed with rhe local dstum.
Each epoch of data consists of a group of five records, which

contain:
t. fizcr GPS time, PDOP, and rclated information.
2. WGSA Position: WH (lalitud.r'huirude/hcigh0 position fix

in thc WGS-84 &tum (the re4civels statdard datum).
3. Locol Daturn Posilion LLH position fix in the local datum.
4. Iocal Tt tc Position NEH (noflhhg/eastirg/hcight) positioE
fix in the projection of $e local &tum.
5. Bla* (a zero-length r€cord); a visual scpanto( tretween groups.
This cycle printout's Eaords consist of uonatDed, comrDa-d€limited

fields. Ficlds may bc prrceded and/or followed by spaces, which
h&ve no significfic€.
The formrts of the tron-blank Ecotds alr shown h Tablc B-10,

Following is an example of one s€t of rrcords.
sr4xl,!\r0.r]ne,19ocr93,01:19'26.000, 05.1,000.2!,220.5
l*s3{, 03r:23'2e. }295",N,\22.02' L1,2)50.,q,
@ 33, 0r7:2r.29.129r..X
sPrl$L,r,. projn. ca 3, Ni +0600050,225, E, l1363so?.r30,
Sodes 4OOO Roc€ivsr Roforerrce 269

B Data Output Fomats
Table 8.10 Local Datumzone Pos, ASCII Format
Field
D€scrlption
tnitat Fietds: All Records
1 The lix6d text '$PTNL'.
2 Thefixed t6xt'PJr', wher€ r,is the record type number: I Ctime),2 (wcs'84
Position), 3 (Local Datum Position), or4 (Local Zone Position).
3 Type of record:'Time (1), Raw (2), Daium'(3). or'Zone (4).
Data Fields: Time Record
4-5 GPS date, in th6lorm ddmmm,ry; GPS time of day, in the form hh.mmiss.fft
(lil represents thousandths ot seconds, and is always 00O.)
GPS time ol week, in seconds; GPS week nuftber.
8
9-10 Sp€ed, in meie,s/second; true heading, in degreas.
Ddta Fielek: wcs-u Position Recorcl ancl Local Dalum P$ition Recorcl
Coodinate syst€m name. For a wss-84 Position record, 'wcs-84', Fora
LocalDatum Position recod, the shod name ofthe localdatum.
5-6 Lalitud€ in "degrees/minutes/seconds" fomal, and hemisphere ('N' or'S').
S6e note on prccision, below.
7-8 Longitude and homisphere ('E or'W'). See not6 on precision.
I Hoight in mete6, always precsded by asign. See nol6 on precision.
10 Ahatude relerenc€: 'sPH' (ellipsoid) or'MsL'(Mean Sea Level)-
Nde on precision: Fo( positions computed autonomously, latitude and longitude ars
given to two decimalplacss oi seconds, and heightlo one d€cimalplaco (i0.1 m).
For posilions compuled with dilferential GPS or RTK, latilude and longjtude are given
lo four decimal plac€s otseconds, and heighttolhr€e declmalplaces (+0.001 m).
270 Sorios 4000 Receiver Reference

Table B-10 Local Datumzonq Poa, ASCII Format (coniinued)
Fl.ld
Oescdptlon
Dala Fiekls: Local Zone PoE,ilion Racod (il pc6,ition is in zone)
4 Nam€ ol the local proiection-
5-6 Direction ('N', lor nodhing)i nonhing in msl€rc, ah,vays precodad by a 6i9n.
S€e noto on plecision, below
7-8 DiGction ('E', lor ea6ling); eesting in meto6, always proceded by a sagn.
See note on pr6cision.
9 Hoight in metels, slways pr6c6ded bya sagn. S€€ note on prccision.
10 Altitude referencor 'spH' (ollip6oid) or'MSL'(Mean S6a L6v6l).

NoE oo p,ecision: Fot pc6ition6 computed autonomously, northing, eagting,
and height are giv€n to one d€clmal placo (a{.1 m). For po6itions comput6d
wilh diffor€ntial GPS or RTK,lh€y are given to thr6E d€cimEl placo6
(r0.0O1 m).
Dela Fields: Local Projection Po'itlon Recod (il position b out ol zono)
4 The lix€d lexl Check Zon6'.
Nols No lurther liglcls app€ar when the position is out of zone.
RT Survey Data
Contains survey data in the safie format as a downloaded .DAT filc.
Survey daia consists chicfly of mw measuement data (.DAT file
record 17); it may also contain position fix data (record 1l) and
ephemeris data (recod 21), depending on paEmeter settings. In
concise fomrat, a comprcssed version of record 17 is used.
This cycle printout contains much of the samc information as
Position Calculations a[td Raw Measurements. btul is a r.nore
efficient way of gettinS the data out of the receiver.
Sei€s ,[o00 Receiver Boferonce 271

B Data Output Fomats
The formats of the records in this cycle printout arc described in the
4000SDSSE RS-2i2 Interface Data Collcctor Foruot Specifrcations
Manral. See the Bibliography for a full citation.
Other Per-Cycle Output

Three other grouF of scrcens control typcs of output that arc
produced once per receiver cycle, the same as cycle printouts:
. Outgoing RTCM- 104 messages. ftom the Cdnrrol menu's
RTCM-104 OtnPUT sd€en. (See 'RTCM-104 Output," on
page 88.)
. Incoming RTCM-104 dessages, ftom the Contrrrmenu'g
RTCM-Io4INPUT scrcen. (See "RTCM- 104 Input," on
paSe 95.)
. Outgoing NMEA-0183 messages containing real time
information about position, course, and speed, ftom the Control
menu's NMEA- 183 ouTruT itcm. (See "NMEA Output" on
page 124.)
272 Sedes 4{m Receivol Roforerrce

Daia Output Formats B
RTCM-104 lnpuUOutput
The RTCM-104 Input printout is available only with the RTCM- 104
Input Option. The RTCM- 104 Output printout is available only with
the RTCM-104 Output Option.
The RTCM- lU Input printout contains selected fields ftom message

twes 1, 2, 3, and 16 in the incoming RTCM-104 message stsEam.
Similarly, the RTCM-] U Oap$ pinto,.if @ntains selected fields
from thc same message types in the outgoing RTCM- 104 message
sfteam. These two types of cycle printouts use the same format.
The procedure for conholling these pdntouts is unusual because the

printout name does not appear as a paftuneter on any screen, To
contol these printouts, select the Confo, rrenu's RTCM-104
OUIPITT or RTCM-lu INPUI item, as appropriate. Then press the
MoRE 6oftkey to display the secad sqeen for the pintout you
chose. To enable or disable the printout, prcss the PRINTOUT, . .
CHANGE softkey.
I[ the AsCtr format printout, each record is a decoded and scaled

reprcs€ntation of an RTCM Eessage. Records appear in four
different foturats, as shorvn in Figure B-8 and described in Table
B-11, below.
Messages are formased like NMEA-0183 messages, although they
are not within the NMEA-01t3 standad.
S6des 4oOO Rec€iver Retorence 275

--"1
B Dab otJFUI Fonml3
T,I.l
1b lh & za, 51, lr! &E fu ADrB Cs
$mlRc, 0, 0, 1185.0. 2, -1A5.901 -0.140, 125, 0, * 75
SDCPRC, 0, 0. 11a5.0, 13, -t3.56, -o.o52, 222, 0,. ?c
$DOPRC, 0, 0, 1185.0, 25. -39.00, 0.030, 132. O,. 7A
lrr.,
1b. 9t l& Zd SY ,,c .lr m uqia6r
0, 0, 1188.0. 2, 0.L5, 0.000, 12{, 2,r 72
'EDE,
SEDDC, o, 0, 1188,0. 13, 0.02, 0.000, 221, 1,. 52
9DODDC. o, 0, 1148.0, 25. -L.32, 0.000, 113, 2,* 6a
rrFS
,rt tut ltu Zr ln,t zPB g-
8&IREF, o! 0, 1699.5, -2591505.t2a, -a301010.a25, !a51959.412,' rt9
ItF !6
lb. btzd
SDGASC, 0, 0, 1?01.0, rRrl(Br.E NAVIGAEIOII, i 0l
Flfrlt Ea RIC$1O4 lnDqt rrd OUF
n1 S.da imo R6drEr BohIqr

Data Output Fonhats B
Tabla B- l 1 FTCM-1 04 lnpui and Output Record Formata
Fl.ld Neme D.8crlption
Type 'tDG': Mark boginning ol now message.
Rest ol fiold: id€ntlll€s me$ag6lyp€:
PFc: Pseudorangg Coroction (typ€ I or 9).

FIEF: R6lercnc6 Slation Position (lypq 3).
DDq Oolta-Differential Cor€ction (typ€ 2).
Asc: Sp€clel mossage lTypo 16).
S0r Referenco statioo (basa slation) lD.
Hll Ref€renc€ stadon (bes€ sta on) health.
Zcrn Z'count time tag.
sv Sat€lllte numb€r.
Ps€uclorangs conEcton.
DFIRC Paeudorange rat6 con9clion.
toD Eph€m6d9l$iue number.
UDRE U3er diff6rcntial rang€ gror esllmal€.
X-Pos X, Y, and Z coordinatg6.
Z-Pot
Ch€cl(sum; the ercluslv€ orof the charactols (bytes) betw€€n '$'
and 'r'. lt is r6preE6ntsd a5 two h€xadeclmal digits (in ASCII).
NMEA-{II83
Avoilable only with the NMEA-OIt3 Ouqrt Option"
When the NMEA4I83 output is enabled, the following messages
can b€ goduced to aid integration with other senso$.
Sories .l{x)o Receiver Rererence 275

All messages conform to the NMEA-0183 Venion 2.0 forrnai. All

begin with '$' and end with a carriage rEtum and a line feed. Data
fields follow ',' delimiters and are variable in lenSth. NulI fields still
follow a',' delimiler but conlain no information.
The optional checksum field is rhe last field in a message ,ud
follows the 't' delimiter. The checkslrm is the 8-bit exclusive oR of
all charactem in the message, iicluding the conunas, between but not
including the '$' and ' .' delimite$. The hexadecimal result is
convened to two ASCII characters (G9, A-D. The mo6t significant
chancter appcars fust.
The supported messages are:
. ALM: GPS week number, SV health, and complete almanac
data for one SV. One message per SV, up to a maximum of 32.
. BWC: Bearing and distance to waypoint (o y with Navigation
Package Option).
. cBs: SV fault detection with estimated bias statistics (only
with QA/QC Option).
. GGA: Time, positioD, and fix related data.
. cLL: Position fix, time of position fix, and status.
. cRs: Range residuals for each SV (only with QA/QC Option).
. csA: GPS rcceiver operatiDg mode, SVs urei for navigation
and DOP values.
. CST: Pseudorange measulement noise statistics iD the position
domain (only with QA/QC Option).
. csvi Number of SVs visible, PRN numbe$, elevation, azimuth
and SNR values.
. PrNL, DOP: DOP values and PDOP mask. A proprietary
Trimble message.
276 S€des 4000 Receiver Boference

Data Output Fo.mats B
. PINL, TsN: SNR and differcntial status data. A proplietary

Tdmble message.
. P-INL, TSS: GPS positioning mode, PDOP and SVs used fo!
positioning. A proprietary Trimble message.
. RMB: Navigation data frcm piesent position to a destination
waypoint (only with NaviSation Option).
. RMc: Time, date, position, course and speed data (only with
Navigation Option)-
. \/TG: Acfual Eack made good and spe€d over groBd.
. wPI-: tntitude and longitude of specified waypoints (only with
Navigation Option).
. XTE: Cross-tack error; magnitude of the position error
pelpendicular to the leg and ihe alirection to stecr to intersect
the leg (only with Navigation Option).
. ZDA: Urc day, month, alld year, and local time zone offset.
Common Messag6 Elements

tr'ields and delimitcri. F-ach messaSe coDsists of:
. A message ID consisting of '$GP' folowed by the rressaSe
type. For example, the message ID of the ALM message is
.SGPALM'.
. A comma.
. A number of fields that dcpends on the messaSe type, s€parated
by commas.
. An asterisk.
. A checksum.
Serles,rc00 Receiver Reference 277

Here is an €xample of a simple hessage with six fields plus the

message ID and checksum:
scPzDA, 152145, 21, 05, 1993, -7, 00r50

Intitude. I-atitude is rcprcsentd as ddrn rLmmrrrna t ngitude is
alwayr represented 6s dddzrr.mrrrzt, where. Dircction (north,
south, east, or west) is presented in a separate field.
. dd ot ddd is degrce$
. mnrrurrrM is minutes and decimal fi'actions of minutes.
Dircction. Dircction is a single chancter: 'N', 'S', 'E', or 'W' for
North, South, EasL or west.
Tlme. Time values ale in UTC, and arc rcpresented as ,/rr,rnss,
wherc:
. ,rr, is hours, from 00 to 23.
. n,isminutes.
. $ is seconds.
ALM: GPS {eek, SV he.lth, & rloeDsc for one sst llite-
SGPALM,1,1,03, 598,00,5ae6, 1d, ?79f, fdef, a10d68,
6469a6, 1c!162, 5t5A39,, * 43
The frelds ale:
l. Total number of ALM rnessages for this cycle.

2. Message scquence numb6r.
3. SV PRN numbcr, 0l to 32.
4. CPS week number.
5. SV health status.
6. EccenEicity.
7. Almanac rcfercnce time.
274 S€dec 4{m Receiver Refersnce

Oata Outpul Formats B
E. Inclination argle.
9. Rate of right ascension.
10. Root of scmi-major axis.
I l. Aryument of pcrigce,
12. t Dgitudc of sscension node.
13. Mean anornaly.

14, A IO, clock parametEr.
15. A fl, clock padneter.
Bwc: Bcarirg.Dd dlstuce to w.ypolrt (oDly with NaviS.tioD
Paclagc OptioD, and otrly wheu valid '\tom' and 'to' wlytr oints arE
.tefincd).
scpBwc, 1s1?56, 3723. 3133, N, \2202, 2222, W, 1,52,'r,,,

0.1262, N,0o01is8
l. t TC ofb.5dng fix.
2. t atitude of waypoint.
3, Dircction of l.litude (N or S).
4. t ngitud. of wsypoint.
5, Dirrsion of lontitu& (E oB W).
5. B€aring to wrypoint.
7. Fixed tert 'T' shorvs that b€arin8 is relativc to truc north.
8,9. Not u!cd.
10. Distarcc to waypoint.
I l. Fixed tcxt 'N' shows dlat distucc to rrsypoitrt is in
nautical milcs.
12. Waypoint ID number.
S6des ,{000 R€ceiv6r RslorerEe 279

B Dala Output Formats
GBS! SV frult detectioD vith €stimaled bLs strtlslics (only with

QA-iQC Option).
scPGBS, 19253?,,,,,,, +4A
This hessage is generatrd only with QA,/QC Option.

l. UTc of the ccA fix associated with this sentence.
2. Expected eror in latitude, nois€ = 0 meters.

3. Expe.tld error iII longitude, noise = 0 meters.
4. Expected erro! in altitude, noise = 0 meters,
5. Most likely failed SV PRN number.

6. Probability of missed dete.ction fo! most likely failed SV.
7. Estimate of bias on most likely failed SV.
8. Stadard deviation of bias estimate.

ccA: Time, posldon, snd fix related datr,
SGPGCA, 151924, 3723. 454487,N. t2202. 2697 99, W. 2, 09,
0 .9, -L7 .49 ,t4, -25.67, Mr 1,0000*5?
l. t TC ofposition fix.
2. latitude.
3. Direction of Iatitude (N or S).
4. Lrngitude.
5. Direction of lohgitude (E or W).
6. GPS Quality indicatorl
0= fix not valid.
I = GPS lix.
2 = Differential GPS fix.
7. Nurirer ofsvs itr us€,00-12.
8. IIDOP.
N series rom Hoceiver Ref6renc6

9, Antema height MSL rcferEnce,

10. Fixed text 'M' shows ihat the unit of measurE for altitude is
meters,
11. Geoidal separation.

12. Fixed text 'M' shows that the unit of measure for geoidal
separation is meters.
13. Age of differential CPS data re.or4 Type l. Null when

DGPS not used.
14, Base station ID, 0000-1023.
cLL: Position lix, tirre of lrosition fix, erd strtus.
scPcLL,3?23.4543 33, N, 12202 . 2 69 667, W, 151,93 3, A*3E
l. l,atitude.
2. Dircction of latitude ('N' or 'S').
3. Longitude,
4. Direction of longitude, ('E or'W').
5. UTC ofposition.
6. Fired text 'A' shows rhat dala is valid-
GRs: R.nge rcsiduals for each SV (only wilh QA/QC Option).
38, 1.95, 0.55, 1.48, -30.46,
scPGRS, 192537, 0, 19.
-24.t5,19.96,,,,,*5D
This message type i5 available only with QA./QC Option.
l. Urc of the CGA fix associated *ith this seEtence.
2. Mode:
0: Residuals vrerc used to calculate thc position giyen in
rhe rnarching GGA sent$ce(a p
oi).
Sedes ,{000 R6coiv6. Rgforence 2A1

l: Residuals were recomputed after the GGA tr osition wa!

computed Grcferrcd mode).
3- 14. Range residuals for svs used in the position solution.

Order must match order of PRN numbe$ in GSA. When
GRS is used cSA and GSv are genemlly rcquired (null for
unused fields).
cSA: GPS receiver operrtlng mode, SVs used for navigstlotr,

rttd DOP Yalues.
SGPGSA, A,3.19,28, 14 ,!8,27 ,22,31,29, , . , ,!.7 .!.O,
1- 3 *15
l. Mode:
M = Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D.
A = Automatic, 3D/2D.
2. Mode:
1 = Fix not available,
2=2D.
3=3D.
3-14. ID's of SVs used in position 6x (Dutl fol unused fields).
15. PDOP.
16. HDOP.
17. vDoP.
GST: Pseudo6trge mersureDetrt Doise statistics in the posldor
domain (only with QA/QC Option).
sGpcsr,192537, 47.87,13.12, 8.76,94.1 5, 4.89, 13.04,
19.19*7A
This message rype is available only with QA/QC option.
l UTC of ccA fix associated with ihis seDtence.
242 Sedes 4ooo Becoivor Rel€rence

2. RMS value of standard deviation of the range inputs to the

navigation plocess. Range inputs include pseudoranges and
DGPS corections.
3. standard deviation of semi-major axis of error ellipse

(meters).
4. Standard deviation ol semi-minor axis of error ellipse

(meters).
5. Orientation of semi-major axis of elror ellipse (degr€es

ftom Eue north).
6. Standard deviation of latitude error (nreters).
7. Standad deviation of longitude enor (meters).
8. Standard deviation of altiude error (rneters).
GSvr Nunber of SVs in view, PRN nnmbers, elevadoE, rzimuih
& SNR volues.
sclcsv, 4,1,13, 02, 02 ,2i.3, ,41, -3, A0A, , tt,40, L21, , !4,
13,!12, O5a61
1- Total number of messages of this t ?e in this cycle,
2. Message number.
3. Total number of svs visible.

4. SV PRN number.
5. Elevation in degees, 90 maxiEuh.
6. Azimuth, degrees fiom true north, 00e to 359".
7. SN& 0&-99 dB (null when not tracking).
8- 11. InforEation about s€cond SV, same fomEl as fields 4-7.
12-15. Information about thfud SV, same format as ftelds 4-7.
16-19. Information about fouth sV, same format as fields 4-7.
S6de6 4O0O Recoiver Relorence 283

B Dala Oulput Formats
PINIa DOP! DOP values slrd PDOP mask.

SP?NL, DOP,1- 4,0.9,1 .1,.0.7 ,7 .O+1D
I. PDOP.
2. HDOP.
3. VDOP.
4. TDOP.
5. PDOPmask.
PTNL, TSN! SNR aDd difreiential ststus d&t&
SPTNL/ TSNr 09, 19,22, 28. L2,14,7 ,7A,32,27 ,74,22 , t7,16,

5, 31, 14, 29, 24, 1, 0400* 7 4
l. Total trumber of SVs visible.

2, SV PRN number.
3. SNR.
4-5;6-7:,,, n-l,r.Samc information as 2 & 3 for each SV visible.
rr+1. A8e of differcntial GPS data in seconds.
a+2. Ba.se station ID, 0000- 1023.

P-INL, ISS! GPS pocitioriq Eode' PIX)P strd SVs used for
positioDiDg.
$PTNL, TSS, A,3, 0S, 19 ,24,14, le,27 ,22,3L,29,1,.1a2E,

1. Mode:
M = Maflual, forced to operated in 2D or 3D.
A = Automatic, 3D/2D.
2. Mode:
2=2D.
3=3D.
3. Number of SVs being used for positioning,
a4 Series rO0O RecEfusr Rolererlce

Data Oulput Formals B
4. SV PRN number.
5-rr, Remaining SV PRN numbeN.
n+1. PDOP.
RMB: N.vlgrtio! drta froD pr.setri poddotr to . dBttr.tlotr
w.ypoitrt (only with Navigation Package Option).
scpRMB,A, 0.0028, L, 0000, 0001, 3?21. 3333,N, 12202.2222,

q,o.L26',t , !52, ,.14
l. Data status:
A = Dat! vslid.
v = waming, data not rcliable.
2. cro6s Eack eror, riaximum 9.99 nautical mile.s.
3. Dirr.tion to 6tcer, iL' (left) or 'R' (right).
4. FROM wsypoint ID.
5. To waypoint ID.
6. To w&ypoint latitude.
7. Dirrction of l.titudc (N or S).
E. rIO *aypoint lonSitudc.
9. DiEctioD of longinde (E or w).

10. RanSe to destiD.tion, nauticd mile's, Itraxirllud 999.9.
11. Besring to dcstination in de8rees relative to true north,

12. Destination closing velociry, kDots.
13. Arival Btatus:
A = Arrival cit€le edter€d or perpcndicular pass€d.
Null = Have not errived.
RMcr Tfu[e, drto, Dosltion' cours. a!!it spe€d drt (only with
Navigntion Paclsgc Option).
Sories.lO00 Recoiver Bsl€r€rt€ N

$GPBMC, 152101, A,3723 .4542aA,N,122Q2 .26 9759,1,'7,0.00, 0,

214593,,*24
1. UTC of position fix.
2. Status:
A = Valid data.
V = Waming, data not reliable.
3. l,atitude of position frx.
4. Direction of latitude (N or S).
5. Longitude of position fix.
6. Direction of longitude (E or W).
?. Speed over grcund, lolots.
8. Track made good, degrees for true nofih.

9. Date, fofinat ddn nyy.
10,11. Not used.

vlc: Actual track Eade good snd sp€ed oyer ground.
$cPvrc, 0, T, , ,0.00,N,0.00, K*33
1. Track made good.
2. Fixed text 'T' shows that track made good is rclative to true
north.
3 4. Not used.
5. Speed over ground in knots.
6. Fixed text 'N' shows that speed over gound is in knots.
7. Spo,ed over ground in kilometers/hour.
8. Fixed text 'K' shows that speed over ground is in
kilometervhour.
286 Sedes 4000 Receiver Belerence

Data OulFJt Formats B
WPL: Latitude ard longltude of sp€cifled r anoints (only with

Navigatiol Package Option).
Scpwpl,, 3723. 3333,N, t22A2. 2222,W, lAOt* 5E
l- Waypoint latitude.
2. DiEctiotr of l.titude (N or S).
3. Waypoint longitude.
4. Drection of longitude (E or W).
5. Waypoint ID number.
xTEr Cross-track error, distance to leg, and sieerhg direcflon
(only with Navigation Package Option, and only when valid "from"
and 'to" waypoints are defined),
$GPXtE, A, A, 0.0023, r,, N*5F
l- Status:
A = Valid data.
v=r aning, data not reliable.
2. Fixed text 'A'.
3. Magnitude of soss-track eEor.
4- Direction to stecr to intersect leg: 'L' for Ieft or 'R' for
right.
5. Fixed text 'N' shows that nragnitude of cross-Eack elror is
ilt nautical miles.
zDA: IJTC day, month, and year, and local time zone ofket.
scPzDA, 152145,21, 05, 19 93, -?, 00 *50
1. Time, in tmc.
2. Day,0l to 31.
3. Month,ol to 12.
Seriss ,l{)00 R€ceiver Belgrence 247

4. Year.
5. Local time zone offset ftom GMT, 00 to i13 houts.
6. Local time zone offset ftom, miDutes.
Fietds 5 and 6, together, yield the total offset. For example,
if field 5 is '-5' aud field 6 is '15', local time is 5 hourc
and I 5 minutes arlier than GMT.
288 S6r!6s rO0O Recoiver Referenco

Glossary
This section defines Eclnical terms and abbreviations u.sed in Seies 4000
There defrnitionr are oriented to the neeik of Seies 4A0O users. Many have been
sinplifted to eaclude details tfu are not relevan to tha Seies 4M0, or to ftdule the
anount of tecl ical background required to uiderstand them. For more fomwl
dertn ions fonnany of,hese terms, see the glotsary in the GPSurve! General
Reference, lis@d ill the Bibliography.
&bsolute positioniDg See Autono mo u s lto s it iantn g.
acquisltlon The prccess of locking onto a satellite's C/A codc and P-

code. A receiver acquires all available satellites when it
is powercd up, and acquircs additional satellites as they
become available. Once a leceiver acquires a satellite, it
t'acks that satellite until the satellite's signal becomcs
unavailable-
almenlc InfonDation about NAVSTAR satellite orbits, Keplerian

elements, clock coEEctions, atmospheric delay
parameters, and health stafus that is u'ansmitted by each
satellite. GPS rEceivers use this inforrDation lor satEllite
acquisition and postprocessin8.
AII Ampere hour(s), a measue of a battery's capacity to
deliver currcnt over time. A l0 AH batt€ry can deliver
I adDere for l0 hours, 2 ampercs lor 5 hours, etc.
S6,ies 4000 Receivsr Bcierenc€ 289

Glossary
alphauuEeric mode The receivcr mode in which you can enter letters,
numemls, and some punctuation marks into data fields.
You can toggle the ke,?ad betwcen alphanumeric mode
and numeric mode by pressing the INEAI key, or the
ALPHA/NUMERIC softkey (if it is available). See also
altitude refereDce The datum used as a reference for height measurements.

A Series 4000 receiver can be set to use either of two
altitude referenccs: the WGS-84 reference ellipsoid, or
mean sca lcvel (OSU 84).
AEti-SpoofiDg A feature that allows the U.S. Department of Defense to

tansmit an encrypted 'Y-code" in place of P-code.
Y-code is intended to be useful only to authorized
(primarily military) users. Anti-Spoofing is used with
Selective Availability to deny the full precision ofthe
NAVSTAR GPS system to civilian users. , rrl-Sporrrg
is abbreviated AS, do not confirse it with Selective
Availability (SA).
application A class of tasks that a GPS receiver can bc used to
accomplish. Control surveying. topographic surveying,
and navigarion arc examples ofapplicalions.
AS See Anti-Spoofine.
ruionomous poGitioning A mode of operation in which a GPS receiver computes
position fixes in real time from satellite data alone,
without rcfercnce to data supplied by a base station.
Autonomous positionin8 is lhe least precise positioning
procedure a GPS receivcr cafl perform, yiclding position
fixcs that are precise to i100 meters horizontal RMs
when Selective Availability is in effect, and to
i10 20 meters when it is not. Also kDown as aDrofute
290 Series 40OO Beceiver Reference

Glossary
auto-survey tiEer A Series 4000 feaore which allows a receiver to "sleep"

until a session is scheduled to start, then wakes it up and
runs the session. The auto-survey timer allows an
unaftended receiver to run for long periods without
exhausting its battery or filling up its memory with
loggcd data.
ezimulh The angle between a point of reference and another
point, as seen by an observer in a specified location. The
Series 4000 uses arinrlr, to dcnote lhe anglc tIue north
and the bearing of a satellite or othcr celcstial object
relative to the observer. Abbreviated AZM or AZMTH.
base stltion (l ) A receiver that obsewes satellite data ftom a known,
fixed location during a survey or other GPS procedure,
together with its a[tenna, tripod, etc. (2) The site at
which such a rccciver opemtes. Also known as a
reference station in sorne prccedures.
beseline The three-dimensional vector distance between a pair of
stations, computed from simultaneously collectcd CPS
data by means of carder-phase processinS. This
technique is used in surveying applications. It yields the
most accunte results of which GPS is capahle-
b{seline surveying A class of procedurcs in which observations are used to
develop a nctwork of vectors of high accuracy and
precision. The applications popularly classed
"suweying" use baseline surveyinS procedures.
broadclst ephemeris A set of data that describes the predicted positions of a
GPS satellite through the ncar future. Each GPS satellite
periodically Eansmits its own broadcast ephemcris,
which is uploaded to the satellite by the Confiol
Segmenl. See also precise ephemeris.
"prsmeis.
(YA code See Coarse/Acq uis ition code.
Series 4000 Roceiver Reference 291

Glossary
carrier beat phase The difference between ihe carier signal generated by a
receiver's intemal oscillator and the carrier signal
received fiom a satellite.
code phase dmerenc€ The phase difference between received C/A or P-code
and the same code geneEted intemally by the receiver.
Used to determine the range to a satellite.
Coar6e/Acquisition code A pseudorandom noise code (PRN) modulated onto a

6PS satellite's Ll signal. This code helps the receiver
compute its distance from the satellite. Usually
abbreviated "C/A code." See also P-code.
coEtinuous kinematic surveyhg
A variety of kinematic surveying in which the roving
receiver mates carrier phase obseryations while in
motion. Continuous kinematic surveying is useful for
aerial suneying, topographic survcying, and vehicle
uacking.
control mark A mark on the earth whose coordinates are known and
acccpted, or are being surveyed, for use as a rcference in
other surveys. Also known as a control point ot control
.rtalion in some proccdures.
Control Segme[t That part of a GPS system which monitors the satellites
(the Space Segment) and feeds information to them. The
NAVSTAR system's Control Seg1nent consists of
monitor stations, upload stations, and a ftastcr control
station. See also Spdce Segnent, User Segrcnl
control surveyiug A type of baseline surveying in which thc relationships
among selected points in a rcgion of interest are
measured with high, repeatable prccision. These points
arc often used as reference harks in a topographic
survey ofthe same area, Because conrol surveying
requircs more precision than topographic surveying and
covers fewer points, it Senemlly uses procedures that are
292 Series 4O0O Beceiver Reforence

Glossary
slower but more accurale. See a,lso baseline suneying;

to?ogra?hic survey.
correckd aDlelna hcight The vertical distance fiom the antenna's phase center to
the ground. Since the corrected antenna height is usually
difficult to measure directly, Series 4000 r€ceivers and
postprocessing software can computc it from an
uncorrected antenna height.
corlectiotr Sce P seudoran ge correction.
cycle (1) One complete wave of a radio siSnal: 36f of phase

shift. (2) Occasionally, a synonym for epocr, the length
of each period in which a GPS receiver makes one set of
satellite measurements.
cycle printout Any of a class of outputs that a Series 21000 receiver
writes to a serial port periodically, in most cases once
pcr cycle (per epoch). You can enable and disable each
type of cycle printout frcm the Cofirral meDu. See also
Ohe-Shot Printout.
cydeslip An interruption in a receivet's lock on a satellite's mdio

signals. Some surveying procedures require an
obse$ation to be resrarted if a cycleslip iempomrily
rcduces tle number of satellites tracked to less than the
minimum required.
dat! logging The process of recording satellite data in a file stored in
the receiver's memory or on a computer's disk. Sec also
Exr?rnal data loeqing a d lntemal dara logging.
dat! logging parsmetars Any of several groups of parameters that affect tie way
a receiver logs data in different procedures. Quick-stan
parameters are used for quick-start static surveys;
session parameters are stored in session definitions for
use in preplanned static suryeys; Faststatic pamneters
arc used in Faststatic surveys; and so on. Each set of
Series z[00O Receiver Beference 293

Glossary
data logging pammetcrs typically includes an elevation

mask, a sync time, and the minimum number ofSVs
required for dala rc be logged. See also Po.ritionirS
datum A model of the earth consisting of an ellipsoid and an

origin. Positions are described by a latitude and
longitude relative to specified point on the surface. The
ellipsoid and origin are Senerally chosen to yield that
most accurate and convenient approximation of the
surface of thc carth for mapping in a pafiicuiar region.
See local datum and WGS-84.
^lso
delta pseudorange corection
The difference between the PRC term fiom the culrent
issue of the data ephemeris (IODE) and the previous
issue. The dPRC allows DGPS rovers that have not
acquired the new ephemeris to continue using the
corrections. Abbreviated dPnC.
delta ratrge rste corEctionThe difference betwcen the range mtc correction (RRC)
Irom the cu.rcnt issue of the data ephemcris (IODE) and
the previous issue, The dRRC allows DGPS rovers that
have not acquired Lhe new ephemeris ro conrinue using
the corrections. Abbreviated dRRC
difrerentiel CPS A positioning procedure that uses two rcceivers, a rover

at an unlnown location and a base station at a known,
fixed location. The base station computcs corections
based on the differences betwcen its actual and observed
ranges to the satellites being tmcked. The coordinates of
the unlnown location can be computed with meterlcvel
precision by applying these corrections to lhe satellite
data reccived by the rovcr. Differential GPS is used for
precision positioning, stakeout, navigation, and GIS
data-acquisition applications. Abbreviated DGPI
294 Series 4000 R6ceiver B€ference

Glo$sary
difierential 6tatior See Rover,
DOP Dlution of precision, a class of rneasures of the

nugnitude of error in CPS position fixes due to the
orientation of the GfS satelliies with respect to the GPS
receiver. Therc arc several DOPS to measure diffcrent
cornponenB of the eror. S@ also GDOP, HDOP,
PDOP, TDOP, VDOP.
DOY Day of the year, a number from 1 to 365 (366 in leap
years). AIso known as a 'Tulian day."
dPRC See Delta pseudorange correction.
dRRC Sea Delta rangc rate cofiection,

dual-frcqueEcy Usidg both the Ll and L2 signals ftom GPS satellites.
Used ro describe S€ries 4mO rcceivers, aDtennas,
procedues, eta. A dual-frEqueDcy receivcr can compute
more precise position fixes over longer distances and
under morc adverse conditions by rDeasuring and
compensating for ionospheric delay error6. Sce also
Singb-frequency,
earth.cetrtered errth-fixed A Cafiesian coordinate system used for satellite
positioning, Abbr€viated ECEF. The ECEF coordinate
syst€m's origin is at the earth's ceDter of mass. The z axis
is coincidant with the mean rotational axis of the ealth,
with positive values to the north. The r aiis passes
throuSh 0 N, fq with positive values in that direction.
i
The, axis is perpendicular to the plane of the and
z axes, with positivc values to the directio[ off N,
9fW. The wcs 84 datum is defmed with rEferenc€ to
the ECEF coordinate system.
eardDg Se€ IVEE

EI,EV Elevatiofi the angle ftom the horizon to the observed
position of a satellite.
Sed€s 4000 Receivor Referonce 295

Glossary
elevatlotr mask A parameter that specifies a minimum elevation at

which the recciver will track a satellite.
elllpsoid A mathematical figure generated by rotating an ellipse
on ils minor axis. Geodetic suweying operations use an
ellipsoid as a modolofthe surface ofthe earth;the
minor axis represcnts the earth's aris of rotalion. See
also Reference e ll i psoid.
ephemeris A set of data that describes the position of a celestial

object as a function of tifirc. The plnral is ephemetides.
Each GPS satcllite periodically Eansmits a ,roalcarl
epheneris descibing ils pr€dioed positions throu8h the
near futurc, uploaded by the Contlol Segment.
Postprocessing programs can also usc aprccir?
ephemeis *hich descibes the exac! positions of a
satellite at rclevant times in the past.
epoch The measurcment interval used by a GPS rcceiver; also
called a clcle. Satcllilc Dreasunemcnts, position fix
computations, and most cycle printouts are produced
once per epoch.
everl msrk A record of the occudenco of an event, such as the
closing of a photogiammetric camera's shuttcr. A
receiver carl log an event mark containing the limc of the
event and an alphanumeric conrment entered through lhe
keypad to describe the event. An cvcnt can t e ErgSered
through the keypad or by an elecEical signal input on
one of thc rccciver's ports.
exterDsl data logginS The process of rccording observation data diectly to a

computer's disk. The dala is transfe[ed from the receiver
to the computer as it is generated, through thcir
rcspectivc serial pons.
Fastststic surveying A surveying procedure that prcduces precise rcsults
suitable for control surveys. Faststatic surveying can be
296 Series 4000 R6c6ivor Reference

Glossary
somewhat less precise than static suiveying, but lequhes

substantially Iess time.
field notcr In Series 4000 terminology, a.lph.mumeric notes entered
f
in a data log e dudng the data logging Focess, rrhich
apply to the data logging session as a whole.
frle A collection ofrelated data storcd in a computer system

or similar device, Computers customarily stoE frlcs on
magnetic disk. A receiver equipped with the Memory
Option can log &ta in files storEd in battery-powered
random access memory (RAM) even when the receiver
is tumed off.
flow cotrtrol A merns of coordinating two conmunicating devices so

that one transmits data only whcn the other is prepar€d
to receive it. The Series 40m rcceiver suppolts
xoN/xoFF flow contol on all serial ports, and also
supports CTS/RTS flow conrol on ports 2 and 4 (if
iDstalled).
GDOP Geometric dilution ofprecision, an ovcrall melsue of

the magnitude of DOP errors in GPS position fixes,
PDOP and TDOP are componenb of GDOP. See also
DOP.
geodetic position The coordinates of a nradg masurcd with tefercnce to a
delined ellipsoid.
geoid The gravity-equipotential surface that best approximates
mean sea levcl over the entire sudace of the errth.
Sories 40m Becsiver Reference N7

Glossary
GIS dat! acqulsitlon An application in which a receiver collects position data

for a geographic information system (CIS) database.
GIS data acquisition is similarto logging position fixes,
except that the receiver also collects attribute
information about points of interest (such as
identification numbers or sueet names) as well as
coordinates.
GMT Greenwich Mean Time.

GPS Clobal Positioning Sysremi the navigation/posirior nE
systcm consisting of NAVSTAR satellires, their ground
stations, ard 6PS receivers such as the Series 4000.
GPS time A measurc of time used intemally by the NAVSTAR

system. GPS tinie is bascd on UTC, but does not add
periodic "leap secoDds" to correct for changes in the
Earth's period of rotation. As of t5 July 1993, GPS rime
was 9 seconds ahead of tl-l'C.
cRs-m Geodetic Rcference System of I 980; an oblate ellipsoid,

or ellipsoid of revolution, on which the North American
Datum of 1983 (NAD83) is based. This datum has the
same semi-rnajor and scmi-minor axis as WGS-84 (the
rEference cllpsoid for GPS) and differs slighdy only in
the flattening (U0-
IIDOP Horizontal dilution of prccision; a measure of the
magnitude of DOP erlols in latitude and longitude. See
also DOP.
HI The height of a OPS antenna above a point of interest.

HI is pronounced "antenna height." It was originally an
abbreviation for "height of insfirment." See also
Coftected antenna heieht and Uncorrected antenna
height.
HVEL Horizontal velocity.
298 Sedes 4000 Receivor Heterence

Glossary
interEal dstr logging The process of rccording data in a receiver's intemal

memory. LogSed data must be downloaded to a
coEputer's hard disk for postprocessing.
Issue ofdata ephemeris A value idcntifying a version ofan ephemeris.
Abbreviarcd ,ODE
Julian date A datc exprcsscd as a year and thc number of the day
within the year. For example, January I , I 994 exprcssed
as a Julian date is '94001'; February l, 1994 is '94032' .
The day is known as a Julian day, or day of year (DOY).
klnematic alarm An alarm that a recciver sounds during kinematic or
a
RTK surveyinS procedurc if the procedurc is interrupted
by hiSh PDOP or loss ofsatellite lock.
kineinadc slrveyirg A survcying procedure in which used primalily for
topographic surveying. Kinemalic survcying is an
cfficient means of conducting a topographic survey, but
it is sensilive to high PDOP and loss ofsatellite lock.
See also Continuous kinematic suneting ali,d, Stop-and-
go kinematic suneyinq.
LI The primary L-band carrier used by GPS satellites to

Eansmit satellitc dat& Its frequency is 1575.42MHz.lt
is modulated by C/A code, P-code, and a 50 biy'second
Navigation Message.
L2 Tlte secondary L-band carrier us€d by GPS satellites to
tmnsmit satcllite data. Its frequency is 1227.6 MHz. Ir is
modulated by P-code and a 50 biy'second Navigation
MessaSe.
latiaude The north/south component of the coordinate ofa point

on thc surface of the eanh; expressed as an angular
measunement fiom ihc plane of the equator to a line
ftom the ccnter of the earth to the point of intcrest. Often
abbreviatcd LAT.
Sedes 4000 Receiver Referenc€ 299

Glossary
htitude./tongihrde/hcight A method of describing a position by its latitude and

longitude on a datum. Abbreviaied LLH. See also
No rt hin B/e as t in g/he i I ln,
Lc.D Liquid crystal display.

lespfrog kinemstic survcyiE8
A type of kinematic surveying in which the bas€ station
and rover trade roles during the survey. It can be uled to
conduct surveys over a larger region thaa can radial-arm
surveying, fur which a single stationary receiver rctains
the rcle of base station throughout. I-€apfrog kinematic
surveying is not desclib€d in this book.
LED Light-emitting diode.
LLH See l,at i tude/lon gi tude/hz i I ht.
Iocal dstum A datum thal is designed for accuracy atrd convenience

in surveying in a particular locality. In Series 4000
docurnentation, any datum o{her tha[ the wcs-84 datum
is considercd a local dalufi.
locsl rone A projection ofa local datum onto a planc, with
positions expEss€d as northiDgs and eastings fiom a
specfied origin on the plane; also, the rcgion in which
such a projection is considetEd Deiningful. Sea also
P roj e c t io n co o rd ihat e s.
lock The state in which a GPS receiver receives and

rEcognizes a saGllite's signals. If the signals are
interrupted, the receiver experiences "loss of lock," a
common cause of intemrption in a kinematic or RTK
survey.
gx) Series rO00 Fl6ceiver Beferonce

Gloss€ry
longitude The east/west component of the coordinate of a point on

the sudace of the earth; expressed as an angul
measurement from the plane that passes through the
earth's axis of rotation and the 0P meridian and the plan
that passes through the axis of rctation and the point of
interest. Often abbreviated LON.
LON Longitudei an abbreviation used in receiver screens.
mark A place occupied by a rcceiver's GPS antenna during an
observation. A mark is customarily "rnarked" before the
survey is performed by a stake, a spot of paint, or other
means. There arc two types of marks: reference marks,
whose coordinates are known, and survey marks, whose
coordinates are to be delermincd. Some recei\,er screens
refer to mark as poinrr ot as rrariorr.
mark lI) An eight-chmactcr code used to identify a mark in a
Fa-ststatic survey. Equivalenr to a poinr [D in a
krnematic survey,
mask See Ekvation Mask PDOP Mask.
mean ses level A model of the earth's surface that represents sea level
averaged over time ar each point; or, the height of the
surface of that model at a given latitude and longitude.
GPS receivers use the OSU-84 reference to define mean
sea level. Abbreviated MSL
multipsth interfer€nce Interference created when a receiver simultancously
detects signals received directly from a Eansritter and
signals reflected off other objects, such as the ground.
Multipath interference is the usual cause of "ghosts" in a
television picture. See also Muhiparh error.
multipsth eftor An error in the position frxes computed by a CPS
recciver, caused by muhipath interference with satellite
signals.
Series 4000 B€ceiver Reference 301

Glossary
NAD-83 A referencc system often used for prccise coordinates in

Nonh America and near-by locations. The term is a
contraction of "North American Datum, 1983."
Throughout North America, NAD-E3 is essentially
equivalent to WcS-84; its predecessor, NAD-27, is not.
NAV BEACON XL A fully automatic madne mdio bcacon sold by Trimble.
It is designed !o interface directly wirh a Series 4000
receiver. It rcceives differential GPS broadcasts
conforming to the Inremational Association of
Lighthouse Authorities (IALA) and ourpurs data in
RTCM SC- I 04 format.
osvigation An applicadon in which a rcceiver provides informalion
about a vehiclc's location and course, helping the
operator ro guidc rhe vehicle to its destination.
Navigation may be done on water or land, or in lhc air.
Series 4(X)0 reccivers can provide navigalion services
with the differcntial GPS and RTK procedures, and with
autonomous positioring.
NAVSTAR fie name of lhe satcllites used in the Global Positioning
System (GPS). It is an acronym for Navigation System
with Time and Ranging.
NEE See No hin9/eastin9/heiIht.
^lso
NGS The United Statcs National ceode(ic Survey, thc
geodetic surveying agency ofthe Uniled States
govemment.
r{MEA4r83 A stardad esablished by the National Marine
ElecEonics Associalion (NMEA) that defines electdcal
siSnals, data transmission protocol, timing, and sentence
formats lor communicating navigation data among
marine navitation instruments. Many Series 40m
neceivers call output slandard NMEA-ol83 messages.
*2 Sedes l()0o Beceiv6r Reference

Glossary
northing See lVEd.
Eorthing/e{stirg/hcight A method of describing a position by its distarce north

and east of the odgin in a local zone. The height is the
sarne as on the datum associated with the zone.
Abheviated NEH. Se€ also /,Lfl.
nomenc mode A receiver mode in which you can enter only numerals
into data fields. You can toggle the keypad between
alphanuureric mode and numeric mode by E€sshg the
F{.Esl key, or the ALPHA/NUMERIC softkey (if it is
ovailable). See also arplanumeic mode.
ohcervadon A set of neaswements made at a ma*
(or, in dynamic
procedurer, while movinS betwe€n marks). GPS
rcceivers pedorm observations by EackinS and
aaa.lyzing ratellite signa.ls.
oocupedon The period duling which a receiver stays at a mark while

making an observation.
one.shot printoBt Any of a class of outputs that a Series 4000 rcceiver
prcduces on a serial porl once, on demand. A onc-shot
printout is equivalent to what computer users call a
reryrt. S@ Cyck Printout.
^l$
(xiM2 Offrce Support Module 2, a power supply, battery
charger, and int€rface device used with Trimble's
portable leceivers.
overdelennlDed solution A solutiotr (a position fix) computcd wilh tracking

information from more than the minimum number of
satellites rcquirEd for lhat type of frl. A receiver caD u$e
the additioDal information to compute a positio! that is
more accumte than 'rvould otherwise bc possible.
S6d6s 4O0O Recoiver Befercnc€ @3

Glossary
P.code "PlEcis€ code" or 'lrotected code"; a pseudorandom

code iansmitted by a NAVSTAR satellite. Each satellite
has a unique code that it modulates onto the Ll and L2
signals. P-code is rcplaced by an encrypted "Y-code"
when Alti-Spoofing is active; Y-code is intended to be
available only to autho zpd (p.imaily military) users.
S* also Coarse/Acquisition code, Anti-Spoofrng, alld,
Y-code.
PDOP Position dilution of precision, a mcasurc of the

Elagnitude of DOP errorc in the t, y, and z cooadinates.
S€e also DOP.
PDOP mask A receiver paramete, specifying a ma{mum PDOP -

value for positioning. When the geonEEic orientation of
the satellites yields a PDOP greater thar the mask value,
the receiver will stop computing position fixes and/or
Iogging satellite measurcments.
poina SeMa*
point lD An eight-character code used to identify a mark in a
kinematic survey; equivalent to a lnalk ID in a
Faststatic survey.
pocitio ng node A mode which specifies the type ofposition fixes a
rcceive! computes. The positioning modes are: auto
3Dl2D, 3D, 2D, and lD. The positioning mode and the
number of available satellites dererEire th€ type of fix
thc rcceiver computes. A rEceiver's positioriDg mode
does not detenDine whether it is logging position fixes.
@4 S6dos 40(}0 Rgcoiver R€lerence

Glossary
posldoElng parameters A group of data logging pamrneters used to compute

DGPS corrEctions or position fixes in renl time.
Elevation mask, sync time, atld reference position are
maintained as positioning paramete$. Series 4000
rEceiveB maintain a s€t of positioning pararEters
through various screens in the Conrro, menu. See also
Data lo gginq paraneters.
postproce6s To process satellite data on a computer after it has been
coltecled. Postprocessing programs compute baselines,
positions, and other rEsults. Trimble offers several
postprocessing proSrams for use in various applicadons
wilh data collected by vadous prcceduEs.
grwer-up porarelers A group of paramctcrs that a receiver catl be configurEd
to rcs€t to their factory default values e3ch tinre the
receive! is powercd up.
PRC See Pteudorahge correctian.
preclse ephemerlf A set of data that describes the exact position of a GPS
satellite over a period of time in the past. See also
b roadcas t ep he mc ri s, ep hz nz r u.
E€cisc pciaionlDg servlce The most prccise level of dynamic position sewice
plovided by GPs, based on the use of dual-ftequency
P-code. This s€rvice is subject to encrJrption, and when
enqypted it is available only to Udted States military
agencies and othe! authorized users. Abbrcviated PPS.
See also standard positioning service.
series 40m R€ceiv€r Rofercnce 305

Glossary
precision positionilg A type of GPS application in which the receiver's

position must be determined precisely, epoch by epoch.
Precision positioning may be used to tmck the position
of a vehicle (such as a crop dusting aircraft) or to control
servomechanisms that maintain the position ofa mobile
object (such as a marine oil exploration platform). Series
4000 receivers use differential GPS to perform precision
positioning with a precision of l-5 meters.
preplanned survey A static survey or other data loSging session which is
prograrnrned into $e receiver through lhc SeJjioris
scrcens to start and stop data logging automatically. See
also Quicktart.
primar'y function keys Six keys in the lower right part of a Series 4000
receiver's keypad,
'rhich represent the rcceiver's six
major functions. The primary function keys are ts'rAltEl ,
tflt{o.o , tco.rrFc&1 , tssstr}61, .[Gt{0}G], a
0{DE:4.
prlEtout A set of data that a receiver writes to one of its sedal
pots, Printouts may bc fed to a printer, or to some other
device such a computer or navigational display. See also
One-Shot Ptintout, CJcle Printout,
PRN Pseudorandom noise, a sequence of binary digits that

appears to be randorily distdbuted but can be exactly
reproduced. Identical PRN sequenccs have a low auto-
correlation value cxcept when they are exactly
coincident. Each GPS satellite $ansmits a unique PRN
in borh C/A and P-codc. CPS receivers use PRNS to
identify and lock onto satellites and to compute their
pseudomnges.
306 Seies 4000 Beceiver Referenco

Glossary
Procedure A well-defined series of steps for performing the

op€rations required by an application. Stadc surveying.
kinematic surveying, and differential GPS are examples
of procedures.
projection A mapping of a set of coordinates frcm a datum to a
plane; or a set of mathematical rules for performing such
a traDslation. Projections are used to create flat maps
that rcpresent the surface of the earth or parts of it. A
Series 4000 receiver uses the definition of a prcjection
to translate position fixes ftom the local datum to the
local zone.
pseudorange The apparent distance frotn a satellite to the phase center
of a GPS receiver's antenna, computcd as the product of
apparent signal propagation time and the spcei of light.
Differcnces betwcen pseudorange and real range are
caused by offsets between the satellite and receiver
clocks, by propagation delays, and by other errors.
pseudorange correction In the RTCM-104 message format, a unit of information
tha! describes the error in a satellite's signal as calculated
by a base station at a known point. Informally callcd a
"corection." Corrections may bc applied to satellite data
collected by a DGPS rover to compute much more
accumte position fixes. Corrections may be broadcast by
mdio for rcal time use, or logged for later use.
Abbreviated PRC
ps€rdostatic sur'veying A sufleying procedure that produces a moderately
prccisc position fix from trro occupations of the same
mark, each lasting about ten minutes, separated by one
to four hours. Pseudostatic surveying is an obsolete
procedure, now largely rcplaced by kinematic surveying.
Se es 4000 Receiver Reference g7

Glossary
quickstart survey A static survey or other data logging session which is

run without first being scheduled through the Serrrbm
screens. See ajiso Preplanhed-
qulckstart parametcrr A group of data logging pamrDeters used to conduct a

quickstaft ltatic surv€y . See also Posilioning
PA r^rnc k f s, s e s s io n ParanAt e f 5.
radial-arm sorveyitrg
A type of surv€ying procedure in which a single base
station reEains at thc same location throughout a
rurvey, alld all baselines are measured 'ladially" ftoEr
that location.
r'aDgc The distance fio(r a sarcllite to an obsefler.
range rate The mte of change in a satellite's range.
range rate oon'ectio! A corectio[ telm that dcscribes the change in a

satellite's signal erro$ over !ime. Abbrcviated RRC.
Xinenatic
Real-Time See Rftr
Eceiver As used in this oanual, 'leceiver" usually r€fe6 to a
Series 4000 CPS rc.eive!. References to other types of
rc.eivers are qualified when confusion is pos6ible-e.9.,
"corrmunicatioDs receiver."
rEfercDce ellilr6rid In geodesy, any ellipsoid whose minor axis is defined as
the Eaith's axis, and whose major axis is defined as
being in the equatorial plane. Many global coordinate
systerns arE based on a reference ellipsoid as a model of
the Earth's sudace. See also WGS-64.
)8 Series 4000 Recelver Reference

Glossary
r€fererce mrrk A mark whose cooldinates are known with suf6cient

accuracy fo! a given pupose. Also, the physical sign
(stake, chalk mark, etc.) used ro indicate the position of
a ma*. Many GPS pEcedures requirc one or morc
rcceivers to occupy rcfercnce marks. Also known in
some prccedues as a relcrerrce poifit or rcference
station.
rrference point See Reference na*
rcference posilion Tte accepted coordinates of a mark over which a
r€ceiver's GPS antenna is set up. The refercnce position
may be entered manually or rnay be derived ftom a
rcceiver'! computed position.
r€ferelce receiver, refenence stltlon
See Base station.
R.F Radio ftequency.
A receiver that collects salellite data at survey marks,

whose coordinates arc to be determined. The temr /ovel
usually rcfers !o the rcceiver's anterma, rengepole or
other support, cables, eic, as well as the receiver itself.
Also known as a &rrve), receiver or differential srarion
in sorne procedurEs.
RPIX)P Relative PDOP; the Domalized accumulated PDOP over
a measurement interval. RPDOP is used as a guide to
the adcquacy of receiver observations during RTK
rreasuiemenls in starrc mode.
RRC See Rante rate correction.
Series ,l{xn Rec\eiver RefurEnce 309

clossary
RTCM SC-f(N A standard fomat for differcntial CPS corrcctionr; used

to tlansmit corrections fiull a trase station to rcvers.
Known infonnally as "RTCM-104." The nsme is a
contlaction of 'Rrdio T..hnictl Corrunission for
Maritihc Scrvicts, Spocial Committer 1M," lhe name
of the group thal defined the statdard.
RTK A surveying or po6itioning piocedu€ that yields vcry
acrurate position fixes in real time. It is similar to the
kinematic suryeying procedurE, but uses a mdio link
between the base station 8nd the mve(6) to allow the
rcvets to computc position fixes in rcil time. Likc
kinedEtic suseying, it is sensitive to high PDOP and
lo6s of sarcllite loclc XfI( is dcrived ftom the phEse
"Real-Time Kinematic."
SA S* Seleaiw Awilability-
srtcllltc d.t The data transnit€d by a GPS satelliG. Also us€d ro
denotc the dota that a rcceiv€r logs in a file; this iDcludcs
dafa that is prEerscd or originated ir rhe rcceiver as
well as dat! receivcd from satcllites.
s.t m. g.oE.ky The relativc positiorN of.vailable cPS sat€llites ar a
given time, ftom the viewpoint of a GPS rcceiver. The
set of pocitioDs that Esult in a high (or loiv) PDOP atl
often described as '!oor (or good) satellitc geometry."
sciedule plot A one-sho! prhtout drsl plots satellitc visibility aSainst
timc for all known satellites over any Urc day.
310 S6ri63 ,IOOO R6c€iv€r R6ler€rlc6

Glossary
Selective Availability A U.S. Department of Defense progmm to limit the

accumcy of autonomous position fixes computed by
unprivileged (civilian) receivers. Selective Availability
works by introducing controlled enors to the GPS
saiellites' C/A codes. When Selective Availability is in
effect, the horizontal coordinates of autonomous
position fixes exhibil enors of up to 100 meters 2D
RMS. Selective Availability is abbreviated SA; do not
confuse it with Anti-Spoofing (AS). See also Anri
Spoofrnq,
Sessron (1) A data logging pedod with a start time, an

obse ation time, an elevation mask, and a type of alata
to be logged (positions and/or satellite data). (2) Any of
30 descriptions of such data logging periods which you
can define in the SesJiors process, and can use to nm
preplanned surveys. (3) A period du ng which data is
logged.
session parameters A group of data logging parameters that are stored in a

session definition for use id preplanned suveys. They
include start and stop times, elevation mask, PDOP,
sync time, mhimum number of satellites required for
data logging, and reference position. A Series 4000
rcceiver maintains one set of su eying parameters for
each defined session, and one set each for each
surveying Procedure. See also Positioning paraheters,
Qui c ks t ar t p a r ah e t e rs.
Sessioru procedure A procedure that defines a session (meaning 2). It is
initiated by the tsEssoEl key.
singte.frequency Using only the L1 carrier phase signal fiom GPS
satellites. Used to describe receivers, :ultennas,
procedues, etc. See also Dual-frequency.
311
Sories 4000 Receiver Reference
SNR A measure ofa satellite's signal strength, expressed in
arbitrary units. SNR is a contraction of 'tignal-to-noise
mtio."
softkey Any of four keys to the right ofa receiver's LCD screen,
whose functions depend on the screen being displayed.
Each screen displays names for the softkey(s) that are
meaningful in tha! context. Trimble documentation
presents softkey names in srnall caps, like this: 'the
ACCEPr softkey."
Space Segment The pan ofthc NAVSTAR CPS sysrem lhat operarcs in
spacc,,.?., the satellites. See also Control Segment, User
SeBment.
special cortrols A group of parameters defined by the Sessiazs

procedure, which affect the way data is logged in a static
survcy or a non-suvey data logging session.
stakeout A type ofapplication in a GPS rcceivcr is used to locate
the points with sF,ecified scts of coordinates. The points
arc then marked (staked out) for later use. Stakeout is
rypically used to prepare a sitc for an engineering
project.
staldard positioning service
The levcl of positioning precision provided by GPS to
civilian usels, based on the use of single-frequency C/A
code. The precision of shndard posilioning service is
limited by Selective Availability. This term is
abbreviated SPs. See also prccis? positioning seruice.
static surveyitrg A suweying procedue that produces very ptecise rcsults

but requircs long occupations, usually about an hour per
survey mark. Because of its high precision, static
surveying is especially suitable for conducting conuol
surveys.
312 Series 40m Beceiver Reference

Glossary
stallon ( l) A receiver
boing used to perform a GPS proc€dure,
together with its antenna, tripod or rangepolc, and so on.
Usually used in phrases lllde base station. (z)'Ihe site
wheie a rcceiver is set up. (3) Any of 30 locations whose
coordinates can be stored in a receiveds memory and
used to spe4ify the location of a receiver in the static and
RTK surveying procedures. (4) A synonym for rra* in
cerrain procedures.
strdoE ID (l) An ciStn-chancter code used to idendry a ma* in a

static survey; equilalent to a ma* ID in a Faststatic
survey. (2) In DGPS or RTK, an identifying number
between 0000 and t(D3 that is entercd at the base station
alld tEnsmitted in the RTCM core.tions. DGPS and
RTK rove$ use the ID to distinguish one base station's
Eansmissions from anothefs.
slop-ard-go Hnamatic aurveyiEg
A variety of kinemalic surveying itr which the rover
stops at each suryey mark for an observation that lasts
about two rdnures. See also Cofitinuous kinenatic
sun elirrt.
surY€y |nsfL A mark whose coordinates are to be &tetudned in the
cou$e of a survey. Also known iD some ptocedutes ac a
sun ey ioint or survey station.
survey polrt, survey strtiolt
Se Swvey nurlc
sv Space vehiclc: spccifrc.ly, a GPS satellite.
Emc tlEe A receiver pamlEter that determhes the length of a

cycle.
mcl See Trimblc Data ColLector.
Sed€6 ,loo0 Rgc€iver Rsferenc!

ctossiry
TDOP Time dilution of precision, a measure of the magnitude

of DOP errors in position fixcs due to uscr clock offset
from GPS time. See also DOP.
timebase A receiver's source of intemal time measurement. All
Series 4000 receivers have an intemal quartz oscillator
timebase. A receiver with the Extemal Frequency Input
Option can also accept signals from a high-precision
extemal timebase such as an atomic clock.
topographic sur'veying An application that determines the relative coordinates
of points in a region of interest for mapping and thrce-
dimensional modeling applications. Sce also corrrol
TOW Time of week: time measurcd in seconds from midnight

Sunday LITC.
tdhrech A centerinS and levelinS device often used for mourting
a GPS antenna or other surveying instrument on a
t ipod.
tracking Receiving and recognizing signals from a satellite. For
example, a receiver might be described as "tracking six
satellites." A rcceiver does not necessarily use the
signals from all of the satellites it is trackingi for
example, signals ftom a satellite below the elevation
mask may be tracked but will not be used.
Trimble Data Colector Any of several handheld devices dcsigned to control a
roving receiver; also uscd for data management. It is
required equipment for RTK surveying, and
recornmended for kinematic surveying. The types of
Trimble Data CollectoN suitable for use with Series
4000 receivers are the Survcy ConEoller, the Seismic
Controller, and the Asset Surveyor. Abbreviated fDC1.
I]DRI See User differential range error,
314 Sories 4000 Receiver Rofer6nce

Glossary
uncorrected antenda height

An antenna's height above the ground as measured
according to a specified procedure, which va es with the
type ofantenna.In most cases the measurement is made
diagonally from the maIk to a designated point on the
antenna's groundpla.ne. Series 4000 receivers can
compute an antenna's true (corrected) height from
measurements of its unconected height.
IIRA An acronym for "User Range Accuracy": a measure of
the erors that may be introduced by satellite problems
and Selcctive Availability if a particular SV is used. A
URA of 32 meters indicates that Selective Availability is
enabled. The URA value is set by the Contsol Segmcnt
and is broadcast by the satellites.
user dmerentlal mnge eiror

A number that describ€s possible errols in RTCM- 104
corrections accordinS to definitions in the RTCM
specifications. A DGPS base station assigns a UDRE
value to thc corrections it generates. Abbrcviated UDRE
User SeSment A collective name lor the GPS receivers that make use
of GPS satellite signals. The world's entirc population of
GPS rcceiver's constitute the User Segment. See also
Control Segment, Space Segment.
Universal Time Coordlnated
A time standard maintained by the United States Naval
observatory, based on local solar mean time at the
Greenwich meridian. Equivalent to Greenwich Mean
Time (GMT). Abbreviated UTC See also GPS,rr€,
VDOP Vertical dilution of precision, a measure of the
magnitude of DOP cnors in the height component of a
position fix. See also DOP.
vvEI, Venical velocity.
Sedes 4000 Beceiver Reforence 315

Glossary
world Geoderic System 1984, the cunent stan'lard

The
datlm for global positioning and surveying
GRs-80 eltiPsoid' For
wii-s+ ao:** l"'uu""a on the
i"i", +OOO t"""lr"tt' nnv datu other than wcs-84 is
known as a "Iocal datum."
in
Y-code An eDcrvDted forro of ihe information contained
p-coae, *tti"t .nrettir* ransmit in Place of P-code at
times rvhen Anti-Spoofrng is in effect'
sedes 4Om Fleceiver ReIorence

316
Bibliography
Asset Suneyor Operation Manual, Tr\mblc PN 20891 (version 1.26, July 1993).
Asset Sutyelor Suic* R4erence Card, Timble PN 20912 (July 193).
Documentarion for the Asset Sulveyor, a handhcld data
collector used in GIS data acquisition.
DelraNat QC Synern Opetution Maauol, Tirnble P/N 21204-00 (revision B, 1993).
Gives instnrctions for using the DeltaNav QC Systcm, a PC-
based softwat prcduct for doing real-time quality assumnce
and quality control (QA/QC) in a navigation system tha!
contains a Series,lO00 CPS receiver.
Difrerential GPS Erplatu€a, Trimble PN 23036 (1993).
A companion to OPS, A Guide to the Next UtiliD (bf.low),
. explaining the topic ofdifferential GPS.
A Field GuidebookJot Sratic Slrryeri,n8, Trimble PA{ 20390 (1991).
A Ficld Guidebookfor Dynarnic Sarrelia8, Trimble PI{ 20391 (192).
Thcse booklcts rcview the principles of static and dynamic
surveying, and describe the process of planning, prcpariDg, atld
performing each type of survcy. They concentate on the
surveyinS procedurcs themselves rather than tlc mechanics of
configuring and operating equipment.
Guidebooks for additional surveying procedures are in
developrnenti consuh your Trimble sales r€presentative for
cur€nt information.
Serios .!000 B€ceivor Reference 317

Biblioqraphy
4000MSK DGPS Reference Station Addendum to the Series 4dnSSE User Cuide
(December 1993, no pan number).
Model-specific information for the ,I000MSK; a supplement to
the 4000SSE User Cuide, &lov, .
4000SSE User Guide, Trimble P/N 23863-00 (March 1994).
Model-specilic information for the 4000SSE.

4Un SSi User Cuide, "fimble P^\{ 26509-m (February 1995).
Model specific information for the 400oSSi.
4UnS Interface Dota Collectot Fomot Specilications Manual
SSE RS-232
Trimble P/N 22794-00 (revision B, January 1994).
Dcscribes the series 4000's Data Collector Cohpatible
Protocol, used to communicate wilh Trimblc handheld data
loSSers and to rnake rEceiver fimwar€ updatcs. This manual is
useful primarily to progr-ammels.
General Reference lor the GPS Pathlinder Systen, Trimble P/N I 8470-00
(Septcmber 1992).
A rcfercnce manual for the PFINDER progiam as well as the

Pathfinder r€ceiver.
GIS SuneJor System Overvi.r.r, Trimble P/N 222524 (1993),
A complete description of GIS data acquisition. Nominally

written for the CIS System Surveyor, bur applies to all Series
40m receivers that can serve this application. Covers concepts,
proje.t planning, usc of the Asset Surveyor, and associated
computer software, as well as operation of thc receiver itseli
cPload User Guide, Timble P/N 2,1478-00 (February 1994).
A guide to $e use of GP[,oad, a computer program for

Uansferring dara bctwe€n a computer and a Series zl(X)o rcceiver
or data collector. Note that GPLoad is a codponent of
GPsurvey, although it rnay also b€ run indcpendently; this
314 Sl€d6s 4Om R6c6lver Reference

Bibliography
manual is for GPlrad run independently of CPsurvey. The

GPSurvey Sofware Userli Gurde documents the use of GPLoad
in the context of GPSurvey.
GPS, A Cuide to the Next Uririry, Trimble PIN 18239 (1992).
A short, non-technical intioduction to GPS. Explains what GPS
does, how it works, and what its capabilities and limitalions
are.
GPSuney General Refererce, Trimblc P/N 20827 N (J]ulf 1992').

GPSumey Software User's Guide, Volume I,'ftimble PN 20829-00 (July 1992).
GPSuney Softv)are User's Guide, Volume II,Trimble PN 21067-00 (July 1992).
These manuals constitute the documentation for GPsurvey, a
suitc of Microsoft windows applications and utilities for
postprocessing static and Faststatic survey data. They include
documentation for the GPsurvey utilities, one of which
(QuickPlan) is also available as a separate product. They are
sold as a set, together wlth GPSuree! Release Notes, as
PN 20484-01.
cuide to GPS Positionin& David Wells (editor), Canadian GPS Associates (1986).
A comprehensive inloduction to thc principles and applications
of CPS. While this book s perspective and terminology are
outdated, it remains a standard work in the field. The papen
cover a spectflm from highly conceptual to highly technical.
Local Dafi/m and Zones Oplion: Software Relcase Nores, Trimble P/N 23?75-00
(1993).
Describ€s the concepts tiat underlie the I-ocal Datumzones

feature, ard the DATM4000 program, which is used to
download a specific local datum and local zone definition to a
Sedes 4{)0{) Roceiver Reference 319

Bibliography
Model 4000 Remote Control lhterface Operation Manual,'frijnblePN 12693

(revision D, April 1990).
Describes the Series 4m0's Remote Control IDterface, which
allows other devices to conEol the receiver and request data
from it through a serial port. This manual is useful to
programmers who want to write software that controls a series
4000 receiver from a computer or other device.
Note dlat the Remote Control Interface is an obsolete protocol.

Trimble recommcnds using the Data Collector Compatible
Protocol for new applications. See the 40OOS SSE RS-232
Interface Data Collector Format Specifcatiohs Manual fot
inforrnation.
NAV BEACON XLOperators Mahu , Tritr.ble PN 21458-00 (July l99l).
Describes the operatiod of the NAV BEACoN xL receiver.
NAVSTAR GPS Space Segment: Navigatioh User Interfaces, drawineflumbet
ICD GPS-200 (3 July l99l).
The official definition of the data formats used in NAVSTAR
GPS satellite siSnals. The documcnt is published in two
ve$ions: a public release version that excludes classified
information about P-code. and a controlled release version that
includes the classified information. The public release version
is distributed by the United States Coast Guard. Write or call:
Commanding Officer
USCG ONSCEN
7323 TeleSraph Road
Alexandria, VA 22310
(703) 313-s900
PFINDER Sofrware Reference, Tiimble PN 20618-00 (September I 992).

PFINDER Sofiware User'r G(ide, Trimble P/N 18473-00 (September 1992).
Describe PFINTDER, a program used to define data dictionaries

and postprocess data for GIS data acquisition. It can also bc
320 Sedes 4000 Receiver Beference

Bibliograptry
used to poslprocess other DGPS data. For additional

infonnation about PFINDER , s4 the Geneml Reference for thc
GPS Pathfrdcr StstenL
POSI-NAV II Diterential GPS Pott-Mission Navigation Sofware User Manual,

Trimble P/N 21316 (revision A, July 1992).
Describes POST-NAV II, Trimble's postprocessing program for
precision positioning applications.
Scties,tUn QuicL Rele nce Scri.s-

These ale short documents designed to pres€nt often-ne€ded
information in a convenient, rcadily used format. They ale
small enough to fit in a shirt pocket. The ones that describe
field procedures arc printed on durable, water-rcsistant paper.
Faststatic Surtey Quick R*rence, Tiroble PIN 2416840
(January 1994).
Kinernatic Survey Quick Refercnce,'Ilimble PN 24169-00

(January 194).
Static Sw"vey Quick Refer€nce, Trimble P/N 2416740
(Jaruary 1994).
Recontmendations of Swciol Cornmiftee lU, Differcntial NAVSTAR/GPS Senice,
Draft of Novemb€r 20, 1985.
Defines Version 1 .0 of the RTCM message protocol. It can be
obt.ined ftom lhe publisheE
Radio Technical Commission for Madtime Services
Post Office Box 19087
Walhingron, DC 20036
Telephone: 2(D-639-4006
Saries 4om Receiver Refer6nc6

Biblioqraphy
RTCM Recor lnended Standards for DWre tial NAyS?AR GPS Servi.s, RTCM
Paper 134-89 / SC 104-68, Trimble P,4\1 19454 (January l, 1990).
Defines Ve$ion 2.0 of thc RTCM message protocol. It can be
obtained from the publisher (at the address given for Version
1.0, above) as well as ftom Trimble.
Series 4000 Application Guide, Timble PN 27249-00 (February I995).

Instructions for using a Series 4000 to perform the various
procedures it is capable of performing. Assumes basic
familiality with the receiver's operation, obtainable lrom the
U se r's G uide.
^ppropi4te
Site Surretor System Release Notes,'f,irnblePlN 23015-00 (JuDe 1993).
Describes procedures for performing a Rcal-Time Kinematic

(RTK) survey with a Series 4000 receiver and a Survey
Controller.
Sun)e! Controller Operation Manual, TimblePN 21822 (version 2.00, July 1993)-
Describes thc usc of thc Suryey Controller and the Seismic
Controller, two varieties of handheld data collector for Series
4000 re.civers. These devices enable you to operatc a receiver
while carrjiing it in a backpack, and provide an alphanumeric
keyboard for easier data cntry. They are convenience for many
kinds of field work, and a necessity for some.
Vcrsion 2.00 of this manual contains useful inforrMtion about
Rcal-Time Kinematic (RTK) surveying, for which a Survey
CoD[oller or Seismic Controller is rcquired cquipment.
Trinble Navigation DeltaNav QC Ststem Operotion Manual, TimbleP^{ 21204
(revision B, 1993).
Cives instmctions forusing the DeltaNav QC System, a PC-
based softwarc product for doing real time quality assurancc
and qualiry control (QA/QC) in a navigation sysrem that
contaiff a Series 4000 GPS recciver.
a2 Serios 4000 Receiver Reference

Bibliography
TRIMMAP Sune! Sofih,arc General Rclerence Grrze, Trimble P/N 22060 (version
5.00, February 1993).
User manual for TRMMAP, a DOS application that prEparrs
naps fiom loggcd position fixes.
TRIMNET Suney Network Sofiware User's Manual Trirnble P/N 16536 (rcvision B,
January l99l).
User manual for TRMNET, a DOS application that does least-
squares adjustment on a nct*ork of position fixes in a suwey.
TRIMNET is included in the TRMVEC Plus package.
TRIMNET Plus Survey Network SoJtware User's Manlol Trimble P/N 19043
(levision A, November l99l).
User manual for TRIMNET Plus, an enhanced version of
TRIMNET (above) thal is included in the GPsurvey packagc.
TRIMI:ALK 9AO Operation Manual, Tifible PIN 2l22GO0 (rcvision B,
August 1993).
User manual for the TRIMTAIX 9m, a short-range radio
intended for lintinS rcceive$ for RTK surveying.
TRIMVEC PhLt GPS Survey Sortwore User's Maaual a"d Tecluicdl R4erence Guide,
Trimble P/N 12351 (tevision D1, February 1991).
Uscr manual for TRIMVBC Plus, a DOS application which do€s
postprocessing for kinematic and static su eys, and processes
static surveys with multiple base stations.
URS for DOS Software Manual, Tlifible PIN 2225240 (version l.m, March 1993).
URS fot DOS Solvrare Maiual Release Notes, no part num&r (vc6ion I .02, August
r993).
Operation mrnual for URS for DOS, a Plogram used for
extemal data loSSing in differEntial CPS and GIS data
acquisition.
Seriea ,lO0O Becglver R€ference 323

Bibliograplv
ill,I]le
I- ltine Radio Connunication Syste,|s $)ith CPS Sur''etinT Receivrs'
T
ti""*r." n +f-Of t-m82 (revision A, February 1993)'

measures you can takelo
This brief docutrren! suggests some
wlth rado
deal with interference when usfug GPS receive$
linkr'
S6de€ 4OoO Receiver Relorence

94
lndex
<d>Y.y..l4,U,E Aurooonolrs p6itioDilg . 37, 96 I 14

I PPS Or$ur Option . 2lE Auto-suwcy timcr. lt5,2(n. Zb
l2ol.nrEl OFioD . 2r5 AI,x co@€.r.. . 232. 235
,m s.ri6 nod.l dc.diFioLr . 3 A.iDurh of s.r.lli& . 4l, 2112
4mE Led Survcym.5, 122

B
A
B!*li8hr for LCD ' 137
AC INPUTcor61tr.222 BE.r,tio
ACtEPTsoftLy.2S DGPS .59, 89, 98
A8r Linit panrncr.r.96,96 RTK. 67, l0r, r03
AhE.l42 Brtcry
Al,,,,E,rc.2!),276 (5ffging,rd pow.r ouel,t f.r!rl!. 38,
ALPHATly.l63l 138
AUTIA/NUMERIC .o&y . 31 Ho* Io ctsgc . r2l, 225
AbhrDoD..i. drlt dy ir Eod.[ r.tlll Brud r c
.!i"8. r45 Hoerola.lro
Alph.rrD.ric d.E, ctrt iiry.27,3o Fonn:bL vdu6.229
Alrib*. Sa H.ighr RTCM Bir Rxe p.r!m.r.r.9l
Altitud. R.f.rEtrcc potatDct r . 142 B€cp.r
Ani€rmr iofdDiion por.Dcr.r! Evcin md(.r. 132
CSrnSiDg . ml hcgdty (siSDa v..lu€) . 143
EntdinS.l?1,1E6,203 KcyFr.s and cyclc. l4l
Atrt.rn , .lrtr! i('lEco indicatfi for . 38 Ktn@iric Alun . r42
ADti'Spoo6.S. 72, 124 RTCM-104 tuc.ilgc.g7
Ary Dly rt Spccifid Tiltr. s.slion. l5l, 175, Bmrdlrlt D.!! Firtout ' 75. 239
l&t,lt?
Sed€s 4@O Roc€ivsr R€ferg,rco s25

lndex
c Data lorAjDS
Auto-survey timcr. I85
CI A .& . 5,71,, 123
CoEpacr & 9alldad fonnar. 122
Cablc
ConEolli4 a session x,ith Suvcy screen .
Anterma.226,233 193
Pa et.221,222 Definirg stltioDs & sesuions . 149. 154
Scrial data r 230. 232
Effcd on oulr operations. 192
Carri.r Phasc Option . 3, 72, 216 Endins a session . 202
CLEAR key . 16, 19,23,25 Eve marks 198
'
c1ca!-to-S.rdTrnamir D€l.y pa(@.t t . 93 Ficld notes . 199
Cloct-only positioi fii . 254
Coars./Acquisitioo code . Si. (yA codc Mah stltus scrccns .35
Cotnpl(l fGdnt data logging . 5, 122 RcsulB fiom prcvious survcy . 189
ComBct Me{surEmcnts cycl. prin@ut . 258 Sudace Met Data . 199
Cotrcis. fornat for RT Suv.y Dara cycle T,"c ofdata logged. 158, l9o
Printout . 128, 269 DaG. See Time
DATM(no prograrn . 140,317
. AUx po.t.233 D€fault conEols 133 .
D€fault param.ter valu.s . 105, 133, 209
s.rial pons. 221, 228, 233 Dclla psrdor rgc drEriotr . 60
mNTROLIy.15,8l Dclta ringc ra& con dion . 60
Crcrs-Conehtion Optioa . 4,43, r2l, 124. DitrqEntirl GPS (DcPs)
216 Bs!. siatioD . 35, 89
GoxHr.ck.rror display. 5r Mlin srrtur sclren . 37
CTS|->XMT Dclry perame&r . 93 Rovcl.35,95
Cyclc printout . ,tde aJra Printout Stadc iurvcyin8 at srmc time ac .94
ASCII & bioary foDr&s . 250 DOP ruristica , 43
control of . 126 Dual-Frequ€ncy Ortion . 72
DcsatiptioDs of. 252 Dcfincd.215
Notatior tu fomat tabl€s . 251 ELYIAZM scr.En,42
Typ6 of.249 M.in Status scr!.[ .,()
R.clivcr mod.ls wilb . 3
D Tnckins DrnDet rs . 123
DAT filo . 269

Data cable d.$riptiN & pirout!.230
326 S€des 4000 Receiver Retarerlc€

lndex
E Status scr.en . 183

Fi€ld notos . 199
Elevatid Malk paftlctd Filcs
FastsLtic suvey. 190
Dcl€ting & recovering . E5, &7
Ktucmltic survcy . l9o
Positioning.95,114 How named . 174, 204
Prcplanned slalic surv€y ' 95, I 14, 16l Renuing.20l
Quicktan shtic swcy.95, I14, 190 Summary of. 83
ElevadoE of sa&llitc . 76 Fixcd bcight po6ition fixca. I 18
Ser Info slrtlss show . 74 Fix.d LAT/LON positior iucs . I 18
Sat litc Elcvation Plot printout ' 242 Flow cobEol . .t d Scrial pon
sutus scros show ! 4l Four S.rial Pon Optioo.2l7, 228, 233
ENERrcy.1622,26
EpbcEdis . 60, 239, 260
EVENI MARKER comecte . 235
G
Event M'rk r Input Option. l3l, 198,218, GPS time . lo9,296
235 GPsrrvcy po6lprsccsiing Fo8te. r22, l3l
EXT REFco rcctn . 236
Ett.rnal Fr.qucrcy Itrput Option . 129. 218, H
236
Hdf-wlvc 12 Op.ion.216
Hc.lth srao.ls of satcllite! . 42, 77. 108
F
Hcisht
Faciory dcfaul! parlmad valuca . S.. D€faul! Altilu& Ref@c. parancter . 142
RTK nflcyi!9. 104

Aborting obs.rv.tioi . 203 swcy paramet rs . 171,201,203
Stalic
Ant€nna parinct€rs . 201 Unibofmeasure.l39
Control parrmctcls . 191 Fixcd-hcishl position fir€s . 118
Cr€atins nDltiplc dlla fil6. 184 Ooc-dimcDsioDal ( lD) positior fir€s . I l8
EDdiag ' 2O2 Refselcc positioD scts . 112
Mlin lcre€n . 176, 194 Souco for dara logginS , 159
P$itionirg mode ftrced io Auro 3D/2D. gicrnrchic scr€m $rudurc . l7
ltg
Saviry ba(..y po*.r . 184
slrni!8 . 176
Series rK)00 R€coiver Roference @7

lndox
I L.E.lD.tu\"Zo6. 16, 14/J, 26i1, 317

LOG DATA t y. 15, 164
I/o2conncctn.l2O Log D ascr!.n.l6a
Intlgrity alam . t43 lrgging dalr. S.. Dara lo$in8
IomsplEric & UTC Drll piinar . 76, 241 lrb, nca,irg of . 251
IoD@.ric &liy . I lq 216 260
Issuc ofd.ta cptEr cris . 60
M
K Main stllus scrc€m.35
Mlst & SFc Tim p.rdD.t6 . I 14
Kcyp.d . 14 Marw.l L.b.oloS, . 2, 65
Kindntic Fumtiom Option . 122,2t8
M.asurcmcnt Typc pdamctcr . l7l
Abortins cbs..v ior. m3 Mcmay Option. 83, l3l, 216
t a Dd. Lcy filD.donal o'Jy wirb . 167
Ant.nD p'rand.t.. ml McDGy, anouDa EmatuiDa . 174
Cootiruous.29O Mcuu, how to u.c. 21
CorEol paramcr,crs . l9l
Minirnun SVs puuret r.16l,190
tutiry2l,/2 MODIFYI y.16,135
Mrir scr.c,t . 179, 195
Po6itimirg mod. fsErd ro Auro 3D2D . N
ll9
Suning . 179 NAD-83 & NAD.27 drlrm& rrfaEtlc
Slop-.Dd-go . l8l positioos ia' I 13
NAV Di.phy Unit cycL Fido)t . 258
L NAV BEACON XL !.aDr scr.rD.6l
N.vigltion
Ll . S,, Singlc-filqudEy Rlrgc & bc.dn8 comFr.d ftom rcf€t!{Ec
Ltt2P4od€q;q.72,216 position . I 12
12. Sa Dud-nqudy
12 P-codc Oplion' I l7 Navigriion Cdcuhtio6 cyclc Finiotll . 256
t2 P.Cod. Opdo . 72, 216 N$iguior P.cr.8c oFioD . 5O,218,n4
12 tr&kint p.rlmctlfs. 123 Nlvigatioo Typc 2 crclc pdatout . 266
IJCDp. I.rcs.I37 NMEA{183 mc.!.96 . 125, 273
L.8lirc.50 NMEA{183 otrQui Option. 218
lr.d Drhrin/Zonc PoB cycL FitrbU . 267 Null nod.h .!bl. . 231
@8 S€d€€ .lo0o Heceivgr Rofer€nco

lndex
Numcric data, .ntcring . 25, 30 hcd pat'lmr,oFs . 46 lzlo

Ovgdct rmiDcd.46, 119, 158
o Typcs of .
117, 158,254
Fosition Qurlity Siats cycle priniout . 260
Office Suppod Module 2 (OSM2) . 139
POSITION screen . 43
Onc. ai Spc.ifi.d Dno rnd Tim. scssion. Position staristics . zl4
161,175, 185 pri out.266
Position Typc 2 ctcle
One puls€/s€aond (1 PPS) ouFut. l3o,232 Positiooirg mode . 159
Onc-dincftional (1D) position fixcs. rlE
Posftioniug nodc painmelcr! . I 16
Options (optioDar fao[$) .70.215. Scc a15o
Positiontna p'r.mcrcn. 114. l17
individual opdors by nam.
Ovcrdctc.niDd pGition fir . 46' I 19, 158
Batt ry, how l,o cha{c . 25
Co rol pffamcters . 120
P Ext rnal €quipment ftom rcceivo. l2l
Paramctcrs . .t?? Default parrm.tcr valucs; Frihne during daln loggiag . 2O5
Mlir statu3 screcn indlcaoors .38
individo.l paramcters by nime
slalus display ' 138
P{od.
FOWER comc.lor . 22O
L2 rnd LtlL2 P-Cod! Optiors .72
POWER kcy . 15
Powd-up patmcids . lO5, 133
crGs-conclation . 4, 43
. PrEplanr.d $rdc ,rrvcy . S.. arro Stltic
Lr[2 Opcration scrccn 123
Optioc rcld.d to. 216
PDOP
A ctrna panm.t rs.201
Poo. PDOP tin.,ldic alatm 142 . Aulcswcy tim.r. 185
DcfEed . 147
RPDOP (r.larivc PDOP) . 66
PDOP nsk p@mcter . I 14 Dcfirdlg !.6sio. 149
PIots
Du$tion. 16l,175,187
How filc is nrm€d. 2(x
Sat lite ElcvatioD . 76, 242
.76 Maitr srdus sdEcns . 39
Schdurc PIot for All Sat llites 245
Poor PDOP d'!D . 142
stlnirg ' 170
. Primary fimction keys ' 15
Ponablc reccrvqs 14
Position Calculatiotrs cycle prhtour . 252
Broadc$t Data.76.239
Compect M.rsutaDmt! . 258
Diff@nti.l GPS b G st tioD des nol
Ioiospbsic & Urc Dlu.76,241
S€rio6 4000 R€ceiver Roference 349

lndex
lrcalDaturn ncPos.267 R
NAY Display Udl . 25E
Navigatim Calolilius . 256 Rack-mounl.d rcceivd. 13
NavigidonTypc2.265 Radio, NAV BEACON )(-.6r

NMEA-183 . 273 Range & bc$ing display.5l
Pocition CalcularioN . 252 Range rne corrcction . 60
Poritiotr Quslily Srais . 260 Raw Ll Dara Mcssage printout.263

P6itionType2.266 Ra$, McBuEmmB clrlc pdtrtoul . 258
R.w Ll Data Messacc . 263
Raw Masureftents , 258 Positionirg pstmctcrs. I 14
Rc..ivd Sctup Info . ?6. 246 Refc,lEc po6itior prnmd.( ' I 12
RT Surv.y Data . 128, 269 R.d-Timc KiDcmaric suflcy. Sa RTK
RTCII4Jo4 Input & Outpd. m, 97, 271
SaGIitc Elcvation Plot . 76, 242 R€cciv.r Sct p Info prifiour.76, 246
sch.dule Ptot f.r AI Sa&Iit i.76, 245
Siigle-shot Finrolrls . 238 NaviSarion r.ng. & b€arin8 usc . t 12
P6.ldorudom rcise (Pl]l]) cod. . 255

Ps.uddngc @E@tioD. 60, 159 Contol mdu s4s . I 12
Ps.udstatic swcying. 305 Position fir.s colnpncd fiom. I 16
PWR - VO 1 conn€ctor. lm, 221 PrirlouB colllput d too.23. 245

PWR 2&3 comcdor. l2O. 139. 221 Raryc & bearinS coEpul.d AoE . I 12
sd Info s.rc.ns use . 75, 77
o Quick trrt itatic sun€y. 169

RTK. 66, 60, 102, 103
QA/QC Option .46. 143,218, 2m . 152. 159
Se3sion definition
QDictPlr! software, documdtalion for. 317 Slatic survcy .94
Quickstan sratic survcy. Srd a.tuo sratic Rcnot€ Downl@d Optim. 1zl4.2lE
R€motc i 6faco protocol paltrcllr. III
AnEnna plramclcrs .201
Ending ' 292 R€durdto Mart al.r . 142
Main status scaecns . 39 Risdsc1 timee . 76, 245
P6itioDinS Eode fsld io Auto 3D12D .
119 Diffcr.ntiat GPS .35, 95
Quicl$an cooEols . l9l RTK. 105
Stlrting . 169 RPDOP (rclative PDoP) . 66
3go Serieg 4O0o Bec€iver Retor€me

lnd6x
RS-232. Se, Scrial pon Ris.r'sd tirn s.76

RTSuvcy D.t! sycl. pri ou.r28,269 Sar.Iir. El.vrtion Firtour . 76. 242
Ploa
RTCM{04 Sct€dlc Ploa f6 All s1!tlit6 . 76. 245
Cl..r-lo{.drEu$it &hy . 93 SV imbds of sr.llit.. rr&L.d . 36
Cyclc lrintour . 90, ?7l U!.r R Dgc A..t[ry (URA) st tistica . ?8
InFt & OuQui cyclc FiD.ouls . 271 slr.llirc drl! . 308
InDut prf.macE . 95 Sn llic Elevltion PIot prirl,out.76, 242
Oueut m$srg. !.hcdulc. 91, 94 Schedule Plot f6 All Sdcllhcs . 76, 245
Output p.rlmctcr! . 88 Sctt€ns, cxpl&dion of . 16
sutur.5t S.lcctivc Avaihbility
Typc 16 (rp.cid drr.) m.s*8r.93 URA vduc tudic-aLr . 42
Typc 9 Ecxsrgc . 90, 97 Scdal port
VcrsioDs lO& 2.0.90,97 Baud..t & formitpdtr r.B.Ito
RTCM- 104 InFr OFioD . 95, 2r7 C.blcs f.r . 23O
RTCM- l(x OutFt Oprion . 35, tt. 217
RTK Fondioru OFim . 2lE Fdltrrr cbrrB! mer$rE . 23O
RTK $rvcy PtDod! .221,228, 233
Alun. 142
Fixcd & Floai slutioB. 67 Dcfrning ' 154
Fixcd and Flolt solutiotrs . 254 sch.doling . 160
InitiilizinS rov.r . 6E SEting &l! loggiDg wilh. l7O
hcition CdcrrldioB cyclc Finiour . 254 Scseion ID. 155, l7l
t.@ & SEIi. ,nod. . 67
Snllt scr!.[r . 63 H.i8ht . 159
RTK U3in8 RTCM . 99 M[rL," syn dDc, ac.16l
Foeition typ€ . 159
s RcfdEn@ position . r52
.
SESSIoNS x€y 15, 147
SAT INFO kcy . 15.73 ScsiioDs s.Ecns . 147
s.r.llir. SiSDr vdues . 43, 143
Elcvrtiotr of . 76 SigDrl-lo-noisc ntio (SNR) .42, 256
EDrblirrdblbling ficking of. lor Sild+aDq!ary
H..lth 3cr! n.7. 106 Option s.r.cr !how3.71
IDrlt[lrioo !s.ca . 74 R.cciv.r modcb .5,6
Md! & SyE TiE ps.m.r..s. 16l, r9O Tjr..riry Fr.ma..r . 123
S6ri€3 {O0O Fl6c6iver Relerence &t1

lbx
SiDglc-chot prhlour . J.. abo Prinlour Rchtior of tnc !o cPS timc . 296
S th Observrblc l! hnologjr.4 Timc t gs wirh I puhds.c&d ou$ur. 130,
Sonbr!. 14,24
Shrdrrd f6m.l d.u loggiDg . 5. lzl Tinch.le pu.Dctlr . 129, 235
SIraic sulv.y . S.. aba Dna logSin8l TIMER liSht . 16
Elpl.nmd survcyi Quicksbn survcy TRIMVEC Plur po3ero.crsilg progllrD , l3l
DifIcr.lri.l CPS rl nDc dm. !s .94 Trooblcsh@.iag . l?2
Endir8.2o2 T\{o S6i.l Pon Option . 2r7
lrg Dar! s.r.cn (wh.n $Ncy is onDing) . Tvo-dimcMionrl (2D) pGftion fixca. I18,
168 159
Mrin statls scrccar .35, 39
Othcr oFratio!3 durinS . 192 U
S[tic !uaeyi!8 pl nd.rs. I 14, 16l, l9t
$rli)o dBcripiin. 149 UniB in Nlvi8.rion P&rlgc Option.55
st ion rD .92, 98, 150, 170 Unit! of Mc$urt p'rrmc&r. 139
Shiion itrdcx . 103. 149 Univtisl Tinc coordiDdd (JTC). ?6 241,
SLtion r!I[c. 150, 155 2&
STATUS t ,. 15, 33 U3.rdiffdlntid ftngc ctro..60
Urc R.q. Accurcy (JRA) lrdsics . 4I,
$.cdng dirlctioo dtupl.y. 5r 78
STRVEY icn D (coDdoti d,& lqgin8). 193
Urc iiEc . 296
Sync time
&rtic survcy . gE v
SyE Tih. pd.Da.r . r 14. 16l, 190
VclEity ofrcc.iv.t . 57
T w
wrypoint! . 49. 50
m€ctob.cuisht.l3E
WciShtcd po.ition . 16, l l8
Surflcc Ma D.ll p...mcr.Is. l99
W.ighLd oluric. I 19
Thft.{instsiold (3D) locitioD fixcr . I 18,
WOlt-84 datun . t 13, l4O
159
Tim.
Fom.t of .tiif,hy . 6E
Y
Locrl tiE & rimc zoDc diqlry . t09 Y-codc. l2a
gt2 Sed66 /(}m Recaiver R6brE r

Comments on This Manual
Scrlqs 4000 Rqcllwr Relerence February 1995
P/N 225(NX, r6vlelon A
We welcom€ your comments and suggestions for improving oor publicatio.s.

Contributors of particularly helpful corr.rnents will receive a thank-you gift.
Fmm the United States or Canada, mail thi6 form to th€ address on the back. Frcm other
countdes, mail it to the Trimble field office address printed on the back of the manual's
Please cEcle a alspotlse for er.h ofthe statcrnents below:

I = Strongly alxee 2=Agree 3= Ncutral 4= Disagx€€ 5 = Strotrgiy disagtee
12345 The manual is well organized.

12345 I can find the information I want.
12345 thc informatioo in the n nual is accurate.
12345 I can easily understdd the insEuctions.
12345 The manual contaiB enough examples.
12345 The exanples arc appropria& and helpful.
123 4 5 The layout and format arc attrd.tive and uscful.
12345 The illustrations are clerr and hebful.
'Which parts of lhe manual do you use thc most?
What do you likc bcst about thc manual?
w}lat rc€ds the most improvement?
(Optional)You! natnc
Company
Addr$B
Telephonc FEJ(
Trimble Navigation Lirnited
645 North Mary Avenue
P,O- Box 3642
Sumyvale, CA 94088-3642

Docslide - Us - Trimble Series 4000 Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Docslide - Us - Trimble Series 4000 Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Docslide - Us - Trimble Series 4000 Reference Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Series 4000 Reference

Prrt Nunhcr: 21lgHl0

Tnnbb Nat U,[io{' Li/,ibd

Printed in rhe United Stares of America.

Series 4000 Receiver Beference

All oth€r brand Dames ar€ tradcrnar&s ofihcir rcspective hold,ers.

S€des 4000 Receiver tleisrence

2 The Keypad and Dispby ..........,...13

Series rlom Receivor Referonce

Numeric Fields.---...-----..-----..... ..................................

Alphanumeric Fields... ..............................27

SELECT LEG.........--._._.-.... .........._._.................._... 52

Serie6 4000 Recoiver Reforence

Refcrence Station......... ....9

Sed6s 4000 Recelvor Boferehce vil

POWER CONTROL... .....119

Seriog 21000 Receivor Reforence

Step 1: Select or Define a Station Description ... ......................................,...149

QIJICK.START NOW ........-.............-.. 169

S€rlss .l0oo Receivor Reference ix

Se66s 4000 Roceiver Belerance

schedule Plo! for All Salellites ..................--......... ..........247

Compact Measurments.........,.............................. ......2fi

Position Type 2............

RT Survev Data.......... 271

Series 40m Receiver R€ference x

Sei6s ,{OOO Beceiver Refer6nca

Serles r(lo0 Beceiver Berorence xiii

)dv Serios /lmo R€ceiv€r Refetenc€

The Series 4000 Beceivers

S6.ies,lO0O Rec€iver Roisrencs

. hesent data on a il-line, 4o-characrer front-panel disptay.

Series il00o Feceiver Refer6nce

Dual-Frequency Survaying Receivero

Sedes 4ooo Rgc€iver Referenc€

'fhe 4000SSE Geodetic ,lurveyor is similar to the Land Surveyor IID,

Series 4o0o Receiver Reference

and kircmatic su eys. It can record 26 hours of s-satellitc LllL2

The Geodetic System Survelor SSi is a Maxwcll-based rcceiver that

Slngle-F oqu€ncy Survcying Recelvers

The 40005E land Surveyor is an economical receiver for surveyint

The 400OSE Lrnd Sunetor // is an cconomical Maxwell-based

S€ries 40OO Recaiver Belerencg

The 400058 System Sulvs)or // is similar to the Land Surveyor II,

4000SSi series receivers leature Trimble's Super-trak technology.

Single-Frequency Positioning Receivers

Series zlooo Receiver Reference

Dual-Frequency Po3itionlng B€ceivors

Slngl€-Frequency Mapping REceiverg

Recelvors Not Discussed in Thls Manual

The Series 4000 includes sevcral ea ier models that have

Series /[{m Floceiver Roference

. Series 4000SE Static Land Surveyor, Kinernatic lnnd

What You Should Know

Series 21000 Recoiver Reference

cenain amount of inconsistent terminology, For example, in static

How to Use the Series 4000 Manuals

A User Guide ifirodlces the receiver and describes those of its

me Series 40d) Applicatiorl Guide explains the applications